MODERN ENGLISH
ITS GROWTH AND PRESENT USB
MODERN ENGLISH
ITS GROWTH AND PRESENT USE
BY
GEORGE PHILIP KRAPP, Pn.D.
PROFESSOR OF ENGLISH IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CINCINNATI
AUTHOR OF "THE ELEMENTS OF ENGLISH GRAMMAR"
CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS
NEW YORK CHICAGO BOSTON
PE
1075
Kl
COPYRIGHT, 1909, BY
CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS
Printed in the United States of America
G
To
BRANDER MATTHEWS
MASTER OF MODERN ENGLISH
THIS VOLUME
18 INSCRIBED BY HIS FRIEND AND DEBTOR
THE AUTHOR
PREFACE
THIS book is not designed to do away with the neces-
sity for using the dictionaries, grammars, and detailed
histories of the English language, but to prepare the
way for the more profitable and intelligent use of these
books. The grammars and the dictionaries are the mines
in which the crude materials, the natural resources, of
the language are stored ; the principles of development
appearing in language, the opinions which men hold with
respect to 'the use of language, these are the appliances
and the machinery by means of which the riches of the
dictionaries and encyclopedias of fact may be made avail-
able for effective command over language. Some of the
more important of these principles and opinions it is the
purpose of this book to present.
The generalizations here set forth are some of them
the commonplaces of the historical study of language.
For stating them again in his own way, the author does
riot feel that any apology is necessary. They are given
as simply as possible for the advantage of those readers
and students who wish to be informed as to the results
of the modern scientific study of language, but who
are not themselves professional linguists. The book is
untechnical, but, the author hopes, not unscholarly.
Attention is called in the brief bibliography at the end
of the volume to representative works which may be
viii PREFACE
consulted by those who wish to enter into the sub-
jects treated more fully than the limits of this volume
permitted.
Perhaps fuller citations of literary authorities may
be expected in discussions of points of divided use than
have been given. In general, however, it does not seem
to the author that the appeal to literary authority is the
proper method of attack in examining disputed ques-
tions of speech, spoken or written, and that very little
is gained by an elaborate assemblage of examples from
literary sources to confirm or to disprove a point of
present use. Where there is a real difference of prac-
tice — and this, it may be pointed out, is relatively
infrequent — nine times out of ten it would be as easy
to support one side as the other by the testimony of
literary authority. Past literary use is only one of many
tests that must be applied in determining present use.
The reading of literary English should strengthen the
habitual and unconscious feeling for expression by 'which
one acquires a large, a sure, and a varied sense of the
possible values of language. It should suggest what
may be done with language by showing what has been
done with it. Literary English, indeed, should be re-
garded in the same way as spoken English. Both are
forms of expression which have to be reduced to natural
and unconscious habit before they can be said to have
been mastered. Now nothing hinders such mastery
so much as a meticulous respect for the authority of
literary practice. De Quincey once said that authors
are a dangerous class for any language. He meant,
of course, that the literary habit of mind is likely to
prove dangerous for a language. It is likely to prove
dangerous because it so often leads a speaker or writer
PREFACE ix
to distrust natural and unconscious habit, even when
it is right, and to put in its stead some conscious theory
of literary propriety. Such a tendency, however, is
directly opposed to the true feeling for idiomatic Eng-
lish. It destroys the sense of security, the assurance
of perfect congruity between thought and expression,
which the unliterary and unacademic speaker and writer
often has, and which, with both literary and unliterary,
is the basis for all expressive use of language. The
source of authority in deciding questions of propriety
in form, questions which naturally arise less and less
frequently as one acquires a sure sense of the expressive
value of language, lies not in past use, but in what
might be called future use, that is, in the effectiveness
of the expression upon the minds of those who are to be
the receivers of it. But enough — perhaps too much
— has been said upon this subject in the body of the
book, and it may be left here with the statement that
altho good modern English derives much from tradi-
tional literary English, the final test of its goodness
or its badness is to be found always in immediate and
not in past use.
To the various excellent histories of the English
language by Emerson, Lounsbury, Jespersen, Toller,
and Bradley, as well as to more specialized studies and
essays, the author gratefully acknowledges his general
indebtedness. Wherever this indebtedness is specific,
the endeavor has been to give the credit where it is due.
Above all, the New English Dictionary has been con-
stantly and unfailingly helpful. This work really holds
the mirror up to nature. It does not use the language
of the imagination, but it is an amazing record of the
workings of the imagination. One who wishes to know
x PREFACE
the English language cannot do better than give his
days and his nights to the study of the New English
Dictionary. To those friends who have discussed with
him the ideas which the volume contains, the author
acknowledges an indebtedness not compensated by this
formal recognition. Among these friendly disputants
lie would mention in particular Prof. A. H. Thorndike,
of Columbia University, Mr. J. G. Bowman, Secretary
of the Carnegie Foundation, and Mr. C. M. Baker,
Headmaster of Latin in the Horace Mann School.
G. P. K.
THE UNIVERSITY OF CINCINNATI
June, 1909
CONTENTS
PAGE
I INTRODUCTION 3
II THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 15
A- III THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 44
IV ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 56
V ENGLISH SOUNDS 99
J VI ENGLISH WORDS " 183
VII ENGLISH GRAMMAR 286
VIII CONCLUSION 825
APPENDIX
THE OLD ENGLISH CHRONICLE, FOL. la. THE PAR-
DONER'S TALE, FOL. 306a. THE FIRST FOLIO OF
SHAKSPERE. LYCIDAS, LL. 165-193 .... 335
BIBLIOGRAPHY 343
INDEX OF SUBJECTS 349
INDEX OF WORDS . . . ... 353
ILLUSTRATIONS
The Old English Chronicle, Laud MS. 636, fol. la . . 25
Chaucer's Pardoner's Tale, Cambridge Univ. MS. G. G.
4. 27, fol 306 81
Shakspere, First Folio, Merchant of Venice, IV, 1,
119-152 161
Autograph of Milton's Lycidas, 11. 165-193 .... 307
MODERN ENGLISH
MODERN ENGLISH
i
INTRODUCTION
1. History and Politics. History, according to the
saying of a distinguished modern historian, is past
politics. To the contemporary observer, the practical
- measures supported and opposed by the various rival
political parties seem of only passing significance be-
cause they arise out of the immediate daily problems
and needs of actual life. When these same measures,
however, are viewed in the perspective of years, they
are seen then not to be independent and unrelated.
More or less unconsciously to themselves, the practical
politicians help or retard certain large principles of
development in the life of a people. Present politics is
history in the making.
2. The History of Language. In the same way the
history of a language is merely the record of the practi-
cal every-day speech of successive generations. Every
person who speaks or writes a language, who hands on
from one speaker to another any of the traditions of the
language is, in so far, a factor in the historical growth
of the language. And the whole history of the language
is made up of the sum of the individual acts of all those
who in past times have used the language in response
4 MODERN ENGLISH
to the immediate practical needs of life. Just as poli-
tics is history in the making, so present, every-day
speech and writing is the history of the language in the
making.
Another conclusion of the modern political historians
is applicable to the history of language. It is a very
general opinion among historians that the justification
of the study of the history of past periods is to be found
in the application of the results of such study to the
conditions of present life. Man learns to know himself
better, to conduct the affairs of his public and private
life better, from having observed the consequences of
the actions of men in other days. So also by the study
of the history of his speech he learns to adjust himself
more wisely to the conditions of present speech. He
learns that contemporary speech is not, on the one hand,
a chaos of individual instances, nor is it, on the other,
governed according to the decrees of a rigid, theoretical
system. He perceives that it is a living thing, and that
the principles which it illustrates in its growth have all
the flexibility and variety of life. To enable a speaker
or writer to realize this spirit, or life, of his own present
speech is one of the main ends of the historical study
of language.
3. The Function of Language. The effort to under-
stand this spirit, to find out what the tendencies of one's
native speech are, good and bad, is beset with many
difficulties. The uncertainty of the bearing of present
events always makes difference of opinion possible. If
we knew exactly the future significance of an action,
whether in politics, in personal conduct, or in speech, we
should doubtless all hold the same opinion with respect
INTRODUCTION 5
fco that action. But the future does not so easily yield
up its secrets, and our only guides are inferences drawn
from the observation of the past and the present.
There is always one ground of inference, however,
which offers a firm foothold. Our opinions with respect
to an action are naturally determined by the value of
that action in attaining the end towards which the actor
is striving. Our attitude towards any question of lan-
guage should consequently be determined by the pur-
pose and the function of language, just as the value of
any political action is determined by its serving or not
serving the purpose for which the state exists. What,
then, is the function)_oOangiiaga? Briefly answered,
language is a form of social custom and its/function is
the expression of social ideas. Language as social cus-
tom means that it has been slowly developed by man-
kind in the social relations of men to each other. It is
closely paralleled in its development by other kinds of
social custom. The laws governing rights of property,
of individual liberty, of self-defense, the moral laws,
such as those directed against lying, deception, and in-
sincerity, the rules of conduct in minor matters, such as
have to do with behavior and good breeding, — all these
have grown up as the result of the intercourse of Jnan
with man in social life. The habits, or the rules, of
such intercourse, through a long succession of genera-
tions have fixed themselves in the life of the people as
their social customs. Whether they are reduced to
writing, as is generally the case with criminal law, or
are merely held as the traditional rules of conduct of a
people, they are always in their origins the customary
rules of action which have arisen out of the practical
6 MODERN ENGLISH
exigencies of one man's trying to live on terms of social
understanding with another.
4. Speech as Social Custom. The special function
of speech as social custom is the expression of social
ideas. If men are to live with each other, if they are
not to be like stocks and stones, then they must have
some means of conveying to each other their needs,
their desires, their ideas, their aspirations. This they
might do by various means. So long as the ideas were
simple and primitive, they might be conveyed by very
crude means. A brandished club might serve to indi-
cate one's sense of the right of possession in a piece of
disputed property. But it is one of the characteristics
of man as man that the ideas which he wishes to con-
vey to his fellow-men have not remained thus simple
and crude. The social intercourse of men has become
extremely complex, both emotionally and intellectually,
and, corresponding to this complexity, there has bee a
an equal growth in the variety and the subtlety of the
customs of speech. Out of the practical needs of com-
munication has arisen the vast fabric of human lan-
guage. Manifestly, then, the best language being that
which most adequately realizes the function of lan-
guage, that is the best which enables men to express
themselves most fully and satisfactorily in their rela-
tions to each other. This is the ideal towards which
language strives. In the animal world we speak of
degeneration when certain functions of the organism
necessary to the preservation of its life and the exist-
ence of its species become weakened. In the same way
we may speak of degeneration in a language when it
changes in such a way that it becomes less capable of
INTRODUCTION 7
performing the functions for which language exists;
and, on the other hand, we may speak of growth and
improvement in language as it becomes more and more
effective in enabling men to understand each other.
5. The Speech of a Democracy. The necessity of
realizing in an ever-increasing degree this ideal function
of language is one that is peculiarly incumbent upon a
democracy. The best national speech for a democracy
is that which enables it to be most fully self -expressive.
It is in itself that the fate of a democracy lies. From
its own members must emanate all its laws, its ideals of
conduct, of whatever nature. It must have confidence
in the value of its united opinion; and its prime duty
consists in such a free and liberal exchange of ideas that
there shall be a united opinion. A democracy which is
not self -expressive and self -determining is not a real
democracy. Anything in speech, therefore, which pre-
vents the democratic nation from realizing itself as a
self-determining body is harmful. Thus the national
speech of a democracy cannot be sectional; if there is'
not one uniform speech acceptable to the whole nation,
then the speech of one region must have equal authority
with that of another. The speech of a democracy can-
not be a class speech ; it cannot be a traditional literary
speech, the so-called " best English " of a special limited
academic or literary class. Its roots must go deeper.
They must strike down into the region of the practical
daily life of the citizens whose vote and whose opinion
make the country what it is. If it is to have any en-
during vitality it must rest upon the basis of national
custom where national custom is made. The duty of
making these customs sound and good is one that rests
8 MODERN ENGLISH
on all alike. The welfare of the speech of a democracy
can no more be left in the hands of a few preservers
or regulators than its political government can be left
in the hands of a few self-appointed directors or dic-
tators. In both a diffused intelligence is the prime
requisite to a healthy national life.
6. Speech and Education. The obstacles that
stand in the way of the realization of the ideal of a
democratic speech are confessedly numerous and great.
It is difficult, in the first place, to determine just how
much value should be ascribed to tradition. Old ways
are not good merely because they are old ; and of course
the same can be said of new ways. It is a fair con-
servative assumption, however, that what has served
man's purpose in the past will continue to serve it
best in the present, until changed conditions demand
new ways. But again one must take heed not to be
so blinded by old customs as not to perceive when the
conditions actually are changed. In the second place,
democracy works from the bottom up, and not from
the top down. Consequently, popular education when
it is diffused over the whole body of society, as society
is at present constituted, is likely to be a somewhat
thin and inadequate kind of education. It thus hap-
pens that there are people who rest content with very
imperfect education, who take the dry husks of the
mere rudiments of education for the reality itself. We
find persons who think that the secret of good English
consists merely in expressing themselves in a certain
prescribed way, in using a certain intonation of voice
or a certain quality of vowel sound when they speak,
or one form of phrasing, or even of spelling, rather
INTRODUCTION 9
than another, when they write. They fail to realize
that the conventional customs of speaking and writing,
important as the knowledge of them is, are neverthe-
less the mere preliminaries, the elementary mechanics,
of a good use of language. English which is merely
correct cannot claim very high praise. Going a little
lower in the scale of intelligence, we may find that a
man who has come from generations of ancestors who
could not write, is likely to think that the simple ability
to write is the pinnacle of education. But for him per-
haps it is; and all that democratic education can offer
to any large body of people in different stages of de-
velopment is the opportunity for each to realize what
at a given moment is the highest and best thing for
him to do. The general level cannot be raised by a
single act, or by the acts of a few, but only by the
sum of all the acts of the people who make up the
whole. In spite, therefore, of the low ideals of certain
members of the body politic, it must always remain
the hope of a democracy that the average plane of its
life will rise higher and higher from generation to gen-
eration. And so long as the life of the people remains
vigorous, so long as their minds and their wills are
energetic and stirring, this will remain a well-founded
hope.
7. The Best Tendency in Speech. In speech, there-
fore, the ideal attitude of mind is that which leads the
speaker to unite himself to those customs and tenden-
cies which, in his opinion, make for the welfare of the
national idiom in the most effective manner. If speech
arises, as we have said, out of the immediate social rela-
tions of man with man, it will be seen that therein lies
10 MODERN ENGLISH
the final test of its value. It will be seen, also, that
those tendencies of speech with which a speaker or
writer wishes to unite himself are merely manifestations
of general social tendencies. Shall our ideal social
tendency be one that makes for exclusiveness, for the
development of limited class distinctions ? Or shall it
be a broader and more liberal tendency, one that is dem-
ocratic and generously inclusive ? In speech shall we
endeavor to cultivate refined and more or less arbitrary
distinctions which shall enable us to make a strict divi-
sion between conventional and literary English, on the
one hand, and what may be called natural and seK-
determining English on the other? Is the best English
that which is acquired by learning and following an ex-
ternal rule, or is it the English which is acquired by fol-
lowing social custom, the best, as each views it, and PS
each is brought into contact with it, in the actual proc-
esses of living, speaking, and writing ? These are son?e
of the questions which each of us must answer for him-
self. Necessarily every speaker and every writer must
follow some tendency of the speech of the community,
whether this be conscious or unconscious. Every one
of us is always following, at the same time that he is
helping to make, custom. In what direction shall we
throw our influence ? Before we can answer this ques-
tion we must have some knowledge of the conflicting
customs and tendencies of our speech, and as this knowl-
edge grows in breadth and certainty, the answer to the
question will become, according to our sympathies, cor-
respondingly easy and unhesitating.
8. Literary and Spoken Language. In all study
of language as expression, it is now generally conceded,
INTRODUCTION 11
by those who have given much thought to the matter,
that the spoken, as compared with the written or literary
language, is of far the greater importance. It is mainly
in the speech of men and women as they come into
direct social relations with each other that language de-
velops and grows in a natural, untrammeled, and effec-
tive way. The language of literature is merely an
approximate transcription, more or less remote, of the
language of speech. It is from the latter that the lan-
guage of literature is derived, and it must always return
to its source to renew itself when, as it constantly tends
to do, it becomes attenuated and outworn. This being
granted, it readily follows that it is speech which we
should study, not only for effectiveness in conversation,
bat also for effectiveness in literature. The popular
opinion is not usually in accord with this statement. It
is often believed that the language of literature is some-
thing different from and better than the language of
speech. This latter, being the common possession of all,
ia looked down upon as something ignoble, or at least
not admirable. Because it is familiar, it is regarded as
contemptible. It is supposed that the ability to use the
English of literature is a special and acquired accom-
plishment, and that one learns the language of literature
as one learns a new art, like playing the piano or paint-
ing. Being a special and higher accomplishment, the
language of literature is thus often regarded as furnish-
ing the model for the language of speech, and the theory
is held that the latter should be made to conform as
fully as possible to the former. One need only " talk
like a book " to realize the absurdity of such a belief.
On the other hand it is no credit to the language of lit-
12 MODERN ENGLISH
erature to read like a book. Literary language which \a
bookish we do not regard as admirable ; on the con-
trary, when we want to praise an author's style, we
rather say that it is true, natural, real. The fact is that
literature endeavors merely to transcribe life, to give in
the permanent form of words and sentences the passing
experiences, thoughts, and emotions of men. According
as it does this the more directly and truly, the greater
literature it is. There is no need to prove that language
is one of the most characteristic expressions of human
life. It is as speaking beings that men think of them-
selves. The writer, therefore, who wishes to transcribe
human life, must transcribe it in the forms of speech in
which it finds its most immediate expression. His task
is parallel to that of the artist. When a portrait painter
wishes to paint a portrait, he must study the features
,w<~ of the human face and the lines of the human figure ;
when a landscape painter wishes to transfer to canvas
his impressions of sea or land, he must go into the open
^**T * and study clouds, trees, and atmosphere. Both are said
to follow nature, because it is their impressions of the
reality in nature which they endeavor to record. In the
same way the literary artist must follow nature, not only
by studying the inner moods and actuating motives of
men, but also the ways in which these moods and mo-
tives find their most natural and effective expression. It
is true, of course, that literary language has customs and
conventions, for example, meter in poetry, which are
peculiar to itself. In the same way painting has cer-
tain devices, tricks of method, which in themselves are
untrue to nature, but which are used because to the
beholder they produce or heighten the effects of nature,
INTRODUCTION 13
The painter's concern is to cause the illusion of nature,
since he cannot actually create the counterpart to na-
ture. So also the literary artist attempts to produce
the illusion of reality in language. All that is appro-
priate to speech is consequently not necessarily ap-
propriate to all forms of literature, and, on the other
hand, some things are appropriate to certain kinds of
literature which are not appropriate to speech. But
whenever the customs and conventions of literature be-
come so peculiar to it that they are purely literary, or
academic, as we say, when they produce the effect of
being untrue to, or remote from, nature, then they are
appropriate neither to the literary nor to any other lan-
guage. It is to the natural, spoken language that we
make our final appeal. And it is interesting to observe
that just those periods of English literature have been
greatest in which the language of literature stood near-
est to the language of speech. Chaucer's literary style
became more and more natural as he grew older, until in
the Canterbury Tales, his latest work, we almost think
we hear his characters speak. The language of Shak-
spere is the language of the drama, and whatever con-
ventions the language of the drama may have, its prime
requisite is that it shall be true to life. The poets of
a third great period of English literature, beginning with
Wordsworth and Coleridge, made the imitation of the
simple speech of daily life their first principle. Their
art on the side of language consists largely in a return
to nature as exemplified in speech. What is true of
English, is true of literature generally. Students of
Greek tell us that much of the charm of Greek litera-
ture consists in the intimate dependence of the language
14 MODERN ENGLISH
of literature upon the language of speech ; Greek liter-
ary style is not a special caste language for literary pur-
poses, but rather an extension of the spoken language to
written uses. Moli^re, the only Frenchman worthy to
rank as the fellow of Shakspere, owes much of his
power to the naturalness of his style. Hating as he did
hypocrisy and affectation in every form, we should ex-
pect to find him natural and real in his writing. In
short it is a false standard of value to assume that the
test of highest excellence is to be found only in printed
and written words. These are merely makeshifts and
substitutes for the reality. They serve, to be sure, a
very important purpose. For one thing, they preserve
what otherwise might become lost if intrusted only to
oral transmission. They perform a tremendous service
to humanity also by extending the bounds of individual
experience. In a library of books we can commune at
will with the spirits of all ages and all places. Indeed
the ability to write is so highly regarded by mankind
that perhaps no other kind of fame is so generally and
so eagerly desired as literary fame. Yet this glory
should not blind one to the fact that literature is not
self -producing, but grows out of nature. The aspirant
for literary fame must not only know letters, above all
he must know life. If he wishes to write for his age,
he must know how the men of his age speak. He must
not expend all his energy and admiration upon books,
but must turn to that form of the language which, above
the language of books, is the most wonderful, the most
dignified, and the most worthy of respect, the flexible,
subtle speech of men in the infinite relations of human
life.
n
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE
1. Speech and Race. The English language is one
of the most widely distributed languages of the modern
world. Centered originally in the little kingdom of
England, the speech has spread to all the four corners
of the globe. It has become the speech of two of the
most powerful nations of modern times, and is now
the speech of the most numerous civilized people of
the world. In the course of its history, it has imposed
itself upon peoples originally speaking many different
languages and originally of very diverse racial origins ;
and altho each new body thus incorporated has affected
the whole, the stock of the language has remained es-
sentially the same to the present day. It shall be our
first task to take a survey of the history of the English
language from this ethnological or racial point of view.
2. Celtic Britain. In the first century before Christ,
when the island of Great Britain first became well
known to the Romans, who were then the most power-
ful as well as the most highly civilized nation of
Europe, it was occupied by a race of Celtic people,
speaking a Celtic language. This race had been pre-
ceded in Britain by various different, prehistoric races
concerning which little is known; it was one of these
prehistoric races, however, which reared the great
monoliths at Stonehenge on Salisbury Plain. The
16 MODERN ENGLISH
Celtic inhabitants of the island called themselves Brit-
ons, and from this name of the people the country was
called Britannia by the Romans, whence is derived our
modern Britain. The Celts of Britain were merely a
branch of a greater Celtic people which then dwelt in
Gaul and in Spain, the Celts of Gaul being the prede-
cessors of the Franks, a Teutonic people from whom
the country derived its modern name of France. On
the Continent the Celts have been almost completely
absorbed by the Roman and Teutonic conquerors of
their countries. But in England to this day they have
maintained a more or less separate existence, and their
speech still survives in the Gaelic of the Highlands of
Scotland, the Welsh of Wales, and also in the Irish of
Ireland. Until comparatively recent times a Celtic
speech was also spoken in Cornwall.
3. The Roman Invasions. The first military inva-
sion which the Romans, the world conquerors, made
against the Celts of Britain, was in the years 55 and
54 B. C., under the leadership of Julius Csesar. This
was more in the nature of an excursion from Gaul,
however, where Caesar was then campaigning,1 than
a settled attempt to conquer the country. The serious
conquest of Britain was not undertaken until about a
century later, A. D. 42, under the Emperor Claudius ;
and about the year A. D. 80 the country was organized
as a Roman province, under the command of the Roman
general Agricola. The portions of the country occupied
by the Romans were chiefly those central, southern,
and eastern parts which later became the kingdom of
England. The mountainous regions of Wales in the
1 See Gallic War, Books IV and V.
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE IT
West and of Scotland in the North were sought out as
a place of refuge by the Celts who had been driven out
of the more fertile regions of the lowlands. In these
fastnesses they maintained an independent and hostile
existence. As a protection against Celtic invasions from
the north the Emperor Hadrian (A. D. 120) built a wall,
parts of which are still standing, between the Firth of
Solway and the mouth of the river Tyne. A second wall
was later built by Antoninus Pius, extending from the
Firth of Clyde to the Firth of Forth ; and still later these
walls were further extended by the Emperor Severus,
who came to Britain in the year 208. In the protected
regions the Roman civilization in Britain was prosperous
and highly developed. The ground was cultivated, and
sheep and cattle were raised. The mines of Cornwall
and of Northumberland were worked and an extensive
commerce with the Continent was carried on. The Ro-
mans built houses, temples, theaters, altars, and baths
after the style of the buildings of their home country,
and ruins and relics of these houses that have been pre-
served to modern times show that some of them must
have been very luxurious. They built also highways
(as for example Watling Street, extending the whole
breadth of England from Canterbury to Chester), some
parts of which are in use to this day. Our word u street,"
derived from Latin strata, in the phrase strata via, " paved
way," was borrowed from the Roman soldiers, both OD
the Continent and in Britain. These highways were
built, in accordance with the usual policy of the Romans,
as military roads to facilitate the passage of troops from
one section of the country to another. Walled cities
were also established at various advantageous points in
18 MODERN ENGLISH
Britain, and many of these have likewise lasted to
modern times, some of them still preserving parts of the
old Roman defenses. They were called castra, and this
word, in its modified forms, appears in the names Ches-
ter, Winchester, Doncaster, Gloucester, Worcester, Exeter
(in Anglo-Saxon times known as Exanceaster), and in
many other names of towns and places. The language
which was spoken by the Romans in Britain was the
Latin language in a popular or colloquial form, being the
ordinary language of the soldiers and merchants who
constituted the larger part of the population. It was
the same language as that spoken in Gaul by the Roman
conquerors of that country, and if the Romans in Eng-
land had continued in uninterrupted residence, as they
did in Gaul, it is quite probable that the language of
Great Britain to-day would be a Romance speech instead
of English.
The Roman occupation of Britain, however, came to a
sudden end. In the fourth and fifth centuries A. D., the
pressure of the northern tribes upon Italy and Rome be-
gan to make itself felt, and Rome was compelled to
strengthen her home defenses. To do this it was neces-
sary to call in certain of the legions that were stationed
in the provinces, and naturally the most distant were the
first thus to be given up. In the year 407 the greater
part of the Roman soldiery left Britain ; in the year 410
the last Roman legion was withdrawn, and the Emperor
Honorius sent a letter to the people of Britain in which
he told them to take charge of their own defense.
Since the Roman civilization in Britain had been al-
together military in character, the withdrawal of the
legions immediately prepared the way for the breaking
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 19
down of the whole Roman system of government and
for the next important and dramatic episode in the
history of the island, the coming of the English.
4. The Anglo-Saxon Conquest. Besides their her-
editary enemies, the Celts of the mountainous regions of
Wales and Scotland, the Romans in Britain had had
another foe to contend with. These were certain Ger-
manic Saxon tribes who were in the habit of crossing
over from north Germany and ravaging the eastern coast
of Britain, known as the Saxon Shore because it was ex-
posed to the attacks of the Saxons. While the Roman
soldiers were still stationed in Britain these predatory
bands of warriors could be easily held in check. With
the departure of the legions, however, the state of affairs
was altered. The Celts of the highlands, finding that
the defenses of the country had been weakened by the
withdrawal of the Roman soldiery, swarmed down from
their rocky fastnesses, and immediately began the tan'k
of regaining their ancestral kingdoms. It is probable
that the Roman citizens left behind in the towns after the
departure of the legions were an unwarlike population.
The defense of the country had so long been left in the
hands of a professional military class that when this
class was removed there were none left trained in the
arts of war to take its place. At any rate the inhabit-
ants of the Roman towns and the dwellers in the Roman
villas were no match for the rude and warlike Celts.
They were thus placed between two fires, the Celts on
the one side and the marauding Germanic tribes on the
other. Thinking to seize the more favorable horn of the
dilemma, they turned to the Germanic invaders and
asked them to come over and help them subdue tbetr
20 MODERN ENGLISH
enemies. In response to this invitation, extended by
Vortigern, king of the Roman Britons, tradition tells us
that two Saxon chiefs, Hengest and Horsa, with their
followers, landed on the island of Thanet, on the coast of
Kent, in the year 449. True to their compact they first
aided the Roman Britons to drive back the Celts, but
the story goes that, observing the weakness of their allies
and the richness of the land, they sent word back to
their countrymen at home that they should come over
and assist them, that they might together possess the
land. The warriors who came in response to this request
were of three tribes of north Germans, the Angles,
who lived in the region of modern Holstein, the Jutes,
who lived in the region of modern Jutland, and the
Saxons, who lived in the region of modern Schleswig.
The story of the conflict between these Teutonic tribes
and the Roman Britons, with whom the Celts now be-
came united against the common foe, has been but im-
perfectly reported by history. We know that the
struggle was stubborn, but it is plain that the Britons
were unable to stand out against their barbarous foe-
men. Battle after battle was fought, but always with
the result that the Britons were driven further inland
and up into the mountainous regions to which the Ro-
mans several centuries before had driven the original
Celts. Later tradition has developed in great detail the
story of King Arthur, the heroic leader of the Britons,
and of his twelve great battles against the Teutonic
heathen. But there are no authentic records of these
twelve battles, or of King Arthur, that would enable us
to build up a connected story of the events. All we
know is that out of the welter and confusion of these
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 21
wars, a new Teutonic England, consisting at first of a
number of separate kingdoms, arose from the ruins of
the old Celtic and Roman Britain. The first Anglo-
Saxon kingdom to be founded was that of Kent. In 519
occurs the first mention of a West Saxon kingdom, and
547 is the date of the first Northumbrian king. By
the middle of the sixth century, therefore, we may
say that the Saxon conquest of Britain was complete.
Tliis does not mean that the whole island was under
Saxon control, for Wales and Scotland were still Celtic,
as they had been all through the period of Roman occu-
pation. From their retreats in the mountains the Celts
continued to make frequent forays into the Saxon
country, and the story of the complete reduction of
Celtic Britain would carry us far down into modern
times.
The three tribes who had thus become masters of the
fairest part of the island of Britain, settled each in a
separate region. The Jutes, who were the smallest of
the three tribes, settled in Kent and the Isk^ofJWight.
The Angles settled the regions north of the Thaines to
the Firth of Forth, exclusive of the region immediately
north of the mouth of the Thames. The two main
kingdoms of the Angles were No^hmnbria
As the most numerous and best organized of the tribes
and the one in which a literature was first developed,
the Angles in time gave the name to the whole country,
Englaland, u land of the Angles," and to the speech,
Englisc, "English," or "the English speech." The
Saxons settled the regions south of the Thames, ex-
cepting those parts occupied by the Jutes, and'" the re-
gion just north of the mouth of that river. The chief
22 MODERN ENGLISH
Saxon kingdoms were Wessexj the kingdom of the West
Saxons ; Essex, the kingdom of the East Saxons ; Sussex,
the kingdom of the South Saxons; and Middlesex, the
kingdom of the Middle Saxons. For a long time these
various Anglian, Jutish, and Saxon kingdoms main-
tained separate existences. They were first united into
a loose sort of confederation by Egbert, who came to the
throne of Wessex in the year 802, but it was not. until
the beginning of the tenth century that the union became
complete and lasting. This united people, as has been
stated, called itself the English people. They are also
known by the name Anglo-Saxons, a composite name
made up of the two most important tribes that united to
form the nation ; this name, however, is an invention of
scholars and historians of later times, and altho it is
a convenient descriptive name, it should be remembered
that the Anglo-Saxons in their own period called them-
selves English and their country England.1 To bring
out the fact of the direct sequence of the later periods of
English history after the earlier, it is often convenient
to speak of the Anglo-Saxon period as the Old English
period, and of the language of the time as Old English.
This terminology thus runs parallel to the succeeding
Middle English and Modern English periods.
1 The words England, English are pronounced as though they were
written Ingland, Inglish. As a matter of fact in earlier periods they were
often so written, the pronunciation being then in accord with the spelling.
In Anglo-Saxon the words were written Englaland, Englisc, and were pro-
nounced as written. But the vowel e before ng changes regularly in
Middle English to t, Anglo-Saxon strenge, for example, becoming " string."
Thus England, English became Ingland, Inglish and were so written for a
time. Later this phonetic spelling was " reformed " to agree with the
original Anglo-Saxon spelling, Eng-, altho the pronunciation has re-
mained Ing. These two words are the only ones in English in which
the combination eng is pronounced ing.
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 23
5. The Civilization of the Anglo-Saxons. At
the time of their arrival in England the Anglo-Saxons
1 were a heathen people, worshipping the gods Thor and
Woden, and the many other divinities of the Teutonic
mythology and religion. They were seamen and war-
riors, and gained a large part of their livelihood, like the
Danes of a later period, by making plundering expedi-
tions upon the coasts of neighboring countries. With
their settlement in England, however, a great change
came over this wild and barbarous people. Having now
a rich and fertile land in their possession, they were no
longer impelled to live by robbery and violence, but
settled down to the peaceful occupations of farming and
raising sheep and cattle. They soon became rich, and
with this increase in wealth naturally came a greater
development of the arts and of the more humane aspects
of life. The greatest civilizing influence, however, to
which they were subjected was that of Christianity^iEL-
troduced to them by the Roman missionary Augustine,
and his assistants, in the year 597. The response to
Augustine's preaching was immediate and enthusiastic,
and in a short time the whole of Anglo-Saxon England
became Christian. Gradually, also, the newcomers
worked out a political system, and from being a discon-
nected group of tribal kingdoms or states, they became,
in the time of Alfred and his successors, a nation in the
true sense of the word, with one king and a strongly
centralized government to hold them together. Their
speech was, of course, Germanic, and it was closely related
to that spoken in Germany and other parts of northern
Europe (see pp. 46-50). In course of time this speech also
became the vehicle for literary expression, both in verse
24 MODERN ENGLISH
and in prose. As is almost always true of the begin-
nings of a national literature, Old English poetry pre-
ceded prose. As early as the beginning of the seventh
century Old English poetry was probably composed and
written down in England, altho all the manuscripts which
have been preserved to modern times are copies which
date from a period considerably later. Most of this
poetry is highly traditional in character ; for altho the
Anglo-Saxons by this time had generally turned to
quiet agricultural and pastoral pursuits, their poetry
nevertheless is very warlike in tone; and altho they
had long since ceased to follow the water extensively,
the sea, its dangers and its attractions, is one of their most
frequent poetic themes. This is true not only of their
native heroic poetry, as for example the great epic poem
Beowulf, which is the most important literary monument
of the Old English period that has come down to us, but
also of the later poetry of the school of Caedmon, written
about the middle of the seyenth century, and of the
school of Cynewulf, written about the middle of the
eighth century, which is strongly under Christian influ-
ence and the subject matter of which is Christian story
and legend. This poetry also is cast in the old epic
warlike mould of the earlier native verse. The expla-
nation of this is to be found in the fact that all Old Eng-
lish poetry is popular in its origins — that is, it goes
back to the early warlike periods of the race when poetry
was handed down by oral tradition from minstrel to
minstrel. And as poetry is always very conservative,
it is natural that when the period of written literature
began the old poetic traditions and conventions should
be preserved by the side of much that was new. The
*^| Wcomon ^qujftr ottttojt}) ybcpiun
6 an b|ttrtaf. n>d yc <qt a>c^<m
don ftjp
of ^bqtnutn
V]i)rittne» ^cfi
THE OLD ENGLISH CHRONICLE
From the Bodleian manuscript, Laud 636.
(For description, see Appendix.)
26 MODERN ENGLISH
great body of Old English poetry is preserved in three
volumes, or codexes, of miscellaneous content, Manu-
script Junius XI in the Bodleian Library at Oxford ;
the Vercelli Book, found in the year 1822 in an out-of-
the-way library at Vercelli, Italy, where it is still pre-
served ; and the Exeter Book, the property of Exeter
Cathedral in England.
Old English prose, on the other hand, the body of
which was not written until the ninth^century and
later, is completely under the dominance of the new
order of thought. There is nothing primitive and tra-
ditional about the prose, but, on the contrary, it is all
distinctly Christian in tone and, for its period, very
modern. It consists mainly of historical, philosophical,
and religious or exegetical writings, and centers chiefly
about the name of Alfred, who died in 901, and of ^Elf-
ric, who died near the close of the Old English period
about the year 1020. One of the most important prose
documents is the Old ^English Chronicle* the earliest
attempt at the consecutive writing of history in the
English tongue. It was probably compiled under the
direction of King Alfred about the middle of the ninth
century, but it was continued in various forms by later
hands, the Laud version, of which the opening is here
reproduced, coming down as late as the middle of the
twelfth century.
On the whole one must say that between the arrival
of Hengest and Horsa in 449 and the close of the Old
English period with the coming of William the Con-
queror in 1066, the Anglo-Saxons had developed a
relatively high civilization. They were well governed,
they had an enlightened religion, they cultivated learn-
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 27
ing and letters. In some of the arts, for example the
making of enameled jewelry, they were famous, and
the embroidery of ecclesiastical garments done by the
Anglo-Saxon women had even a Continental reputation.
The people lived in comfort and often in luxury, some
of the satires of the times showing that then, as always,
extravagance in dress and the table accompanied pros-
perity. One must not think, therefore, of the Old
English period as barbarous and uncivilized. It was
indeed the period of the beginnings of English speech
and English literature, but even in their beginnings
our language and literature afford much that may and
should be studied, not only for its historical interest,
but also for its intrinsic wisdom and beauty.
6. The Danish Invasions and the Danish Con-^o*
quest. In the midst of their peaceful development,
however, the Anglo-Saxons were called upon to meet a
great danger. History repeated itself ; for just as the
weakened Britons several centuries before had yielded to
the attacks of the Jutes, Angles, and Saxons, so now
these latter, also weakened by the refining influences of
civilization and by the gradual decay of their warlike
habits, were compelled to meet the advances of certain
kinsmen of theirs from the Continent, the Danes. The
method of the Danish invasions was practically the same
as that of the original Anglo-Saxon invasion. They first
came on marauding expeditions, returning each time to
their own country. About the year 850, however, they
began a campaign of conquest and settlement, and, in a
short time, they gained control of all England except the
little kingdom of Wessex, south of the Thames, which
was held and defended by the heroic Alfred. After
28 MODERN ENGLISH
Alfred's death in 901 his son and successor Edward, and
after Edward, Alfred's grandson ^Ethelstan, succeeded
in winning back the greater part of England from the
Danes. But this success was only temporary, for, in
the reign of ^Ethelred the Unready (978-1016), the
Danes and Northmen came over to England in ever-
increasing numbers and gained possession of the en-
tire land.
In the year 1017 Cnut became king of England,
find a Danish king occupied both the English and
Danish throne at the same time. Cnut was succeeded by
his son Hardacnut (1039-1042), and Hardacnut was
succeeded by Edward the Confessor (1042-1066},jn
whose long and peaceful reign the Dane and Anglo-Saxon
in England became fused into one people. Closely
related in blood and speaking languages which had a
great deal in common, the two peoples, the conquered
and the conquerors, readily united. With that remark-
able vitality which has always characterized it, the Anglo-
Saxon language succeeded in crowding out the Danish,
and tho modified in some respects by the influences
to which they had been subjected, it was an English
language and an English people that arose again out
of the Danish Conquest.
7. The Norman Conquest. After the coming of
the Anglo-Saxons to Britain in the fifth century, un-
doubtedly the event most far-reaching in its later effect
upon the speech and the institutions of the people who
inhabited the island was the Norman Conquest under
William the Conqueror in 1066. The Danish Conquest
had not been without its effect; but owing to the close
relationship in blood and speech that existed between the
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 29
Anglo-Saxons and the Danes, and the consequent ease
with which they fused into one people, the Danish
addition to the English population may be regarded
rather as strengthening the original stock than changing
it or turning it in new directions. The Norman Con-
quest, however, was entirely different; for it not only
succeeded after a time in imposing a new social and
political system upon the English people, but even in
putting the English language in the second place tempo-
rarily and in profoundly affecting it permanently. The
Normans who came to England in the train of William
spoke Norman French, a dialect of the French language
spoken in the province of Normandy. By birth and
descent, however, they were not primarily Franks, but
were nearly related to those Teutonic Danish and Scan-
dinavian tribes who, in the reign of ^Ethelred, had be-
come masters of England. The name Norman is merely
a contraction of Northman, and (the Normans were Scan- ^) u
dinavian seafarers who had settled in northern France
just as, and at the same time that, the Danes and North-
men were settling in England. Like their kinsmen in
England, the Northmen in France gave up their native
speech, and as the former had accepted English, so
they accepted French. We have, therefore, the curious
spectacle of a people of the same blood producing all •,
the effect of a foreign race upon their kinsmen, merely I
because of a difference in language — a striking illustra-
tion of the fact that speech is thicker than blood. But it
should be remembered that with the French language
the Normans had imbibed all the ideas and ways of
thinking of the French, and consequently had become
as much French as the Franks themselves.
30 MODERN ENGLISH
The first effect of the Conquest upon England was
to place Normans in the positions of authority in the
country, and thus to make French the language of the
court and the ruling classes. But there is no indication
that William or any of his successors attempted to
coerce the native English-speaking population into using
French, and at first the growth of the Norman French
influence upon English was very slow. There is every
reason to believe that if the relations between France and
England had ceased with the Conquest, it would have
been but a short time before the Norman French were as
completely fused with the English as the Danes had be-
come. But the Norman French influence upon Eng-
lish, altho it was at first slow, was increasing. French
was not forced upon the English by any edict of law, but
its use was encouraged by an even more powerful force^
social custom. As the language of the ruling class,
French came to be regarded as the polite and cultivated
language. Instruction was, after a time, no longer given
in English, but those who studied at all, studied French,
and, if any other language, Latin. Even when Normandy
was lost to England in the year 1204, and later when, in
the middle of the century, the separation between the
two countries became more complete by the decrees of
King Louis IX of France and Henry III of England,
the latter prohibiting Englishmen from holding estates
in Normandy, and the former prohibiting Normans from
holding estates in England, the cultivation of French
continued. In spite of these decrees, there must have
been a continual freshening of the stream of influence by
the passing back and forth of Frenchmen, not only Nor-
ruans but Frenchmen of other parts of France, to
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 31
from England. The ties of blood could not be disre-
garded, even tho political conditions had changed.
Another main reason for the increasing influence of
French upon English is to be found in the way in which
Englishmen themselves came to regard French. The
great body of Englishmen,! the plain people who were/T j^p
little influenced by questions of fashion or education^
never spoke anything but English.^ In the middle and
the higher social, literary, and educational life, however,
French acquired a special distinction. As the Slanguage i fo,
of the ruling class its authority was naturally great. \ It
was, moreover, commonly regarded as the politest Ian- ^
guage of Europe. . The University of Paris, founded
about 1170, was a place of resort for the scholars of all
Europe. | In the French language was written a great \
and growing literature,^ which other nations, the English
especially, strove to imitate and absorb. It was the lan-
guage also of polite intercourse, and the French capital
was regarded not only as the seat of learning and of
letters but also of refinement. There grew up thus in
England a sort of Gallomania, as it may be called, a
sense of respect and admiration for everything French
because it was French. The height of this fashion was
not reached until between the years 1300 and 1350^ but
it is this fashionable fad more than anything else that
accounts for the powerful influence of French, in this
early period, upon English. The French which was imi-
tated in the fourteenth century was of course no longer
Norman French, but the French of Paris. For it Eng-
lish was even in danger for a time of being given up
altogether as the language of literature and polite conver-
sation. Those who continued to use English strove often
32 MODERN ENGLISH
to make it as near like French as possible. The .
tion consisted in the borrowing of words and phrases, in
^ the adaptation of French locutions and idioms to English
usage, in the carrying over of French pronunciation to
,» English words and even in such mechanical matters as
y r spelling and handwriting. This use of French spelling
and writing was in a way forced upon English. Since
instruction in English was no longer given in the schools,
but only in French, when one wished to write English
thejjules of French spelling and the style of French
writing were simply transferred to English.j The extent
to which this Gallicizing of the English language was
carried may be seen from the usage of the writer of the
collection of saints' lives known as the Early South
English Legendary, written about 1280. The author, or
compiler, of this legendary, judging from the sentiments
he expresses, was undoubtedly a patriotic Englishman,
but his patriotism did not prevent him from following
r French fashions. Thus he seems to have pronounced
\" his final th's in English words like breath, death, etc.,
with a very faint and almost disappearing sound, as a
Frenchman, to whom the th sound was strange and
difficult, would have done. He even rimes words which
have final th with words which do not, as for example,
stand eth and lande.1 In imitation of French spellings
like langue, morgue, etc., in which u is written after the g
to indicate the hard quality of the sound, we have spell-
ings such as finguer for finger, kingue for king, and
doggue for dog. Such spellings have not indeed entirely
disappeared from English to this day. We still spell
tongue, which is Old English tunge, and which accord-
\ * The final t of lande is of course pronounced.
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 33
ingly snould give Modern English tung, like lung;
but both the o instead of w, and the u after the g,
are survivals of these French spellings. Other in-
stances of French gu in English words are guilt, guild, j
guess.
Toward the middle of the fourteenth century, how-
ever, this mad admiration for everything French began
to suffer a decline and English began to rise again to
the ascendency. Thus in 1362 it was decreed that all
pleadings in the law courts in England should be made
in English and not in French, and in the same year the
English Parliament for the first time was opened with
an English speech. French still continued to be culti-
vated as a polite accomplishment, as indeed it is to this
day, but from this time on English came to be more and
more the language of literature and scholarship, as well
as of the higher official and court life in England, and
by 1500 (the end of the Middle English period) French
had long ceased to be a serious rival of English. It
should be remembered, however, that the English which
thus came to the front again was very different from the
literary English of the period before the French inva-
sion. English had been so long neglected in favor of
French that the feeling for it as a standard literary lan-
guage had largely died out. It became for a time
almost altogether a popular dialect. Consequently when
English began again to rise into supremacy, it was this
popular transformation of the older English that grad-
ually assumed the rank of the new standard speech. Jiie
new English of the Middle English period is therefore ^
the Old English of the Anglo-Saxon period as this latter
was modified, first by the influence of French, and
v
r
34 MODERN ENGLISH
second by its passage through the transforming bath._of
the popular speech.
8. Summary of the Influence of the Norman Con-
quest. The influence of the Norman Conquest and its
consequences upon the English language and the English
people was profound. The racial distinction between
Norman and Englishman was soon lost ; for the Norman
when he had accepted England as his home, and even more
when he had accepted English speech, became to all in-
tents and purposes English. So completely were English
and Norman assimilated that the third or fourth genera-
tion after the Conquest must often have been unable to
distinguish between the two elements of the population ;
all were alike English. It was, however, a new English
and a different England that gradually emerged after the
Conquest. The speech and the whole body of thought
of the nation, as a result of the direct and indirect
influence of the Conquest, had undergone a remarkable
change. In the first place, from a comparatively highly
inflected language, English became a language of few in-
\ flections (see pp. 77 ff.). The vocabulary of the language
changed from a " pure " vocabulary, that is, one made up
of words of the same linguistic stock, to a bilingual
vocabulary, a vocabulary made up of Teutonic and
Romance elements. The influence of French extended
also to the phrasing of English, the grouping of words
/ in the sentence, and in many ways, direct and indirect,
I which are difficult to follow, the new tendencies affected
J the whole tone of English thought and expression. The
language after it has been subjected to the French
influence is m^re.jupple; it is the vehicle for more
Y varied forms of expression than it had been before. In
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 35
this it was merely following the change in the intellec-
tual life of the English people, which after the Conquest
was richer and touched many more sides of Life than it
ever had in the Old English period. This new spirit in
English thought and letters received its fullest ex-
pression in the writings of G^oJfre^£hay[£ex,Xl^ifi CD^
^400). In Chaucer we have one who was not only a
consummate artist in the use of language, but one also
who, instead of the simple Old English themes of war-
fare and religion, could sound the whole gamut—of
JimMEuamQ&pn, love, pathos, humor, chivalry, the dra-
matic instinct, the feeling for nature, in short all those
shades of thought and feeling which the English heart
is capable of experiencing or the English tongue of
expressing.
9. Modern England. The England of the close of
the Middle English period was never again subjected to
foreign invasion or to any great external racial influences.
The thought and language of the people followed in
general a peaceful line of development, accompanying
the intellectual, industrial, and political growth of the
country and of the world as a whole. The periods in
modern times that have been most important for the
history of the language are the Renascence period, from
about 1500 to the death of Shakspere in 1616, in
which the main purpose was that of " enriching " the
language (see pp. 234 ff.); the_ period of Dryden
(1631-1700) and Pope (1688-1744), the so-called
Augustan period of English literature, in which much
thought and attention was given to " polishing " and
u purifying " the language ; and the most recent period
of scientific, industrial, commercial, and political expan-
36 MODERN ENGLISH
sion, with its marvelous extension of the bounds of
human thought and activity. Of these later influences
perhaps the most significant are those which arise from
the commercial and colonial expansion of the English
people, and concerning these a word in especial may
be said.
10. World English. History makes few appeals to
the imagination stronger than that presented by the pic-
ture of the little kingdom of England reaching out step
by step until now its speech and its civilization circle
the globe. Beginning with the union of Scotland and
England under one king in 1603, and the conquest of
Ireland under Elizabeth, the three countries, which by
later acts of union formed the kingdom of Great Brtiain
and Ireland, entered on a period of territorial and racial
expansion that almost passes belief. By the settlement
at Jamestown in 1607, and the later settlements in other
parts of this country, the national speech of the Conti-
nent of North America was determined as English, a
fact assured by the victory of Wolfe over Montcalm in
1759. The separation of the colonies from the mother
country in 1776, and the later opening of their gates to
almost countless hosts of foreign immigrants have not
availed to change the destiny of the English language
in the United States. It is to-day as much the national
speech of the country as it is of Canada or of England
herself.1 By the English settlement of Australia in the
1 Perhaps the opinion of an Englishman on this point may be worth quot-
ing. It is that of E. A. Freeman, the historian of the Norman Conquest,
who, in his Impressions of the United States, London, 1883, speaks as follows :
" To me the English-speaking Common wealth on the American mainland is
simply one part of the great English folk, as the English-speaking king-
dom in the European island is another part. My whole line of thought
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 37
early nineteenth century, the speech of that country
also became English. In India, which was first con-
quered by the English in the middle of the eighteenth
century, the native speech of the country, already a
highly developed language in which a great literature was
preserved, has maintained its existence as the popular and
native language. English is, however, the official lan-
guage of the country, and is becoming more and more the
language of business, commerce, and education. Other
colonies, or offshoots of colonies, in which English is
spoken, are South Africa, New Zealand, and Jamaica.
The English language is coming to be used also more
and more in countries which are not under English
domination. It is to a large extent now the language of
cosmopolitan intercourse in Europe, and there are few
cities in which English is not sufficient on the main roads
of travel to meet all a traveler's needs. English is thus
slowly taking the place formerly filled by French. Eng-
lish is also, to a considerable extent, the language of
international commerce. Nautical and manufacturing
terms, words derived from English social customs, from
English sports and games, in Germany, France, and in
other nations, are evidence of the growing prestige of
English.1 In the Far East, in China, Japan, and the
and study leads me to think, more perhaps than most men, of the everlast-
ing ties of blood and speech, and less of the accidental separation wrought
by political and geographical causes. To me the English folk, wherever
they may dwell, whatever may be their form of government, are still one
people. . . . And so, to my mind at least, the thought of the true unity of
the scattered English folk is a thought higher and dearer than any thought
of a British Empire, to the vast majority of whose subjects the common
speech of Chatham and Washington, of Gladstone and Garfield, is an un-
known tongue."
1 For lists of English words in German and French, see below, pp.
255-257.
38 MODERN ENGLISH
neighboring islands, English occupies a unique position
as an almost pan- Asiatic language. It is spoken in a
corrupt and simplified form, known as Pidgin English,
by merchants and sailors all along the coasts. It is also,
however, the language of oriental diplomacy to a con-
siderable extent, and it is significant that the modern
educational movement both in China and Japan lays
great stress on the cultivation of the English language.
American possessions in the Philippines will serve to
strengthen the position which English takes in the
Far East.1
It has been estimated that the number of people
speaking English as their native tongue is at present
between one hundred and twenty and one hundred and
thirty millions. The number who speak German is
estimated at about eighty millions, and the number of
Russians at about the same. The numbers speaking
French, Spanish, and Italian are estimated to be about
fifty millions each. The rate of increase of English in
the last century has been much greater than that of any
other language. Since English is spread over such a
wide extent of territory and is the language of rapidly
growing and developing countries, it is altogether likely
that this proportionate rate of increase will continue to
be as great in the future as it has been in the past.
Added to this the fact that English is the speech of an
1 President (then Secretary) Taft, in a report submitted to Congress
in January, 1908, calls attention to the fact that in the decade of the
American occupation of the Philippine Islands, English had come to be
spoken by a greater number of natives than had been the case with
Spanish in the several centuries of Spanish occupation, — a striking illus-
tration of the difference between English and Spanish methods of
colonization.
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 39
aggressive and venturesome people, that because of the
simplicity of its structure and of its bilingual character
as a Romance and a Teutonic tongue combined, it is the
most easily acquired of all the languages of the western
world, obviously English has a better chance than any
other living language of becoming a world-language.
Even the traditional national vices of insularity and con-
ceit make for this result. The Engish and Americans are,
undoubtedly, the greatest travelers of modern times, and
the tenacity with which they hold to their native speech
and native customs in foreign lands, while it often justly
exposes them to the charge of complacency and provin-
ciality, at the same time makes them effective distributors
of English ideas and traditions. If Mohammed will not
go to the mountain, then the mountain must come to
Mohammed. That English will ever become the lan-
guage of familiar daily intercourse in non-English
coun tries is, of course, beyond the range of possibility.
There is no indication that any country will ever alto-
gether give up its native idiom for another, except
through the gradual method of complete national and
racial assimilation. But that English may become the
language of international science, of international di-
plomacy, of international travel and commerce, is quite
within the limits of the possible. In the medieval pe-
riod the various nations each learned one other language
besides their native idiom for the purpose of interna-
tional communication, and this second language was
always Latin. Later the place of Latin tended to be
taken by French. Within the last two or three genera-
tions, however, French has begun to yield to English,
and the universal language of the future is more likely
40 MODERN ENGLISH
to be English than any other of the tongues of modern
or ancient Europe.
11. Artificial Language. Of recent years a great
deal has been said about a universal language. In all
projects of this nature the attempt is to manufacture an
artificial language which shall be free of the defects of
existing languages, and which, because of its reason-
ableness and economy, will induce the nations of the
world to accept it in the place of their native speech.
Artificial languages are not of recent origin. Such lin-
guistic experiments have been made from the earliest
times, some of them extremely ingenious, but none that
ever realized in the slightest degree the hopes which
their creators had for them.1 In England the later
seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries were pro-
ductive of a number of artificial languages. One, as set
forth by Sir Thomas Urquhart in a volume published
in London in 1653, bore the alluring title Logopandec-
teision, or an Introduction to the Universal Language
digested into six books, published both for his own utili-
tie and that of all pregnant and ingenious spirits. In
our own day various " ingenious spirits " have promul-
gated schemes of universal language, Volapuk, Esper-
anto, Glanik, and others, literally to be numbered by
the dozen, and all different. Why have none of these
experiments succeeded? In the first place, because the
attempt to foist an artificial language upon a people
runs counter to all the principles of development that
have governed the growth of a people. A native speech
arises in a community as the intimate accompaniment
1 For a full description of all these endeavors, see Couturat et Lean,
ffistoire de la langue universelle, Paris, 1903.
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 41
of all its social customs. It is a gradual and largely
unconscious growth, arising out of the immediate ex-
periences of life. No speech, as we shall have continual
occasion to point out, has ever submitted to the sys-
tematizings of the theorist, no matter how reasonable
and consistent these seemed to be. The attempt, there-
fore, to bring about the acceptance of an artificial lan-
guage on reasonable grounds is not likely to succeed,
because of the simple fact that a language is not under
the control of the direct reason. It is a common social
possession, and a people fortunately does not, and can-
not, change its social customs and habits by a sudden
act of will. Moreover, one may doubt whether an arti-
ficial language, the best that can be devised by an indi-
vidual or a group of individuals, ever can be as good
as a natural language. A natural language which has
developed through thousands of years has acquired
possibilities of expression, in thought and especially in
feeling, which no language manufactured in cold blood
can hope to equal. The wisdom of the nation is greater
than the wisdom of an individual, and a national lan-
guage sums up all the past wisdom of the people. Yet
again, a universal language, to remain universal after
it had once been accepted by all peoples, must not be
allowed to change. But if anything can be learned
from the history of language, it is just this, that all
languages are continually subject to change, and that
nothing can prevent them from changing. The advo-
cates of a universal language must accordingly not only
perform the initial miracle of getting their language
accepted, but they must then perform the second mir-
acle, a continuous one, of keeping that language per-
42 MODERN ENGLISH
manent and fixed. In short, no artificial language, DO
matter how skilfully it is constructed, is likely ever to
extend beyond the small group of theorists with whom
it originates, and these will continue to pursue it only
until their attention is attracted to some more divert-
ing theory. The way languages spread is not through
theory, but through their use. And the reason why the
English language is one of the most widely distributed
of the modern world, is that men who have spoke a
English have made their way to all corners of the earth,
have carried with them their ideals of life and conduct,
and, with these ideals, the speech in which they find
expression. Artificial languages are well enough as
playthings for "ingenious spirits," but a rc~^ xctnguag;e
is formed in the market places and by the firesides of
a living world.
If, on the other hand, an artificial language is devised
only for the expression of simple and impersonal ideaM,
such as might arise in international, commercial, or evexi
scientific communication, then the matter becomes im-
portant only to a relatively small number of people. An
artificial language of such kind is of not much more sig-
nificance than a cable code or a system of signals. Most
of the languages which have been fashioned for sucb
purposes have been constructed on the basis of Latin,
as, for example, the at present much exploited Esper-
anto. Latin is chosen as the basis because it is, in one
form or another, a natural inheritance of all southern
Europeans, it forms a large part of the English vocabu-
lary, and third, it is the language which most edu-
cated persons are likely to know — or to have known - -
besides their native speech, if they know any. Bub
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE 43
obviously, if you do not know Latin, and it is hardly a
warrantable assumption that everybody knows Latin,
you must first learn it, if you want to apply it to the
understanding of an artificial language based on Latin.
One might thus have to learn Latin, supposedly a more
difficult language, in order to prepare the way for learn-
ing an easy, artificial language. But no artificial lan-
guage has yet been made effective for international,
scientific, or business communication, and it is not only
doubtful if it can be, but also if it were made generally
effective, whether more would not be lost than would be
gained. Certainly an artificial language would be harm-
fid if it should in any way prevent or limit the study of
the natural languages. There is an old saying that a
man is as many times a man as he has languages. No
artificial language will ever take the place of a knowl-
edge of the natural languages; at most it can only
make the undiscriminating satisfied with an inadequate
substitute.
in
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
1. The Classification of Languages. One of the
important results of the modern study of language has
been the classification of the various languages of the
world into groups according to their relationships.
Altho the science of language has not been able to
confirm the Scriptural story of the original creation of
language, nor, as yet, even to arrive at any altogether
satisfactory theory of the beginnings of speech, it never-
theless has done a great deal in discovering lines of evo-
lution and development in those languages of which we
have record. It has discovered that there has been a
continual change and growth in language, that the lan-
guages of modern times are each of them a historic
product which developed slowly and regularly out of
preceding stages. Moreover, it has shown that many
apparently dissimilar languages are really closely related
and are the descendants of some single original stock.
It has thus divided languages into families.
2. The Indo-European Family of Languages.
One of the largest and most carefully studied groups or
families of languages is that known as the Indo-European
or Indo-Germanic family. This group comprises certain
of the languages of Asia and practically all the languages
of Europe. The original unified Indo-European lan-
guage from which they are all theoretically derived is no
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 45
longer in existence. Its former existence is inferred,
however, from the comparative study of the various
Indo-European languages, since no theory serves so well
to explain the many similarities which exist among them
as the theory of a common origin. It should not be for-
gotten, however, that the theory of a common original
language from which the various Indo-European lan-
guages were derived does not carry with it the theory of
a common and single racial ancestry of all the Indo-
European peoples. In the course of its development the
primitive Indo-European speech undoubtedly imposed
itself upon peoples of widely different race, very much
as the branch languages, French or English, have done
in later periods. We accept, therefore, a common speech
ancestry for the Indo-European peoples, but not neces-
sarily a common race ancestry. The period and the
place in which this common original language was spoken
are matters of very uncertain inference, and, indeed, are
matters of comparatively slight importance. It concerns
us much more to know the history, the changes and de-
velopments which have brought about the differentia-
tion of the various languages of which we have specific
knowledge. These languages have been carefully studied,
so that now we are enabled to classify them according
to their branches and subdivisions in an orderly fashion.
The following is a list of the main members of the family,
beginning with the languages farthest east in Asia and
proceeding thence in order to the languages of western
Europe :
1. IndoJranian. This branch is subdivided into (a) the
Indian languages, including Sanskrit, the ancient literary
language of India, and Prakrit and Pali, the modern native
46 MODERN ENGLISH
dialects of India ; and (b) the Iranian languages, including
Persian and Avestan in their various periods, besides several
other languages of the tablelands of Central Asia.
2. Armenian, spoken in parts of Asia Minor.
3. Greek, which may be subdivided into the various Greek
dialects, Ionic, Attic, Doric, etc.
4. Albanian, spoken in the limited region of Albania,
north of Greece.
5. Italic. The main language of this branch is Latin, from
which are derived the modern Romance languages, French,
Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, and Provencal, and several
other less known languages besides.
6. Celtic. This branch may be subdivided into Gallic,
the language of the people of ancient Gaul, of which little is
known ; British, the language of the original inhabitants of
Britain ; Welsh, the language of Wales ; and Gaelic, includ-
ing the language of the Scotch Highlands, Irish, and Manx.
7. Teutonic or Germanic. This branch, the one we are
particularly interested in, falls into three main subdivisions,
as follows :
(a) East Germanic, the main dialect of which is Gothic,
known chiefly from fragments of a translation of
the Bible, made in the fourth century by Ulfilas,
the bishop of the West Goths.
(b) North Germanic, including Icelandic, Norse, Swed-
ish, and Danish.
(c) West Germanic, including the following languages :
I. English, in its various periods of Anglo-Saxon, or
Old English, Middle English, and Modern English.
II. Frisian, in the two periods of Old and Modern
Frisian.
III. Franconian, the chief modern representatives of
which are the languages of Holland and Flanders.
IV. Low German, the modern representative of
which is Plattdeutscii,
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 47
V. High German, in its three periods of Old High
German, Middle High German, and New High
German, the language of modern Germany.
8. Balto-Slavonic. This branch falls into two main divi-
sions (a) th3 Baltic languages, including Old Prussian, Lithu-
anian, and Lettic; and (&) the Slavonic languages, including
Russian, Bulgarian, Illyrian, Bohemian, and Polish.
3. The Principles of Classification of Languages.
The question arises, How do we know that these lan-
guages are related ? What are the points of difference
and resemblance which justify us in holding together the
languages of the Indo-European family in a single group,
and at the same time in dividing this group into the
eight branches indicated above, with their further sub-
divisions? In answering the question, it should be
noted, first, that the Indo-European family is consti-
tuted a group apart from the other languages of the
world by certain features which all the languages of the
family have in common, but which are unknown to lan-
guages outside the group. Thus, first of all, the Ian- (j j
guages of the Indo-European family are all inflectional
in structure, that is, they indicate the relations which
words bear to each other in the sentence by the use of
case, gender, number, tense, voice, and other endings.
This seems to those whose native speech is inflectional
such a natural characteristic of language that it is often
supposed that all languages make use of this device.
Such is not the case, however, and there are certain lan-
guages, like the Chinese, which have no inflection at
all, and others, like the Turkish, which have a kind of
inflection that is so different from our kind of inflection
that it has to be put into an entirely separate class from it.
48 MODERN ENGLISH
In the second place, it has been found that the Ian
guages of the Indo-European family have a considerable
number of words in common that are not found in other
languages, and the number and the character of these
words are so significant as to lead one almost necessarily
to the inference that they are a common inheritance from
a common original stock. The study of the languages
of the Indo-European family from the point of view of
their sounds and of their syntax confirms the results of
the study of vocabulary and inflection, and makes un-
avoidable the conclusion that we have in them a group
of closely and mutually related languages.
The method by which the division of the family into its
branches has been obtained is similar to that which deter-
mined the classification of the family as a whole. It has
been found that, altho all the branches of the family
have certain characteristics in common, which hold them
together as a family, at the same time each branch has
its own individual characteristics, due to the special de-
velopment it has followed and the special influences to
which it has been subjected. It would carry us too far
at present to attempt to show all the special characteris-
tics of each branch, for example, how Greek differs from
Latin and how Celtic differs from both ; all we can do is
to point out the main characteristics which distinguish
the Teutonic or Germanic branch, the one in which our
special interest lies.
4. The Teutonic Languages. The main character-
istics which the Teutonic languages have in common as
features distinguishing them from the other Indo-Euro-
pean languages are four : (a) a regular shifting or change
of consonants, known as Grimm's Law ; (b) the Teu-
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 49
tonic classification of the verb as strong and weak (or ir-
regular and regular) ; (c) the twofold declension of the
adjective as strong and weak ; (d) the Teutonic system
of word-accent. The last three of these characteristics
need only a word of explanation, but the importance of
Grimm's Law makes it deserving of a more extended
discussion, and we shall therefore leave it to the last.
A comparison of the Modern English verb, which is
representative of the Teutonic verb in general, with the
Latin as representative of the original Indo-European
verb, will show the distinguishing features of the Teu-
tonic verbal system. The English verb consists of two
classes, the weak, or regular verb, which forms its past
tense by adding d, or ed (sometimes assimilated to f) to
the present or infinitive stem, as for example, walk,
walked, walked; and second, the strong, or irregular
verb, which forms its tenses by an internal change of
the radical vowel of the word, as in the verb sing, sang,
sung. The Latin verb, on the other hand, falls into a
number of different classes, dependent to be sure on the
formation of the principal parts, but in which can be
found no such simple principle of tense formation as that
which distinguishes the English verb.
The twofold declension of the adjective has been lost
in Modern English, inasmuch as the declension of the
adjective (except for comparison) has been lost alto-
gether. In the Old English period of the language,
however, the full declension of the adjective was still
maintained, as it is in New High German to this day.
The simple principle of it is this — that when the adjec-
tive is preceded by a demonstrative pronoun or a definite
article, it is declined in one way, called weak, and when
4
50 MODERN ENGLISH
not preceded by a demonstrative pronoun or a definite
article, it is declined in another way, called strong.
Thus the phrase These young boys would take the weak
form of the adjective in Old English, ]>as geongan cnapan ;
but the phrase Young boys would take the strong form,
Q-eonge cnapan. Latin, like Modern English, would take
the same form of the adjective in both phrases.
The Teutonic system of word-accent is sufficiently
illustrated by Modern English usage. The rule there is
that words of native origin usually take the stress on the
root syllable, and this root syllable, except in the case of
prepositional compounds, is almost always the first sylla-
ble of a word. Moreover, the accent of English words is
$3&d, that is, a noun has the same accent, no matter
what its case may be, and a verb keeps the same accent
through all its various inflections. Latin, on the con-
trary, which is again representative of the Indo-European
accent, has what is called a free or variable accent, chang-
ing with the various forms of a word. Thus the nomi-
native is stressed imperdtor, but the accusative is imper-
at6rem. The English derivative word, " emperor," has
a fixed accent on the first syllable.
5. Grimm's Law. This law is named Grimm's Law
because it has become generally known through its for-
mulation in the year 1822, by the German scholar, Jacob
Grimm , who was not only the writer of the famous fairy
tales, but was also a philologist of great industry and
learning. It is called a law, but it is purely an empiri-
cal law. That is to say, by observation the discovery
was made that a definite set of linguistic phenomena
operated in a certain regular way, and the generalization
drawn from this observation was formulated as the law,
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 51
or rule, of the phenomena. This kind of law does not
imply that the phenomena must act in a certain way,
that there is a compelling law-giver or power back of the
law which controls its action. It simply states what
does happen, or what appears to our observation to hap-
pen. The ultimate explanation of the cause of the series
of phenomena known as Grimm's Law is one that, so
far, has escaped the scientific students of language. The
facts as they are we accept because we observe them, but
no satisfactory theory in explanation of these facts has
yet been brought forward.
The phenomena which are the facts upon which
Grimm's Law is based are certain regular changes in
sounds. It was observed that where Indo-European
words (as represented say by Greek or Latin) appeared
with certain consonants, the same word in the Teutonic
languages appeared with different consonants, always,
however, according to a regular scheme of equivalents.
Thus Indo-European p became regularly Germanic/,
and d became regularly t ; the relation of English foot to
Greek 71-08-05 (pod-os) is therefore obvious. Other illus-
trations of the change of p to / are Latin pater, English
father ; Latin pellis, English fell. The change of Indo-
European d to t is further illustrated by English tooth,
Latin dent-is ; English ten (Old English tiff on), Latin
decem. Another regular change, which has been illus-
trated by the word-pairs English father, Latin pater, and
English tooth, Latin dent-is, is that of Indo-European t
to Teutonic th. Further illustrations are Latin trest
English three; Latin tennis, English thin; Latin tu,
English thou. Another regular change is that from
Indo-European o to Teutonic h, as in Latin corn-us, Eng-
52 MODERN ENGLISH
lish "horn; Latin coil-is, English hill. Illustrations of
these changes might be increased indefinitely. Instead
of adding others, however, it will suffice to make a gen-
eral statement of all the consonants affected by the law
and their correspondences. They may be grouped as
follows :
The Indo-European labial consonants 6A, 6, p became re-
spectively the Teutonic consonants &, p, /.
The Indo-European dental consonants dh, cZ, t became re-
spectively the Teutonic consonants d, t, th.
The Indo-European palatal and guttural consonants gh, 0,
Jc (c), became respectively the Teutonic consonants g, k, h.
It should be understood, of course, that this is a very
general statement of Grimm's Law, and that, as thus ex-
pressed, it is open to numerous exceptions and to the
qualifications of some important sub-laws. Moreover, it
should be remembered in tracing back English words
to their cognates in the other Indo-European languages
which are not subject to this shifting of consonants, as for
example, Latin, that these other languages may also have
had each its own peculiar development in its consonant
system which may serve to obscure the simple opera-
tion of the law. It is also apparent that only those Eng-
lish words which are of native origin, that is, only that
half of our bilingual language which is Teutonic and
not late borrowed Romance, can be subject to Grimm's
Law. Despite its various restrictions and qualifications,
however, Grimm's Law is one of the most valuable lin-
guistic principles which we possess. It enables us not
only to group the Teutonic languages together, but also
often to determine the history and etymology of the vo-
cabularies of the various Teutonic languages, to tell
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 53
what words are native and what are foreign. Moreover,
the study of Grimm's Law has carried in its wake the
discovery of many other linguistic laws and principles
which are of the greatest interest and importance, but
which cannot be entered into at present.
6. English and German. The exact relation be-
tween Modern English and Modern German should be
alearly understood. Of course one is not derived from
the other, as is so frequently the popular belief. The
number of words in the German language which were
directly borrowed from English is comparatively small,
most of them having been taken over of recent years,
and the same is true of the German words in the Eng-
lish language.1 The two languages are, however, of the
same stock, and they resemble each other because they,
like the other Teutonic languages, are derived from
some common original Teutonic mother speech, which
is no longer in existence and which has left no written
records, but the existence of which we infer from the
comparative study of the various Teutonic languages,
just as we infer the former existence of a parent Indo-
European speech for all the different Indo-European
languages. German and English, therefore, have much
in common because they inherit their language from a
common ancestral speech. They differ, on the other
hand, from each other, because throughout centuries of
development each has followed its own course and has
been subject to its own special influences. The most
important special development of German, which differ-
entiates it from English, is what is known as the second
shifting of consonants. English and German alike are
1 For a list of these words, see Delow, pp. 255-256.
54 MODERN ENGLISH
subject to Grimm's Law, or the first shifting of conso-
nants, but the German consonants which resulted from
the operation of Grimm's Law have undergone a further
change, a shifting which is peculiar to that language,
and which is one of the things which justify the linguist
in setting off that language as a special subdivision of
the Teutonic language. Thus where English has p,
German usually has/ or pfin cognate words, as in Eng-
lish help, German helfen; English ship, German schiff;
English sleep, German schlafen ; English sheep, German
schaf ; English sap, German sapf. Likewise where Eng-
lish has d German usually has t, as in the following
pairs of words : dead, tot (formerly spelled todt) ; deaf,
taub ; deal, theil (the h being silent in pronunciation);
do, thun; cold, kalt ; hold, halten; and so with many
others. English t frequently appears as German z or tz,
as in to, zu ; tin, zinn ; tooth, zahn ; tongue, zunge ; write,
ritzen ; cat, katz ; sit, sitzen. English v appears in cog-
nate German words as b, as in over, ober; leave, (er-)
lauben ; grave, grab ; shove, schieben ; love, liebe ; knave,
knabe.
7. Periods of English. From the seventh century,
the earliest period of which we have any knowledge of
recorded forms of English, the language has been subject
to constant change. In this it merely partakes of the
nature of language in general, for speech, so long as it
is living in actual unconstrained use, is continually
growing and developing. It is only in the so-called
" dead " languages that language can be drawn up into
a system once and for all. From the earliest Indo-
European times, therefore, down to the present day,
it is safe to say that the language which we now know
THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 55
as English has been ceaselessly, tho often impercepti-
bly, dropping old and assuming new forms. Since
this process has been unbroken from the beginning, it is
in a way illogical to divide the history of the language
into periods. There have been, however, certain times
at which changes took place more rapidly than at others,
owing to special attendant circumstances, and provided
we keep always in mind that the dates by which we
divide a language into periods are more or less arbi-
trarily chosen, they will serve the convenient purpose of
indicating roughly the large general divisions in the de-
velopment of the language. In this way we may indi-
cate three great divisions in the history of English :
I. The Old English, or Anglo-Saxon period, beginning
with the coming of the Angles, Jutes, and Saxons to
England and ending with the Norman Conquest in
1066, or better, about 1100.
II. The Middle English period, extending from 1100 to
about 1500.
III. The Modern English period, extending from 1500 to
the present time.
The language in each of these periods is distinguished
by developments which are to a large extent characteristic
of the respective periods. These developments affect
all the various sides of the language, — sounds, inflec-
tions, words, and syntax, and it will be the purpose of
the following chapters to give an account of the changes
in the language from these several points of view.
IV
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS
1. The Nature of Inflection. It has already been
pointed out (pp. 47 ff.) that inflection is one of the
distinguishing characteristics of the family of Indo-
European languages. The extent to which these vari-
ous languages make use of inflection differs greatly,
and there is often considerable variation, as in English,
even in the periods of one and the same language.
Broadly defined, inflection is the change or variation
in the forms of a word for the purpose of indicating
corresponding variations in its meaning and use. This
definition implies that there is a certain root element
which remains constant, but which is given specific
application and meaning by additions to this element.
This definition, however, is too broad for the traditional
use of the term inflection, since it includes not only
inflection for person, number, case, gender, tense, and
so forth, but also such word-changes as swift, adjective,
to Bwift-ly, adverb. The term usually employed, how-
ever, to designate such a change as that of swift to
swiftly is derivation or composition. By composition
one means the placing together of two word elements
each of which has a more or less separate and inde-
pendent existence. The degrees of this independence
may vary greatly. A -compound like house-boat is made
up of two words, each of which may be completely
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 57
independent. On the other hand the -ly of the com-
pound swiftly, the -dom of kingdom, the -ness of kind-
ness, are not really complete separate words. They
have, however, more meaning as independent elements
in the word than true inflections, as for example the
plural -s of books, the preterite ending -ed in differed,
and the participial ending -en in spoken. It is not
always easy, in fact it is not always possible, to draw
the line between composition and inflection, and it is
altogether probable that a good many inflectional ele-
ments are merely weakened forms of earlier composi-
tional elements of words. The two things run into
each other imperceptibly, and a hard and fast division
between them cannot be made. It is best to regard
inflection as the general term, including inflection proper
and derivation, and to use the specific term derivation,
or composition, for those instances in which the elements
of a word are plainly felt to have separate existence.1
Inflection may be of three kinds, initial, internal, or
end inflection. In former stages of the language initial
inflection was used to form the past tenses of certain
verbs, known as reduplicating verbs ; this was a method
of tense formation similar to the use of augments in
Greek. It has been completely lost in later English and
is only very sparingly represented in Old English. A
1 A definition of inflection is often made to the effect that inflection
includes only those variations or changes in the form of a word for the
expression of different uses within its own part of speech ; when the part
of speech is changed, then we have composition. But the noun king + dom
gives kingdom, which is still a noun ; man + hood, gives manhood, also a
noun. Again the numeral adjective one by the addition of -ly becomes only ;
the word only may be an adjective, as in the only man, or an adverb, as in
//'/ only knew. Shall we call the change of one to only inflection when only
is used as an adjective, and composition when it is used as an adverb?
58 MODERN ENGLISH
kind of initial inflection is used in Modern English to
indicate gender, as in man-servant and maid-servant, cock-
sparrow^ hensparrow. It is better, however, to regard
such words as compounds, or derivatives, since the two
elements of which each is composed have separate exis-
tence. The word woman, which looks as tho it were
the feminine of man with the feminine inflectional sylla-
ble w0-prefixed, is originally a compound word which has
become obscured. It is Old English wif-, the Modern
English " wife," + man = wifeman. The words male and
female also look like inflectional forms of the same word,
but historically they are not. The word male comes
through the French from the Latin masculus, a word of
the same meaning. The word female comes from Latin
femella, a diminutive oifemina, "woman." This word
should give in English the iormfemell, which indeed is
the form that Chaucer and his contemporaries used.
The word femell, however, became confused with male
and the second syllable of it was supposed to be the
same as male, hence the form female. The syllable
fe-, consequently, altho it originally had no such value,
is now practically felt to be a feminine forming inflec-
tional prefix to male.
Inflection in English is commonly, however, either inter-
nal or end inflection. Examples of internal inflection are
sing, sang, sung; man, men; tooth, teeth. The most
general method of inflection in English consists in the
addition of inflectional elements at the end of a word,
as in (1) sing, (he) sings; cat, cats; walk, walked.
There are three other ways of showing the different
uses of a word which are not true inflections, but make-
shifts to take the place of inflections. The first of these
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 59
is the use of the mechanical device of the apostrophe in
the possessive case, as in boy's, boys'; so far as the sound
of these words is concerned they cannot be distinguished
from the nominative and objective plural, boys, and the
value of the apostrophe is purely visual. The second
device is that of using altogether different words for the
various values of a part of speech, as for example go, went,
gone; am or is, was, been, for the tenses of the verb;
bad, worse, worst; good, better, best, for the degrees of
the adverb or adjective ; /, you, he for the persons of the
personal pronoun. The third equivalent for true in-
flection is the device of using a phrase as, for example,
more swift, most swift in the comparison of the adjective
and adverb; (he) has gone, (he) had gone, etc., in the
conjugation of the verb. English has been driven to use
these devices very extensively to make up for inflections
which it has lost.
2. English as a "Grammarless Tongue." The his-
tory of English inflections has been one of continuous
loss. As far back as we can go in the history of the
English language we can trace a gradual breaking down
of the inflectional system. And even when we arrive
at the earliest periods of Old English, there are sure in-
dications that the language is already in a transitional
stage, and that the tendency towards inflectional loss in
English is one that goes far back into the prehistoric
periods of the language. This tendency toward inflec-
tional loss is not to be regarded as a degeneration of the
language. The language of less highly civilized peoples
and eras is often more elaborately inflected than the lan-
guage of a more highly developed people and civilization.
Thus to-day the language of certain tribes of African
60 MODERN ENGLISH
savages is infinitely more complex in grammatical struc-
ture than that of any of the European nations. In his
speech, the savage makes use of a great deal of unneces-
sary machinery, and, as is almost always true of the rude
and uncultivated, he makes a tremendous physical effort
in attempting to express the content of his mind.
The development in the English inflectional system
has, of course, been altogether unconscious, so far as the
users of the language are concerned. The language
changed to meet the needs of those who spoke it, and no
conscious theory of improving the language by getting
rid of unnecessary inflections has ever been in operation.
Inflections were lost because, in the practical use of the
language, men tended to express themselves as briefly as
possible. In English, furthermore, the language has de-
veloped freely and unrestrainedly from the earliest times
down to the Modern English period. This would not
have been the case, at least with literary English, if we
had had a great classic literature in the Old English
period, which was set up and retained as a model for all
later periods, as classical Latin literature became the
model for all later generations of Romans. If that had
taken place our language would now probably have the
comparatively elaborate Old English inflectional system,
instead of the present Modern English one, which is
almost completely devoid of inflection.
The number of Modern English inflections is so small
that they may be very briefly summarised. The only parts
of speech which are capable of inflection are the noun,
the pronoun, the verb, and for the single characteris-
tic of comparison, the adverb and the adjective, altho
comparison might just as well be called composition
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 61
or derivation. Of these the noun inflects for number,
singular and plural, and for one case, the possessive,
singular and plural, the other cases being all alike. The
personal pronoun inflects for three persons, for three
genders, for two numbers, and in some forms for three
cases, nominative, possessive, and objective. The other
pronouns inflect only for number and case. The verb
inflects more elaborately than the noun, but less elab-
orately than the personal pronoun. The present tense
usually has two forms, one for the third person, singular
number, and another for all other uses of the present.
There is a distinctive form for the past tense, which is
the same, however, for all persons and both numbers.
The past participle sometimes has a distinctive form
(see, saw, seen), but usually it is the same as the form
of the past tense (walk, walked, walked/ bind, bound,
bound). In a few instances, that is, be and were, the
present and past of the verb to be, and the third person
singular of the present tense of other verbs, there are
special forms for the subjunctive mood; but these are
rarely used.
So few are the inflections of Modern English as com-
pared with those, for example, of Latin or Greek, or
even of Old English, the earlier stage of its own lan-
guage, that it has been characterized as a " grammarless
tongue." This characterization is approximately true
of course only if we think of grammar as meaning the
same thing as inflection. In Greek and Latin grammar,
inflection, or accidence as it is sometimes called, does
play a large part, inflection and the rules of concord
being the two important divisions of classical grammar.
Through its loss of inflections, however, English has
62 MODERN ENGLISH
also simplified its rules of concord, and it consequently
does not present the same kind of grammatical system
as the classical languages. That it is a "grammarless
tongue," however, in the true sense of the word gram-
mar, is not at all true. The language has its struc-
ture and its rules of right and wrong, and it is as
necessary to observe them as it was for Greek and
Roman to observe their inflectional system and rules of
concord.
3. The Inflections of the Old English Period. It
is convenient to divide the history of English inflections
into three chronological periods, corresponding to the
three great stages in their development. The first is the
Old English period, from the earliest records to about
1100 ; this is the period of full inflections. The second
is the Middle English period, from 1100 to about 1500 ;
this is the period of leveled inflections. The third is the
Modern English period, from 1500 to the present time,
and this is the period of lost inflections. The periods of
course pass over into each other gradually, altho at
the two main dividing lines, at 1100 and 1500, changes
took place more rapidly than during the central portions
of the periods. There is, therefore, both in the Old Eng-
lish and in the Middle English period, a fairly stable and
fixed central or classical form of the language which we
shall briefly describe.
The Old English is called the period of full inflections
because the inflections of the language at that time were
not only relatively more numerous than they were in
later periods, but were also pronounced with a full and
distinct sense of the values of the various vowels in the
inflectional endings. Since the inflectional endings bore
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 63
no accent, it will be seen that this method of pronounc-
ing the inflectional vowels is very different from the
tendency of Modern English (or even of Middle Eng-
lish), where we regularly obscure final unaccented
syllables in pronunciation. One or two illustrations will
suffice to make this point clear. In Old English a noun
in the nominative singular might end in -a, as huntat
u hunter " ; or -e, as tunge, " tongue " ; or -u, as sunut
" son " ; or -0, as wlenco, " pride." Now these various
endings were all given distinctly and clearly the values
of the vowels -a, -e^ -u, and -0, and were not obscured
and slurred as they would be in our Modern English
pronunciation. The same principle holds true when the
inflectional syllable consists of a vowel followed by a
consonant or consonants. The noun stan, " stone," has
a genitive singular stanes and a nominative and accusa-
tive plural stanas, each of which is clearly distinguished
by the value of its vowel. In short, we may say that the
inflectional ending was treated with a great deal more
respect and consideration in the Old English period
than in later periods. There was more feeling for it
and consequently a stronger tendency making for its
preservation.
The tendency which kept the vowels of the inflec-
tional syllables full and clear, served naturally to pre-
vent the loss of inflectional endings. The extent of
inflection in the Old English period may be briefly indi-
cated, choosing for this purpose the West Saxon dialect
in the early West Saxon period, that is, English between
the years 800 and 900, in the central and southern parts
of England. The noun inflected for three genders,
masculine, feminine, and neuter, and gender in Old
64 MODERN ENGLISH
English, as in Modern German or Latin, was still gram-
matical, not natural or logical, as it has become in
Modern English. That is, gender in Old English refers
to the way in which a noun is inflected, not necessarily
to the sex of the person or object designated by the noun.
Thus Old English nouns ending in -a are masculines, and
this includes such names of inanimate objects as mono,,
" moon " ; noma, " name " ; steorra, " star." l The noun
inflected also for two numbers, singular and plural. It
inflected for five cases, nominative, genitive (from which
is derived the modern possessive), dative (lost in Modern
English), accusative (the modern objective), and instru-
mental (also lost in Modern English). Furthermore it
inflected for class or type of declension, there being two
main types of noun declension, the strong and the weak,
and each of these classes consisted of several sub-types
or classes. The somewhat complicated state of affairs
may be best represented by the following table of the
different inflectional endings which the nouns of the
various genders and types may take. Words which
appeared in certain cases without any inflectional end-
ing are indicated merely by the dash. Since the in-
1 The distinction between the grammatical gender of Old English,
based upon the forms of words, and the natural gender of Modern
English, based upon the meanings of words, should be clearly appre-
hended. In Old English, adjectives have gender as well as nouns, since
they are inflected in forms to agree with their nouns. With the loss of
inflections, Modern English has given up the distinctions of grammatical
gender, and uses the term now for the much simpler and more natural
purpose of indicating sex. This explains why Englishmen often find it
difficult to understand why the possessive pronoun must be feminine in a
French sentence like 11 a perdu safemme, " He has lost his wife." But the
possessive sa is an adjective, and as such it must take the feminine form
when it modifies a feminine noun, no matter what its antecedent may be,
or what its logical meaning may be.
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 65
strumental is always the same as the dative in the
noun, it is not mentioned specifically in the table.
SINGULAR. PLTJBAL.
Nominative -, -u, -a, -e, -o. Nominative -, -as, -u, -a, -e, -an.
Genitive -es, -e, -an. Genitive -a, -ena.
Dative -, -e, -an, -o. Dative -urn.
Accusative -, -e, -an, -o. Accusative same as the nominative.
An examination of this table will show that the inflec-
tional system of the Old English noun is not distinctive
for all uses, that the same ending has sometimes to do
duty for various values of the noun. Thus the ending
-e may appear in any case of the singular, or in the nomi-
native or accusative plural ; and there are other endings
also which have to be used several times, the ending -an,
for example, being used five times. The most distinc-
tive and characteristic endings are the -es of the genitive
singular, which appears only in the genitive singular;
-a«, which appears only in the nominative and accusa-
tive plural ; and -um, which is always the ending of all
nouns in the dative plural. It will be seen later that
these endings are just the ones that are important in the
further development of the inflectional system. The de-
clension of the strong masculine noun stdn, " stone " ; the
strong feminine noun lar, " lore, learning " ; the strong
neuter noun hof, " court " ; and the weak masculine noun
steorra, "star"; and the weak feminine noun tunge,
" tongue," may be cited in illustration of the declension
of five large groups of Old English nouns, altho these
five are not exhaustive of all the different Old Eng-
lish declensions. The declensions of stdn and steorra
are typical of by far the greatest number of nouns in
Old English.
66
MODERN ENGLISH
Neu.
SlXOULAB.
Masculine. Fern.
Nominative stan lar hof
Genitive stanes lare hofes
Dative stane lare hofe
Accusative stan lare hof
STRONG.
PLURAL.
Masculine. Fern.
Neu.
stan as lare hofu
stan a lara or larena ho fa
stanum larum hofurr
stan as lare hofu
WEAK.
SINGULAR.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Nominative
steorra
tunge
Genitive
steorran
tungan
Dative
steorran
tungan
Accusative
steorran
tungan
PLURAL.
Masculine.
Feminine.
steorran
tungan
steorrena
tungena
steorrum
tungum
steorran
tungan
There are various minor declensions of the noun in
Old English besides the above five types, but most of these
have been more or less completely assimilated in later
English to the type forms represented by stdn and
steorra. Only one has left considerable traces in
Modern English, nouns in which the plural number was
formed by mutation of the radical vowel. For example,
Old English /<?£, gas, mils, broc, etc., formed their plurals
fet, ges, mys, brek, corresponding to Modern English
foot, feet ; goose, geese; mouse, mice. The word broc has
disappeared in the singular in Modern English, which
should have brook; its plural is retained, however, in
breeches, which has the old mutation of the vowel to
indicate the plural, but which has also added the regular
plural -s ending of nouns like stan. Some other words
which in Old English belong to this class of mutation
plurals have been attracted completely into the larger
class of regular nouns. Thus Old English bdc, bee
should give regularly Modern English book, with the
plural beek, like goose, geese. But by analogy to the
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 67
large class of plurals in -s without mutation of the vowel,
beek was changed to books.
The Old English adjective differs from the Modern
English adjective in that it inflects for all those forms
for which the noun inflects, for gender, number, case, and
type or class, as strong and weak. The rules of concord
also demand that an adjective shall agree in its inflection
with the gender, number, and case of the noun which it
modifies. The main inflections of the adjective, for all
genders and types, are as follows :
SIICQULAB. PLVBAL.
Nominative -, -a, -e. Nominative -, -e, -a, -an.
Genitive -es, -re, -an. Genitive -ra, -ena.
Dative -urn, -re, -an. Dative -um.
Accusative -, -ne, -e, -an. Accusative same as the nominative.
With the adjective should be grouped the definite
article, for this part of speech in Old English is a real
adjective, inflecting like the adjective and like the
Modern German article, for gender, number, and case.
The inflections of the article are as follows :
BINOULAB. PLURAL.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Masculine. Feminine. Nenttr.
Nominative se, "the" seo paet1 pa
Genitive paes, "of the" paere pass para
Dative pasm, " to the " psere psem pirn
Accusative pone, "the" pa pat )>a
Instrumental py, " by or with the "...
1 The symbol p, also written S, (called " thorn ") is equivalent to th ; the
symbol ce (called the digrapb ) has the sound of Modern English a in hat,
the value of Old English a, as for example in stdn, being the same as the
a in Modern English father.
68
MODERN ENGLISH
The Old English personal pronoun differs mainly from
the Modern English in that it has preserved remnants
of an old dual number, the only survival in any period
of English of an inflection which probably, in prehistoric
stages of the language, appeared also in the noun, the
adjective, and the verb; and secondly, in that it has
only one form for the second person, 3w, Modern Eng-
lish "thou," with its various case forms. The dual
number survives only in the personal pronoun of the
first and second persons. The inflections of the Old
English personal pronoun, followed in each case by its
Modern English derivative or equivalent when it has
one, are as follows:
FIBST PERSON SINGULAR.
Nominative ic, "I "
Genitive mm, " mine "
Dative me, " me "
Accusative me, "me"
SECOND PERSON SINGULAR.
Nominative %u,
Genitive flin,
Dative fle,
Accusative "Se,
"thou"
" thine '
"thee"
"tfiee"
DUAL.
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
PLURAL.
wit
uncer
unc
unc
DUAL.
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
Nominative
'lenitive
Accusative
we, "we"
lire, or user, " our :
us, "us"
us, "us"
git
incer
inc
inc
PLURAL.
Nominative ge,
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
THIRD PERSON SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine.
Nominative he, " he " heo, " she "
Genitive his, "his" hiere, "her"
Dative him, "him" hiere, "her"
Accusative hine, "him" hie, "her"
«ye»
eower, "your"
eow, "you"
eow, " you "
Neuter.
hit, "it*
his, "its'1
him, « it "
hit, "if
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 69
PLURAL.
Mas. Fern. Neu.
Nominative hi, or hie, "they**
Genitive hiera, "their"
Dative him, "them"
Accusative hi, or hie, "them"
These forms of the personal pronouns were simplified
in several ways in the Middle English period. In the
first place the dual forms disappeared, and with them
the last traces of the dual number in English. The
form ic, since it generally stood in unstressed position,
tended to assume a weakened form, which later became
conventionalized in spelling as capital I. 1 The genitives
mm, Sm, persisted as mine, thine, but there also devel-
oped forms without final -n, that is, my, thy, which were
used before words beginning with a consonant, the full
forms being used before vowels and in the absolute po-
sition. The dative and accusative fell together under
1 The use of the capital for the pronoun of the first person, nominative
case, in English, a custom not shared by any other European language
(cf. German ich, French je, Italian to, Spanish yo), is due to purely me-
chanical reasons, and not, as it is sometimes invidiously said, to the ego-
tism of the English people. The custom arose in the late Middle English
period, when in order to distinguish the letter t in cursive writing, which
as a single stroke of the pen might easily he mistaken as part of another
letter, it was commonly written as J or I. The origin of the period over
i is the same ; the period was used to indicate that this stroke of the pen
over which it stood was the letter i, and not merely a preliminary stroke to
some other letter. It was thus originally a mechanical device similar to
that now in use in printing offices, where in manuscripts a stroke is placed
over an n, i. e. n, and under a u, i. e. u, in order to prevent mistaking one
for the other. With the invention of printing, the form I was carried
over from writing as the symbol for the letter when standing alone, al-
tho in the early days of printing both the capital and the small letter
were thus used. Gradually, however, with the establishment of fixed con«
ventions in printing and writing, the capital letter came to be the only
recognized form for this purpose. For the importance of •tress aa affect*
ing the development of a sound, see below, pp. 142-148.
70 MODERN ENGLISH
the forms me, thee, us, and you. Like the first person
singular, because it was in the unstressed position, Old
English us developed a weak form with short vowel,
Modern English us, although regularly u should give
ou (cf. Old English hils, Mod. Eng. house, etc.). The
forms of the third person were variously modified. The
dative and accusative singular were simplified under
one form, for the masculine him, the old dative, for the
feminine her, likewise the old dative. The neuter dative-
accusative form became hit, " it," the old accusative, the
old dative, him, not being used here as the dative was in
the masculine and feminine because of its identity with
the masculine form. The genitive singular of the neuter.
his, was also gradually discarded because of its identity
TTith the genitive singular of the masculine, and in its
place was developed a new genitive singular neuter
formed by adding the regular -s ending of genitives to
the uninflected form of the nominative. In all these
developments it will be seen that the tendency was
towards a limitation of the number, but also towards a
stricter definition of the value of forms. Old English
permitted identity of forms in different grammatical cat-
egories, his, for example, for both masculine and neuter
genitive; but the tendency, at least, of later English
development has been in the direction of a single form
lor each grammatical category. This tendency was
helped in the present instance by the change from gram-
matical to logical gender. So long as gender was a
purely grammatical distinction, as in Old English, one
might use the same form for masculine and neuter; but
when gender came to mean a real difference in the nature
of the objects designated, as in Modern English, it was
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 71
obviously necessary to have distinctive forms for the
different genders. The plural forms did not persist
because of their similarity in form to singulars, hi of
the plural not being readily distinguishable from he of
the singular, hiera from hiere, "her," and him being
identical in singular and plural. For the Old English
forms were consequently substituted the forms they,
their, them, probably under the influence of the Scan-
dinavian forms, which begin with th, and perhaps also
partly out of recollection of the plural forms of the defi-
nite article, which also begin with th. The first person
singular of the feminine became she, in which there is
probably to be seen an amalgamation of the Old English
feminine article seo with the pronoun heo, which might
otherwise have been confused with the masculine he.
The adverb in Old English does not differ greatly from
its use in Middle and in Modern English, in all three
stages of the language being susceptible of inflection
only for the purpose of showing degrees of comparison.
Various inflections, however, which were lost in later
English, were used in Old English with the power of
forming adverbs. Thus the dative singular ending -e,
added to an adjective formed an adverb, e. g., soft, ad-
jective, softe, adverb ; the dative plural ending was simi-
larly used, e. g., hwil, " time," Modern English " while,"
with the dative plural inflection, hwilum, was used with
sense of Modern English "at times," "from time to
time." The genitive singular ending -es also often had
adverbial value, as in dceg, "day," dceges, "by day."
With the gradual disappearance of inflections, these
inflectional adverbs ceased to be used, their place being
taken largely by the compositional adverb with -ly<
72 MODERN ENGLISH
The adverb in -ww persists, however, in the archaic form
" whilom " ; the -es adverb of genitive origin is not now
distinguishable from the plural form. But in construc-
tions like " Evenings is the best time to see him," the
word " evenings " is a direct survival of the old genitive
adverb construction. With the loss of final inflectional
-e, adverbs like softe could no longer be distinguished
from the adjective form soft. This type of adverb
formation also persists in Modern English in adverbs
without ending, as in constructions like " Go slow " ;
"He fought hard, but there was no hope for him";
and very commonly in Biblical and poetic English in
phrases like " exceeding glad," " the sun shone cold
upon the earth."
The inflection of the Old English verb differs from
that of the Modern English verb only in having a larger
number of specific forms for the various persons, tenses,
etc. There was considerable variety among the dialects
of Old English in their treatment of the inflections of
the verb, the most conservative dialect being the West
Saxon, which is made the basis of this description. In
Old English, verbs are classified as weak, the Modern
English regular verbs, and strong, the Modern English
irregular verbs (see above Chapter III, § 4). Besides,
they inflect for the three persons ; for two numbers ; for
three moods, indicative, imperative, and optative or sub-
junctive, the last mood being used much more exten-
sively in Old English than it is in Modern English ; for
the formation of the verbals, the participle and the infin-
itive ; and for two tenses, the present and the past or
preterite. The forms of the present tense are also
used with the value of the future, and besides the
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 73
simple inflectional tenses, as in Modern English, there
are a number of phrasal verbs, formed with the auxili-
aries habban, " have," sculan, " shall," willan, "will," beon,
"be," etc., joined to the infinitive of the main verb.
Old English, like Modern English, has no real inflec-
tional passive, but only a compound or phrasal passive,
formed with the help of the verb beon, "be," "was,"
etc., joined to the past participle of the verb. The in-
finitive ends usually in -an, singan, " to sing," but occa-
sionally also in ~ian, endian, " to end." The preposition
" to " is not used in Old English merely as the sign of
the infinitive, as in Modern English, but when used it is
followed by the inflected form of the infinitive, in the
dative case, the whole being virtually a prepositional
phrase indicating purpose, e. g., to singanne, "for the
purpose of singing," to endianne, "in order to end."
The present participle ends in -ende, singende ; the past
participle of the strong verb ends in -en, sungen, tf sung,"
of the weak verb in -ed, -od, frequently carrying also
the prefix ge-, e. g., ge-fylled, " filled," ge-endod, " ended."
The personal endings are few in number. For the pres-
ent tense indicative singular they are -e, -est, -eft : ic singe,
ftu singest, he singefi. All persons of the plural end in
-aft : we, ge, hie singaft. But most verbs, whose infini-
tives end in -ian, have -aS in the third person singular,
and -iaft in all persons of the plural. In the optative or
subjunctive all singulars end in -e and all plurals in -en.
In the past tense the first and third persons of strong
verbs have no endings : ic sang, he sang ; but the second
person has the ending -e, and likewise in the root of
the word takes over the radical vowel of the plural, ftu
mnge. The plural has the ending -on for all persons, we,
74 MODERN ENGLISH
ge. Me sungon. In the weak verb the second person
singular of the past tense has the -est ending of the pres-
ent, Sw fylledest; the first and third are ic fyllede, he
fyllede, and the plural we, ge, hie fylledon. The subjunc-
tive forms are the same for the past as for the present, -e
for the singular, and -en for the plural. The only other
forms which need be noted are those of the imperative,
which appear in the singular either without ending or
with the endings -e or -a, and in the plural with the end-
ing -aS, or -ia%.
4. The Inflections of the Middle English Period.
The language of the Middle English period underwent a
great number of changes, affecting not only inflections,
but also vocabulary, sounds, and the whole structure of
the language. The causes of this development, this
thorogoing reconstruction of the language, are very
complex. So far as inflections go, however, one of the
main causes was pretty certainly a change in the way
words were accented in the Middle English period. The
only kind of word stress which could have preserved the
full inflectional endings of the Old English period is a
general or distributed stress, spread over the word as a
whole. But in the Middle English period apparently
the stress of words began to become more like that of
Modern English, to be placed strongly and heavily on
the first syllables of words, with a consequent obscuring
and weakening of the later syllables of the words. A
second main cause of inflectional change in the Middle
English period was the condition of general social and
political unrest which accompanied the period of the
Danish Conquest, and, a little later, the Norman Con-
quest. The result of these two conquests was the
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 75
complete overthrow of the English social and political
system. For a period of several generations there was a
time of great confusion ; the standards, the traditional
rules and habits of the English people of Britain, in
speech and in other matters, were forgotten arid broken
down. The result was that the constraints of a rigid
social custom, of conventional education and good breed-
ing, being to a considerable extent removed, the language
was allowed to develop in an untrammeled and popular
way. The usages of the radical, the ignorant, and un-
educated part of the people were not held in check and
the result was that when English began to reassert itself,
it was no longer the English of the Old English period,
but an English that had been modified by passing
through a period of popular and natural development.
The situation was very much as tho what we now
call " good English " should for some reason or other be
given up, say as a result of a Japanese conquest of
America. For a time Japanese would have the upper
hand. Americans would all try to learn Japanese, to
talk Japanese, to act like Japanese, because the Japa-
nese would give tone to everything and would be the con-
trolling power in the country. English would no longer
be taught in the school or the home, and the only persons
who would use English would be the populace, who
would not of course come into close contact with the
new ruling civilization of the country. They would
speak their natural speech, the English of the people,
and the old " good English " would become extinct and
would be crowded out by the "incorrect English" of
the uneducated and heedless part of the population. All
who spoke English at all might thqn say "You was/'
76 MODERN ENGLISH
instead of " You were " ; " He ain't," instead of " He
isn't"; perhaps " He done it," instead of, " He did
it " ; and a thousand similar uses which are now held
in check by the standards of careful English would be-
come general. For a time, then, we should all together
be "uneducated" and "popular." But suppose now
that after several generations this Japanese invasion and
the prestige of things Japanese should pass over, and that
English should begin to reassert itself. Soon the educa-
tive and conservative instinct would set to work. The
more thoughtful part of the people would again con-
struct a system of the language, and again we should
have rules of grammar, a correct speech, at the side of
an incorrect one. But the new correct speech would be
based simply upon the usage of the people of tliis later
generation, and consequently it would contain much that
the earlier generation regarded as incorrect. After the
language had passed through the popular stage and had
emerged again into a cultivated stage, " You was," " He
ain't," and " He done it " might very well be the only
possible correct forms. This, as has been said, is what
happened in the Middle English period. The old stand-
ards of conventional propriety and correctness were more
or less forgotten, the language followed the free and un-
regulated impulses of the people, and consequently when
it rose again to the position of a stable and classical lit-
erary language in the time of Chaucer and his predeces-
sors, it was a very different language from what it had
been in the time of Alfred and .^Elfric. It is not neces-
sary, however, or even reasonable, to regard the language
of the Middle English period as a corrupt and degener-
ate form of Old English, for these terms suppose that
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 77
the language of the later period is less admirable and
effective than that of the earlier. It is better to speak
of it as a development from, or an evolution out of, Old
English. For it does not follow that the popular dialect
of a language is any less capable of doing all that lan-
guage is expected to do than the conventional " correct"
speech. It often happens that it is more capable, and
one of the main sources of strength in the English lan-
guage is the frequency and the ease with which it renews
its vigor by drawing from the living and ever-flowing
well of popular speech.
The inflections of the Middle English period are
largely the inflections of the Old English period in a
disappearing stage. Owing to that change in word ac-
cent which has just been mentioned, the final syllables
of words, especially inflectional syllables, tended to be-
come weak and indistinct in pronunciation. This tend-
ency is already apparent in the late Old English period,
manifesting itself first in the ending -um of the dative
plural of nouns and of adjectives, in the time of ^Elfric.
This ending gradually became vague and uncertain,
appearing in the various forms -ww, -on, -en, -an, the last
form becoming the predominating one by the end of
the Old English period. The most important inflec-
tional development, however, of the early Middle Eng-
lish period consisted in the leveling of all unstressed
end vowels under the vowel -e (pronounced like the
second syllable of "sooner," with the r silent, i. e.,
" soon-uh"). The effect of this change upon the inflec-
tional system of the noun, for example, will be seen by
substituting this vowel -e for the various vowels given
in the table of noun endings in § 3. The result would
78 MODERN ENGLISH
be the following scheme of noun inflections in Middle
English :
SINGULAR. PLUBAL.
Nominative -, -e. Nominative -, -e, -es, -en.
Genitive -e, -es, -en. Genitive -e, -ene.
Dative -, -e, -en. Dative -en.
Accusative -, -e, -en. Accusative -, -e, -es, -en.
Several important consequences followed this leveling
of the distinctive Old English vowel endings under the
vowel -e. In the first place, the grouping of the nouns
into classes, or types, of declension had largely to be
given up, for the principle of this classification was the
difference in vowel ending. The two classes which re-
mained were the class of the strong and weak nouns, the
strong nouns being those that formed their genitive sin-
gular and nominative and accusative plurals in -es, the
weak nouns those that used the ending -en for these and
other forms. Moreover, with the breaking down of the
different classes of declension passed away also gram-
matical gender. All inflections being leveled under
the general inflections -e, -es, -en, there was no longer
any reason, or indeed any means, for keeping up the dis-
tinctions of grammatical gender, and words were used as
they are in Modern English, without gender, except in
so far as they state, by their logical meaning, the sex of
the objects which they designate. The inflection of a
typical strong noun in Middle English is that of ston
(the vowel a having changed to o in the Middle English
period), of a typical weak noun, that of sterre, " star,"
in the following paradigms ; letters which are enclosed
within parentheses are such as are sometimes dropped
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 79
in the early Middle English period and are altogether
dropped in the later Middle English period.
SnrouLAR. SINGULAB.
Nominative ston Nominative sterre
Genitive stones Genitive sterre (n)
Dative ston(e) Dative sterre (n)
Accusative ston Accusative sterre(n)
PLURAL. FLUBAL.
Nominative stones Nominative sterren
Genitive ston(en)e, stones Genitive sterr(en)e
Dative stonen, stones Dative sterren
Accusative stones Accusative sterren
The tendency of all nouns was to fall into these two
groups, the ston-stones group, and the sterre-sterren group.
The ston-stones group, as the more numerous group,
tended to impose itself upon the sterre-sterren group, so
that besides these forms and contemporary with them
are often found the forms sterre, sterres.
The loss of grammatical gender in the noun naturally
led to the loss of agreement in inflection between the
noun and its adjective, so far as gender is concerned.
The same leveling of inflectional endings took place in
the adjective as in the noun ; the only one which per-
sisted after the loss of those indicative of gender was
the vowel -e, which served to mark the plural number
and the weak inflection of the adjective. The inflection
of the Middle English adjective god, "good," would,
therefore, be as follows:
STBOWO. WEAK.
Singular, all cases and genders, Singular, all cases and genders,
god. gode.
Plural, all cases and genders, Plural, all cases and genders,
yode. (/ode.
80 MODERN ENGLISH
An example of a strong singular would be the phrase
A yong Squyer (from Chaucer's Prolog to The Canter-
bury Tales, 1. 79) ; a strong plural would be and smale
fowles (ibid., 1. 9 ; it should be remembered that every
vowel is pronounced in Middle English) ; a weak singu-
lar is the phrase The yonge sonne, and a weak plural, the
phrase The tendre croppes (both ibid., 1. 7).
In the case of the definite article, the forms with ini-
tial 8, that is se and seo, gave up this s for J> (th), by anal-
ogy to the majority of the forms of the article, which begin
with ]?. This gave for the nominative singular forms ]>et
]>eo, ]>cet. But by a regular phonetic development, the
vowel of Ipeo became the same as that of J>e, and with the
loss of grammatical gender in the noun, the separate
neuter form ]>cet was given up as an article, its place being
taken by the form ]>e of the masculine and feminine ; no
longer needed as an article, the form ]>cet itself per-
sisted with changed value as a demonstrative pronoun.
Having gone as far as this, ajialogy then operated still
further, and there being little need felt for inflecting
the article in the other cases and for gender, since it was
readily assumed that the article was of the same case and
gender as the noun with which it went, the single fixed
form ]>e (the) established itself for all genders, numbers,
and cases of the article. The main principle, therefore,
which operated in the simplification of the definite arti-
cle is that of substitution, one single type form crowding
out all the dozen or more inflections of the Old English
article.
Inflection of the verb as strong and weak, or irregular
and regular, persisted in the Middle English period, but
from early Middle English times there was a tendency
THE BEGINNING OF CHAUCER'S "PARDONER'S TALE."
From Cambridge University Library MS. G. G. 4. 27, folio 306.
(For description, see Appendix.)
82 MODERN ENGLISH
on the part of strong verbs to become weak, for example,
Old English wepan, weopy beside Middle English wepen,
wepte, " weep," " wept." This tendency, which was de-
veloped still further in the Modern English period, and
which is still operative, was due to the fact that the
weak verbs were the more numerous, as well as being
the simpler and more readily apprehended manner of
tense formation. The weak verbs thus tended to become
the type form, crowding out by analogy to them many
old strong verbs and attracting to their class all new
verbs that entered the language. Examining the de-
scription of verb inflections for the Old English period
given above, it will be seen that the general rule of
the leveling of inflectional vowels under the vowel -e
affected a considerable number of verb forms. The end-
ings -aS, -mS of the present plural became -eS, like the
third singular. The endings -e, -a, and -#3, -iaft of the
imperative became respectively -e and -eft. The infinitive
endings -an, -ian, -anne became -en, -enne. In the pret-
erite plural the -on, -don endings became -en, -den.
Other changes were due to different causes. The end-
ing of the present participle -ende tended to fall to-
gether with certain nouns naming actions which ended
regularly in -ung, -ing, e. g., langung, " desire, longing,"
and which in Old English were distinctly felt as nouns
and not as parts of the verb. Their similarity in form,
however, and also in meaning, attracted the present
participle to these nouns, with the result that the -ende
participial inflection was given up, and the noun in -ung,
-ing, and the present participle became indistinguishable
in form, both with the ending -ing. Another simplifica-
tion that tended to take place affected the preterite,
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 83
tenses. In the Old English strong verb, the preterite
plural stem was frequently different from the preterite
singular, and the past participle often differed from both.
In Middle English the three preterite stems tended to be-
come alike, to simplify under one form, just as the forms
of the article all tended to simplify under the type form
the. Thus the Old English verb lindan, band, bundon,
bunden, became in Middle English binde, bound, bound.
This leveling never became complete, as in the case of
the article, and we still have in Modern English verbs
like sing, sang, sung ,• drive, drove, driven ,• the simplifica-
tion, however, affected a considerable number of verbs.
5. The Inflections of the Modern English Period.
Altho the Modern English period is called the period
of lost inflections, it should be understood that this term
is used with relative, and not absolute, meaning. All
inflections have not been lost in the Modern English
period, altho compared with those of the Middle Eng-
lish or the Old English period they have dwindled to a
very small number. Nevertheless the language still re-
mains an inflectional language, and for the expression of
certain ideas no other means than inflection has been
devised. The developments in the Modern English
period arise from the further carrying out of the two
tendencies of the Middle English period, first the tend-
ency towards obscuring the vowels of inflectional
syllables, and second, the tendency towards simplifica-
tion by the substitution of one type form in the place of
a variety of forms. In the passage from the Middle
English to the Modern English period, the language did
not again become merely a popular dialect which later
was elevated to the dignity of a standard literary
84 MODERN ENGLISH
language, as had occurred in the transition from the Old
English to the Middle English period. On the contrary,
from the end of the Middle English time to the present
day the language has been watched with increasing care
and vigilance. It has been systematized, regulated,
purified; in short, it has tended to become more and
more an established and settled literary and conventional
language. The changes, consequently, which have
taken place in the Modern English period have been
comparatively slow and comparatively few in number.
The difference between the English of the year 1900 and
the year 1500 is much less than that between the Eng-
lish of the year 1250 and the year 1000. The Modern
English has been a regulating, refining, systematizing
period, rather than a revolutionizing, reconstructing
period.
The final result, in the early Modern English period,
of the weakening of inflectional vowels was, as has been
stated, their complete loss. Thus starting with the Old
English dissyllabic noun nam-a, "name," we get in
Middle English the form nam-e, still a dissyllable ; but
in Modern English we have name, a monosyllable, the
final -e having no other value than to indicate the
length of the radical vowel. Likewise the Old English
plural stan-as, the Middle English ston-es, becomes
Modern English ston(e)s ; and the Old English genitive
stan-es, Middle English ston-es, is Modern English
ston(e)8, with an apostrophe as a mechanical device to
distinguish the possessive from the plural. With the
loss of the final -e disappeared also the last remnant of
concord between the adjective and its noun. For where
Middle English indicated agreement in plural number
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 85
and indicated the weak inflection of the adjective by the
inflectional -e, Modern English, through the loss of this
inflection, lost also the grammatical distinctions, and uses
now only one adjective form in all positions. The def-
inite article, having leveled all its forms under the type
form the, had already in the Middle English period
developed as far as possible. The verb underwent the
same changes in the loss of final syllables that other
words experienced: thus the Old English infinitive
wep-an became Middle English wep-en, and this by the
loss of the final syllable and the regular change in the
radical vowel became Modern English weep.
As important as these changes due to inflectional loss,
are those which were brought about by substitution.
Thus in the nouns the two type declensions which were
preserved in Middle English, the strong and the weak,
the strong forming its plural by means of the ending
-es, the weak by means of the ending -en, tended to sim-
plify under the type of the strong nouns, which were
the more numerous. The result was that where Chaucer
wrote treen, " trees," been, t ' bees," shoon, " shoes," and
so with a great many other nouns, we now use the com-
mon -s ending for all plurals. The only exceptions to
this rule (aside from a few words like tooth, teeth, which
form their plurals by internal inflection) and the only
survivals of the old weak inflection in Modern English
are the words ox-en, plural of ox, children, and brethren,
plurals of child and brother.
Substitution affected the old genitive, our modern
possessive, in a remarkable way. The genitive ending
-es in Old English was the mark of the genitive singu-
lar, masculine and neuter, of the noun. It then became
86 MODERN ENGLISH
a type form for all genitives, feminine as well as mascu-
line and neuter, in the singular. The Old English geni-
tive plural inflection for all genders was -a, -ena, which
in Middle English became -e, -ene. In Modern English,
inflectional loss would have deprived the genitive of any
ending in the plural. Instead, however, the genitive
singular ending became typical not only for all genders
of the singular, but for the plural as well. The ending
-es was felt, therefore, as a generalized inflection stand-
ing for the genitive or possessive relation. We get, con-
sequently, as the general type form of the singular noun
in Modern English, stone, except stone's, the genitive or
possessive, which in writing and printing has an apos-
trophe before the -s to distinguish the word from the
plural. A similar mechanical device is used to mark
the genitive or possessive plural from the possessive sin-
gular and the other forms of the plural ; here, however,
the apostrophe is placed after the -s, as in stones', tho
the phonetic value of the word is the same as that of the
possessive singular. We have, therefore, as type of the
plural inflection, the common form stones, with the pos-
sessive plural stones'. This use of the apostrophe as a
mechanical device to indicate the possessive is of com-
paratively late origin. It became established only at
the end of the seventeenth and in the early eighteenth
centuries as a result of the growing influence of printing
and of printers' rules. It is of course a device for the
eye and not for the ear. Before the use of the apostro-
phe, however, another method of indicating the posses-
sive had become pretty general in writing, the use of the
pronoun his instead of the genitive ending -s, as in G-od
his wrath, for G-od's wrath. This pronoun his was never
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 87
pronounced in spoken speech, but, like the apostrophe
,it served merely as a visual symbol to indicate the pos-
sessive relation. In proof of this the remark of the
Elizabethan versifier, Gabriel Harvey, the friend of
Spenser, may be cited. Harvey is complaining that the
English spelling of his day was misleading to the poet,
because often words were spelled as dissyllables but pro-
nounced as monosyllables, and continues thus : " But see
what absurdities thys yl fauored Orthographye, or rather
Pseudography, hathe engendred, and howe one errour
still breedeth and begetteth an other. Haue wee not
Mooneth for Moonthe, sithence for since, whilest for whilste,
phantasie for phansie, euen for evn, Diuel for Divl, God
ht/s wrath for Groddes wrath, and a thousande of the same
stampe." l
Modern English has developed special forms of the
possessive when the possessive stands in absolute position,
that is, when it is not immediately followed by the noun
which it modifies. Thus we say, " This is my hat," or, in
the archaic form, " This is thy hat " ; but " This hat is
mine, thine." In their origins the thine, mine forms of the
possessive are direct survivals of the Old English geni-
tives, Sm, mm. Formerly, that is, in the Middle English
period, these full forms were retained before words begin-
ning with a vowel sound, as they are still in Modern Eng-
lish poetry, e. g., "Mine eyes have seen the glory of the
1 Gabriel Harvey, Of Reformed Versify ing, written in 1579-1580, and re-
printed in Smith, Elizabethan Critical Essays, I, 120. Notice in this pas-
sage how freely and inconsistently Harvey uses the final -e, e. g., hathe,
howe, moonthe, whilste, thousande, stampe. Of course none of these final
-e's were pronounced. At the close of the Middle English period when
the final -e's had lost all phonetic value, they were often retained in spell-
ing, but also often dropped, and even were indiscriminately added, to the
spelling of words to which they had ne,ver really belonged,.
88 MODERN ENGLISH
coming of the Lord " ; but the abbreviated forms my, thy,
tended to become general, especially before words begin-
ning with a consonant. When special forms were required
for the possessive in absolute position, the full forms
mine, thine, were naturally chosen, and my, thy, Ms, our,
and your became the only forms for the possessive in
adjective position. But the forms his, her, our, your, and
their, in absolute position, also underwent a change. In
Old English there were not two forms of these pro-
nouns, the same form being used in both the adjective
and absolute positions. In Middle English the un-
changed forms continued to be used for some time, as
in the Wy cliff e- Purvey Bible, Luke vi, 20 : the kyngdom
of Grod is youre. But gradually a distinctive genitive
ending for these absolute possessives was felt to be
necessary, and two forms came into use. The first was
made by adding the regular -s genitive ending, as the type
indication of the possessive relation, giving ours, yours,
and of course his, which needed no addition. But by
analogy to the mine, thine forms, influenced perhaps also
by the possessive adjective own, possessives with an -n
ending were formed, giving mine, thine, ourn, yourn,
theirn, etc. Examples of this second kind of formation
are found in the Wy cliff e-Purvey Bible, as in Mark xii,
7 : the eritage schal be ourun ; Matthew v, 3 : the kyng-
dom of hevenes is herne. This form of the absolute
possessive persists in Modern English only in popular
speech, the standard or conventional use having become
yours, hers, theirs, etc.1
1 Some of the dialects of England have carried this method of possessive
formation over into the nominative, e. g., shisn, composed of the nomina-
tive she, to which are added first the possessive -s, and then the absolute
possessive -n endings. See Wright, English Dialect Grammar, p. 275.
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 89
Substitution affected also the forms of the personal
pronouns in an interesting way. In the first person,
the correspondence between Modern English and the
earlier periods is close, Modern English I, mine, me, and
we, our, us, being the direct representation of Old Eng-
lish ic, mm, me, and we, ure, Us. In the second person,
however, the difference is great. This change started
with the nominative plural, Old English ge, which gave
our Biblical English ye, as in What went ye out for to
see? For this ye, however, was early substituted the
form you, which was the form for the dative and accu-
sative, derived from Old English low. The possessive
form was also your from eower, and the preponderance
of the spellings you, you-r naturally led to its substitu-
tion in the nominative, giving you. In the singular the
old forms Sw, Sm, Se gave regularly our Biblical English
thou, thine, thee. In the late Middle English period,
however, the thou, thine, thee forms tended to be given
up for the you, your, you forms of the plural. This sub-
stitution was brought about through the influence of
the French language, in which the plural form of the
pronoun was the polite form, even in addressing a
single individual. The singular pronoun was used only
in familiar address, in the conversation of intimate
friends or the members of a family. Both forms of
the singular have persisted to modern times, but the
forms thou, thine, thee are now used in literary speech,
and then only in poetry and elevated discourse ; the
The New English Dictionary cites the following example from the
Hampshire dialect : " Let thee and I go our own waay, and we '11 let she
go shisn." Another analogical formation, sometimes heard in the lan-
guage of children, is the possessive mies for my ; mies is to my, as yowrs,
theirs are to your, their.
90 MODERN ENGLISH
real singular is now you, your, you. In some dialects,
especially in England, the thou, thine, thee forms also
persist in popular spoken use. In the earlier Modern
English period, in the time of Shakspere, and as late
as the early eighteenth century, the two forms thou
and you existed in good English side by side, and
they could be and were used in current colloquial
speech with good effect. The form thou was used in
the conversation of friends, or of a husband and wife,
the transition to you indicating a slightly more formal
tone in conversation. Thus, for example, in the come-
dies of Etherege and Vanbrugh, two men friends or two
women friends (but not a man and a woman, unless
they are husband and wife), usually address each other
as thou, but to others they are you. In Etherege's She
Would if She Could, Sir Frederick, a boisterous swash-
buckler, noisy and familiar, uses thou to Mrs. Rich, the
effect being one of a sort of friendly, good-natured im-
pertinence, Mrs. Rich being only his friend and there-
fore properly to be addressed by you. In speaking to-
servants and those of inferior social rank, and in giving-
orders, thou was also the form used. It was likewise
used in contemptuous language, as in Sir Toby's advice
to Sir Andrew Aguecheek, " If thou thou 'st him some
thrice, it shall not be amiss" (Twelfth Night, III, 2).
All this is what we should expect, for the language of
familiar intercourse, of friendship, and of contempt is
all on somewhat the same plane — that is, it is all the
language of strongly colloquial and familiar color. It is
interesting to observe that the forms thou, thine, and thee
have been at all periods the ones used in prayer and
generally in elevated discourse, and this is true even of
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 91
those periods in which thou is used as a mark of famili-
arity or of contempt. The polite forms you, your, you
have never been used in addressing the Deity, probably,
first of all because there was originally a feeling of in-
congruity in using what was fashionable or courtly lan-
guage for this purpose ; and now, of course, you is no
longer courtly or fashionable, but too familiar to be used
for lofty purposes. Moreover the language of poetry
and prayer is always strongly traditional and conserva-
tive; it would consequently tend to preserve the old
historical usage of the English tongue, and once the use
of thou was fixed in sacred language, as in the prayer
book and the English translation of the Bible, it would
naturally be very influential in maintaining that usage
through later periods. This feeling for thou as the only
proper form to be used in addressing the Deity is well
brought out in a passage of a sixteenth century work, A
Dialogue against the Feuer Pestilence, printed in 1564. 1
A beggar, Mendicus, appears at a door soliciting alms,
and recites part of the Lord's Prayer as follows : " Our
father whiche art in heauen, hallowed be your name,
your kyngdom come, your will be dooen in yearth as it
is in heauen," etc., upon which he is ridiculed by Civis
and Uxor, the gentlemen from whom he is soliciting
alms, one of whom remarks, " Me thinke I doe heare a
good manerly Begger at the doore, and well brought up.
How reuerently he saieth his Pater Noster ! he thous no.k
God, but you[s] him."
The discrepancy between the plural form you a& a
word of address to a single person disturbed greatly the
of mind of the; lounders ol the Society of Friands
V Early English. Text Society, Extta Series,. VoL.LII, p^ 5.,
92 MODERN ENGLISH
or Quakers. They observed that the Bible, meaning of
course the English translation, always used thou to one
and you to many. They thought it not fitting, therefore,
that men should use a more dignified form of expression
in addressing each other than they used in addressing
the Lord. Moreover you as a word of address to a single
person is not consistent with the well-known rule of
grammar, according to which you is plural, and therefore
on that score also its use as singular was wrong. Thi?
is just the kind of linguistic crotchet which we might
expect to stick in the mind of a half-educated person
like George Fox, the founder of the Society of Friends ;
and it is not surprising to see him come forth in
defense of Thou to One and You to Many, to use his
own battle-cry. He published a work called " A Battle-
Door^ for Teachers and Professors to learn Singular and
Plural ; You to Many, and Thou to One : Singular One,
Thou; Plural Many, You," which was printed in London,
for "Robert Wilson and to be sold at his Shop at the
Signe of the Black-spread-Eagle and Wind-mil in Mar-
tins le Grand, 1660.'* The teachers and professors of
his day Fox takes to task in the following fashion:
" Do not they speak false English, false Latine, false
Greek, false Hebrew, false Caldee, false Syriack, and
Arabick, false Dutch, false French; and false to the
other Tongues, that followes here in this Book, that
doth not speak thou to one, what ever he be, Father,
1 A battle-door, as the word is used here, means a primer. Literally
the word means a wooden bat, shaped somewhat like a tennis racket. But
it is used in this metaphorical sense because the early primer, or horn-book,
consisted of a cardboard with the abc, etc., on it, surrounded by a wooden
rim with a handle, and covered with a transparent piece of horn, the whole
being shaped somewhat like a flat bat or racket,
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 98
Mother, King, or Judge ; is he not a Novice and Un-
mannerly, and an Ideot and a Fool, that speaks You to
one, which is not to be spoken to a singular, but to many?
O Vulgar Professors and Teachers, that speaks Plural
when they should Singular, lapis, a stone, lapides, stones,
that is, more than one. Come you Priests and Profes-
sors, have you not learnt your Accidence ? " 1
This avoidance of you as a pronoun of address in the
singular has persisted to this day among the Friends.
But the old, and historically the correct, form thou as
nominative has been given up for the type form thee,
used for both nominative and objective, as in " Thee will
have to get thee another coat." In thus using the objec-
tive thee as the type form, the Friends have done exactly
what the standard language has done, since the nomina-
tive here is historically ye and the objective is you,
from Old English ge and eow, the two forms being sim-
plified under one, the objective form you.
Substitution has also contributed largely to the sim-
plification of the Modern English verb system. The
limiting of the principal parts by reducing the preterite
tenses to one type form has already been mentioned.
The personal inflections have also been simplified, es-
pecially in the present tense. Here, through the com-
bined influence of inflectional leveling and loss, and of
substitution, working through several dialects of the
Middle English period, all forms have been reduced to
a single type, e. g. (7, you, we, you, they) sing, with
the exception of the third singular, (he) sings, which
has an inflectional -a. The elevated language has been
more conservative, preserving the special forms for the
I Fox, A Battle-Door for Teachers, pp. 2-3.
94 MODERN ENGLISH
singular (I) sing, (thou) singest, (He) singeth, but the
plural is the same in both elevated and normal style.
6. Conclusions. The general effect of inflectional
loss and substitution has been to change to a consider-
able extent the structure of the English language.
From a language in which each word was closely and
formally united to some other word by agreement in
grammatical form, that is from a synthetic language,
English has developed into a language in which the
words, so far as formal concord or agreement goes, are
almost altogether free and independent. The language
has developed type forms which can stand in any posi-
tion, their relationships being indicated largely by the
order of the words as they are put together, not by
inflectional elements. This kind of language is called
analytic, in contrast to synthetic, because in its struc-
ture it is made up of independent units which may be
easily detached from each other, whereas in the syn-
thetic structure, the language binds the word group into
a whole in which all the words are mutually dependent
for their form on their place in the group. This will
be made clear by an illustration. The adjective old in
our modern analytic language may modify any noun
of any gender, number, or case; it is a perfectly free,
universal word-unit. In a synthetic stage of the lan-
guage, however, as in Old English, the adjective old
had to take on various forms according to the gender,
number, and case of the noun, and according as it was
inflected strong or weak. Thus the Modern English
phrases the old man and the old men, changes only the
word man, the other words being type forms that modify
the plural as well AS the singular. In ^Qip). English,
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 95
however, we should have to change all three words,
se ealda man for the singular, and pa ealdan men for the
plural.
It will be seen from this example that the modern
analytic language has in many respects gained in econ-
omy over the older synthetic language. By the use
of type forms, the modern language saves much useless
repetition. Thus in the two Modern English phrases
cited in the preceding paragraph, the ideas of singular
and plural are each expressed once by man and men,
and need not, so far as power of conveying the thought
is concerned, be expressed by the modifying words.
But in Old English not only does man express the
singular idea, but it is expressed also by the inflection
in se and ealda; and in the case of the plural, the idea
of plurality is expressed three times as well, once by
men, once by ealdan and once by ]>d. Nothing is gained
by this threefold repetition of the idea of plurality, and
Modern English is much the simpler and more reason-
able in allowing it to be assumed that when one uses
the noun men, adjectives which limit this noun are
plural also. In the same way the synthetic language
has to repeat the idea of gender or of case with each
new modifying word, whereas in Modern English this
repetition is likewise avoided by the use of type forms
for all genders and cases.
One further illustration of the change from synthetic
to analytic structure, and the advantage of the latter
over the former, may be cited, the example being taken
from Modern English and Latin, the latter a more highly
inflectional, and therefore more synthetic, language than
period of English. The English relative pronoun who
96 MODERN ENGLISH
is a type form, expressing merely the interrogative idea
without limitation of gender or number. To translate
the English sentence, Who did it f into Latin, however,
we should have to give four sentences, Quis hoc fecit?
the pronoun being the singular masculine interrogative ;
Quae hoc fecit ? the pronoun being the singular feminine ;
Qui hoc fecerunt ? the plural masculine ; and Quae hoc
feceruntf the plural feminine. Since the question
Who did it ? usually contains no implication of gender
and number, and is merely a question for information, it
is manifestly better to have a general type form in which
to cast the question, than to be compelled to make it
specific as to gender and number as the Latin must do.
The English analytic form of expression answers more
exactly to the logic of the situation, and is consequently
to be regarded as better than the synthetic form of
expression.1
The question naturally arises whether Modern English
has carried the process of simplification and substitution
as far as it can, and if not, if it is likely to carry it
further. As to the first half of this question, it is ob-
vious that there is room for further simplification in the
English language, and that the language would be the
gainer by further simplifications. These simplifying sub-
stitutions are indeed carried out in strata of the language
which do not feel the restraining force of the conven-
tional and standard speech. Thus we have all observed
that children strive to substitute the type plural in -s
for those few irregular plurals that survive in English,
1 See Jespersen, Progress in Language, pp. 30-31 ; and see Jespersen's
book, passim, for a detailed consideration of the advantages of an analytic
language over a synthetic one.
ENGLISH INFLECTIONS 97
giving thus foots, tooths, for feet, teeth, etc. It is a
general tendency with children also to substitute the
regular or weak forms for all the irregular or strong
forms of the verb, giving grow, growed, growed, for grow,
grew, grown; drive, drived, drived, for drive, drove,
driven, etc. These usages of child language may all be
paralleled by usages of uneducated adults, since children
and the uneducated are on the same plane so far as the
restraining power of rule or convention in language is
concerned. Thus the very common tendency of the un-
educated to use only one form for the past tense and
past participle of the verb, usually the past participle
being made to do duty for both, as in He done it, and /
seen him, is exactly this process of type substitution.
Logically there is no reason why we should have more
than two principal parts in the verb, one for present
time and one for past time, / do, and I did, or done, I
see, and / saw, or seen, with which the auxiliaries can
then build up the various compound tenses and forms.
The regular verbs, like walk, walked, walked, and many
of the irregular, have and need only two principal parts.
The substitution of seen for saw and done for did is
exactly similar in kind to other substitutions which took
place in earlier periods, and which have been accepted
into the standard language. Thus the verb cling, clung,
clung, historically should have three parts, cling, clang,
clung, like sing, sang, sung ; ring, rang, rung, etc. So
also the verb shine, shone, shone is derived from the Old
English verb sclnan, scan, scinon, scinen, which should
have given regularly shine, shone, shinnen, like ride,
rode, ridden; write, wrote, written, and numerous other
verbs. Instead, however, it has substituted a type form
7
98 MODERN ENGLISH
for the preterite tenses, using for this purpose the regu-
lar form of the preterite singular.
But the question whether or not Modern English will
carry out further these simplifications by type substitu-
tion is one which does not depend upon precedent, or, to
any considerable extent, upon the reasonableness and
advantage of such changes. The English language of
to-day has become so fixed by long use, by the systematic
statements of it which have been made by the gram-
marians and rhetoricians, by the conventionalizing ten-
dencies which always accompany the higher forms of
civilization, that changes in such obvious features of
language as inflection find it extremely hard to make
their way into good use. The popular dialects will con-
tinue to grow and develop in a freer and less trammeled
way, but the cultivated speech, tho no less subject to
continuous change, is more likely to change in subtler
ways than by the direct substitution of one form for
another.
V
ENGLISH SOUNDS
1. The Study of English Sounds. Altho one of
the most recent branches of linguistic study, the study
of sounds, or phonetics, to give the subject its tech-
nical name, has been one of the most productive of
valuable results. The study of the sounds of past pe-
riods has made the science of etymology possible, and it
has been one of the chief means of determining the rela-
tionships of languages. Grimm's Law, for example, is a
phonetic law. The study of contemporary sounds also
is helpful in various ways. It is of great practical value
to all who have anything to do with foreign languages,
or with the earlier stages of their own language. There
is no quicker or more certain way of apprehending an
unfamiliar sound than by observing how, that is, by just
what positions and movements of the vocal organs it is
made, and then by repeating these positions and move-
ments for one's self. Another reason for the study of
the sounds of contemporary speech is based on the gen-
eral principle that we all owe it to ourselves to know
what we do, and to choose to do those things that will
conduce most to our happiness and welfare. It might
seem that it could be taken for granted that every one
naturally knew just how his speech sounded, without
giving any special attention to the matter. Experiment
and observation have shown, however, that this is far
100 MODERN ENGLISH
from being true. One who has not given considerable
attention to the study of speech-sounds does not usually
hear his own speech accurately and justly. He needs
the gift to hear himself as others hear him. Time and
again it has been shown that a person thinks he says
one thing when actually the sound which he utters is
different. Often if one's speech could be recorded on
the disc of a phonograph, when reproduced it would not
be recognized and would be disclaimed by the person
who uttered it.
The practical bearing of all this is obvious. Pronun-
ciation and grammar are without doubt the most gener-
ally applied, and, on the whole, the simplest and most
effective tests of cultivation and education. As Holmes
in the Autocrat says, " a movement or a phrase often tells
you all you want to know about a person." No doubt
there is danger of drawing too sweeping inferences from
the speech of others, a danger to which all, the critic
and the criticised, are equally liable. Nevertheless, in
the end speech remains the surest and most convenient
index of the social habits and the intellectual life of the
person who uses it. It behooves all, therefore, to take
cognizance of the matter of their speech, especially of
the subtle and elusive matter of pronunciation. Every
person owes it to himself to know what the facts of his
pronunciation are and how these facts impress other per-
sons with whom he is thrown in contact. When he has
a just appreciation of all these facts, he can then order
his conduct as seems wisest and best to him. Before we
can proceed, however, to the intelligent discussion of
historical sound changes or of specific questions of con-
temporary pronunciation, it will be necessary, first, to
ENGLISH SOUNDS 101
describe briefly the organs of speech and the method
of sound-production in speaking, and, second, to settle
upon some terminology, or representation, of sounds by
which the various sounds may be certainly designated and
distinguished.
2. The Production of English Sounds. Sound,
so far as we are concerned with it in the study of lan-
guage, may be defined as the sensation of hearing pro-
duced by the modifications of a column of air in its
passage from the lungs through the organs of speech.
The specific character of the sound varies as the column
of air is variously modified by the different organs
through which it passes. The production of speech-
sound, therefore, is essentially not different from the
production of musical sound in a wind instrument, as a
horn or a clarinet.
Phonetics, however, which is the study of the sounds
of language, is not concerned with all the sounds which
the human organs of speech are capable of producing,
such as shrieks, cries, groans, and so forth, but only with
articulate sounds, that is, those sounds which are joined
together, or articulated, for the formation of syllables,
then of words, phrases, and sentences. Moreover, a
language, English for example, does not use all the pos-
sible articulate sounds which the voice can produce, but
makes a selection from a comparatively much larger
number, which become then the sound material of the
language. Different languages make a choice of different
sounds ; and we have sounds in English which are not
used in French and German, and French and German,
on the other hand, have sounds which we do not use in
English. Yet we know from the fact that Englishmen
102 MODERN ENGLISH
learn French and German, and Frenchmen and Germans
learn English, that all, with practice, are equally capable
of producing all the sounds of the various languages.
Each special language, therefore, makes what seems to
be an arbitrary choice of a certain number of possible
sounds ; and we may consequently define English pho-
netics as the study of the sounds used in the construction
of English speech.
The organs mainly concerned in the production of
speech sound are the lungs ; the larynx, in which are
the glottis and the vocal chords; the cavity of the
mouth, in which the tongue, the palate, the lips and the
teeth are important modifiers of sound; and the cavity
of the nose. The lungs are concerned with the produc-
tion of sound only in that they send forth the column of
air which later is modified by the more special organs of
voice so as to produce sound. When one produces
sound by playing a wind instrument the column of air
passes unmodified by the speech organs into the more
distant modifying agent, the horn, or flute, or whatever
the instrument may be. Under normal conditions it is
only the expiratory column of air that is used in the
production of speech sound, the inspired air being pro-
ductive of sound only in the case of sighing and a few
interjections.
The larynx, or voice box, is the first place at which
the air from the lungs on its passage outward may meet
with any obstruction. The larynx is really a part of the
windpipe, or trachea, and leads from the rear end of
the opening of the nose and mouth to the lungs. From
the back of the mouth a second tube, the gullet, or esoph-
agus, leads into the stomach. The common space at the
ENGLISH SOUNDS 103
back of the mouth from which these two canals branch
is called the pharynx. The entrance to the trachea, or
windpipe, is provided with a valve or lid, called the
epiglottis, which can be lowered in the act of swallow-
ing so as to prevent food from passing down the
trachea. When for any reason the epiglottis fails to
work, as it does some times, and portions of food or
water make their way into the trachea, we perform the
operation popularly known as " swallowing by the Sun-
day throat."
The larynx itself is a circular, or nearly circular, and
tubular combination of cartilages and muscles. The
largest of these cartilages, the thyroid or shield-like
cartilage, forms the main structure of the larynx ; it can
be felt from the outside of the throat, and is commonly
known as the Adam's apple. Another important carti-
lage is the cricoid, or ring cartilage, which forms the
base of the voice box or larynx, and to which the vocal
chords are attached. The muscles of the larynx pass
from one cartilage to the other and have as their chief
function the contraction and loosening of the vocal chords.
These chords are two in number, and they are attached to
the base of the larynx, passing approximately over the
middle of the opening of the larynx. They are not to
be thought of as chords like violin strings, for one side
of each is completely attached to the sides of the voice
box. The vibrating part is only the free outer edge of
each, which, as has been stated, can be tightened or
loosened by the aid of certain muscles. The space be-
tween the two outer edges of the vocal chords, which
varies of course in width according to the tension of the
chords, is called the glottal rift, or rima glottidis. When
104 MODERN ENGLISH
the edges of the chords are relaxed, allowing a wide rift
between them, the breath from the lungs passes through
this space without setting the chords in vibration, and,
consequently, no sound is produced in the larynx. This
last qualification is important, because the air from the
lungs may still meet with some obstruction from the
organs of the mouth or nose, in which case sound would
be produced. If it does not, it passes out of the nose or
mouth almost noiselessly, and the process is simply that
of breathing. When the rift is narrowed, however, by
the stretching of the vocal chords, the passage of the air
makes the chords vibrate, and the sound which we call
voice is produced. It should be clearly understood that
the word voice is here used in a restricted and special
sense. It does not mean any sound produced by the or-
gans of speech, but only those sounds in the production
of which the vocal chords are set in vibration. Such
sounds are called voiced sounds, others are voiceless. In
whispering, voiceless sounds are produced in the same
way as when they are given their full resonance ; but in
the whispering of voiced sounds the vocal chords do not
vibrate, or vibrate only slightly, altho they are made
tense, and the glottal rift is accordingly narrowed, as in
the production of the full-voiced sounds.
We may now pass to those organs above the larynx
which are important for the production of speech sound.
They are the pharynx, the cavity of the mouth, and the
cavity of the nose. These three spaces are together
known as the resonance chamber, and they are of the
greatest importance in the production of sound, because
no column of air can proceed from the lungs which is
not modified in some way by the resonance chamber. In
ENGLISH SOUNDS 105
fact, all voice as it comes from the vocal chords would
be the same, except for differences in loudness and soft-
ness, and it is the resonance chamber which determines
the specific value of this sound as one vowel rather than
another. By changing the shape of the resonance
chamber, the speaker gets different vowel effects,
just as the musician gets different tone effects from a
tuba and a cornet, because the two instruments have
tubes of different shapes and sizes, that is, have different
resonance chambers. After it has passed through the
larynx and into the pharynx, the breath from the lungs
may then enter the cavity of the mouth, or of the nose,
or both together. We shall consider, first, the cavity of
the mouth, and, second, the nasal cavity.
The roof of the mouth is divided into two parts, the
soft palate, or velum, at the back part of the mouth, and
the hard palate at the front part. The hard palate is
fixed and motionless, except as it moves with the motion
of the jaws. But the velum (a Latin name meaning
"veil") may be raised or lowered. When it is raised,
it closes the entrance to the nasal cavity, when lowered
it permits the air from the lungs to pass out equally
through the nose and the mouth. Within the mouth
the most important of the movable muscles is the tongue,
the parts of which need no description. Beside the pal-
ate and tongue, the teeth, gums, and lips are also used
in the production of sounds.
The nasal cavity or passage is a membrane-lined pas-
sage with no movable or muscular parts. It leads out
from the pharynx and is narrower at both ends than
at the middle, forming thus a good resonance chamber.
The passage is divided in the nose by a septum or par-
106 MODERN ENGLISH
tition, into a right and a left portion. As has been
stated, the entrance to the nasal passage can be closed
by raising the velum, in which case all breath passes out
through the mouth. " Talking through the nose " is a
popular misconception of the facts. The truth is that
when one " talks through the nose," one does n't talk
through the nose, as one should, but the velum is then
raised, or the entrance to the nasal passage is closed be-
cause of the swelling due to cold or some other disturb-
ance of normal conditions, and the unpleasant effect
which results is due to the lack of that resonance which
the sound should have received by passing through the
nasal chamber. A " nasal twang " is due to the same
cause. It is a general principle that all sounds should
be given as much resonance as they are capable of receiv-
ing, and the speaker who has allowed himself to fall into
the habit of speaking with the flat, unmusical quality of
sound which results from the closing of the nasal pas-
sage, should cultivate a more open method of sound
production. The difference between the closed and the
open nasal passage may be easily observed by first imi-
tating the speech of one suffering from a cold and then
speaking with the full quality of sound which normally
characterizes the correct use of the voice.
3. Voiced and Voiceless Sounds. Having de-
scribed the main organs of speech, we may proceed now
to some account of the modifications of sound produced
by these various organs. The first important distinction
is that between voiced and voiceless sounds. Voiced
sounds, which are also called sonant sounds, are those
in the production of which the vocal chords are set in
vibration. All vowels are voiced, because vowels are
ENGLISH SOUNDS 107
produced by the vibration of the vocal chords, the dif-
ference between vowels being caused by modification of
the sound produced by these vibrations through chang-
ing the configuration of the resonance chamber. Some
consonants are voiced, others are voiceless. Examples
of voiced consonants are g in go, b in boy, d in day.
In the production of voiceless sounds, which are also
called surd sounds, the vocal chords are not set in vibra-
tion, but the sound is produced through modification of
the column of air by the various organs of speech, teeth,
tongue, and lips, after it has passed through the rift of
the glottis without moving the vocal chords. Examples
of voiceless consonants are p in pay, t in tin, k (<?) in
king, can. By placing the finger on the Adam's apple
one can, with a little practice, easily feel the vibration
of the voice box in the production of voiced sounds, and
can thus distinguish sounds which are voiced from those
which are not, thus confirming the testimony of the
ears. In pronouncing a voiceless consonant one should
distinguish between the consonant and the vowel that
accompanies it. The name of the letter t, for example,
consists of the voiceless consonant t, followed by a vowel
which is the same as the vowel in tea, he, see, etc. In
forming consonants for the purpose of observing them,
always distinguish between the consonant and any accom-
panying vowel.
4. Vowels and Consonants. When the passages
through the mouth and through the nose are left open,
so that the air, passing through the larynx and there set-
ting the vocal chords in vibration, may continue without
further obstruction through these passages to the outer
air, a vowel sound is prpduced. The passage is widest
108 MODERN ENGLISH
open in pronouncing the vowel a in father; it is vari-
ously modified in pronouncing the other vowels, but at
no time is it completely closed, coming nearest to being
so in pronouncing the vowel ee in seen, keen> etc. It
should be noticed that vowels can be lengthened indefi-
nitely in pronunciation, the only question being the
amount of breath one has at one's disposal.
When the column of air from the lungs, as it ap-
proaches the outer air, is (a) completely stopped, or (b)
completely stopped at one point but allowed to escape
at another, the sound produced is a consonant. In the
first case, when the column of air is completely stopped,
the consonant produced is called a stop consonant or
explosive, both names being descriptive of the method
of formation of these sounds. Examples of stop or ex-
plosive consonants are #, 6, d, &, p, t. Stop consonants,
since they are produced by a sudden and momentary
explosion of the breath, cannot be lengthened.
In the second case, when the column of air is only
partly stopped in its escape to the outer air, the conso-
nant produced is called a continuant consonant. Contin-
uants are of various kinds, caused by the interference of
different parts of the speech organs. They consist (1) of
spirants, caused by the interference of the teeth and lips
with the column of air; spirants may be voiced, as, for
example, v in vat ; 8 (z) in phrase ; th in father ; or
voiceless, like / in fat ; c (s) in place ; th in thin ; (2)
of liquids or linguals, caused by the interference of the
tongue with the column of air, as, for example, I and r;
(3) of nasals, caused by the complete obstruction of the
exit through the mouth, causing thus all the air to pass
through the nose; the examples are m and n; (4) of
ENGLISH SOUNDS 109
labials, caused by the interference of the lips, as in w. The
continuants, like the vowels, may all be continued in-
definitely in pronunciation as long as the breath holds out.
5. Classification of Consonants. Beside the clas-
sification of consonants as voiced and voiceless, stop or
continuant, consonants are further classified and named
according to the part of the mouth or nasal passage
which is chiefly concerned in their production. Thus
we have
(a) Labials or lip consonants. These may be either bi-
labials, e. g., 6, p, m, w, in which both lips are instrumental
in forming the respective sounds ; or labio-dentals, e. g., /, v,
in which lips and teeth are the main obstructions.
(6) Alveolar, or tongue and gum sounds. Examples are
d, t, z, s. These sounds are formed by pressing the tip of the
tongue against the gums just back of the upper front teeth.
They are sometimes wrongly called dental consonants, on the
supposition that the tongue in forming them is placed against
the upper front teeth ; this, however, is not the case in the
normal English formation of these sounds, tho the French
t is a real dental, the tongue being pressed hard against the
upper teeth in the pronunciation of it.
(c) Dental, or tooth and tongue consonants. In the
formation of this sound, found in English only in th as in
thine or father, the tip of the tongue is pressed against the
roots of the upper front teeth.
(d) Palatals, or tongue and palate consonants. These
consonants are usually grouped in two classes: (1) those
formed by the tongue and hard palate, called front palatals,
as, for example, g in give; k in keen; ch in chin; dg in
ridge ; sh in sheen ; z (spelled s or z) in azure, pleasure ; (2)
those formed by the tongue and the back or soft palate,
called back palatals, or gutturals, or velars, as in g in gone ;
Jc (written c) in cough, cold. Note carefully the difference
110
MODERN ENGLISH
between the initial consonants in keen and cold ; geese and
gold.
(e) Lingual, or tongue consonants, in which the tongue is
chiefly instrumental in forming the sounds, as in /, r. There
are various kinds of I and r in English, but I is usually alveo-
lar-lingual, that is, the tongue is placed against the upper
gums, and r is usually hard palate-lingual.
(/) Nasal or nose consonants, in the formation of which
the nose and lips, or the nose and some other part of the
mouth, are instrumental. Nasal consonants may be classified
as (1) bilabial, as ra in man; (2) alveolar, as n in near ;
(3) front palatal, as ng in king (observe that ng is pronounced
as a single nasal consonant, not two consonants, n and g) ;
(4) back palatal or guttural, as ng in long (again pronounced
as a single consonant).
In fully describing and naming a consonant, there-
fore, it will be observed tbat there are three things to
be noticed, first, whether it is a voiced or voiceless con-
sonant ; second, whether it is a stop or continuant; and,
third, what parts of the vocal organs are chiefly instru-
mental in its formation. The following table gives a
list of the most important English consonants from
these three points of view:
Bila-
bial.
Labio-
dental.
Dental.
Alveo-
lar.
Front
palatal.
Back
palatal.
Lingual.
Nasal.
Stops./
Voiced
Voice-
leas
b
P
...
...
d
t
g(asin
geete)
k (as in
keen)
g (as in
gold)
k (c) (as
in cold)
...
• t •
dg(asin
•
Voiced
...
T
th(asin
father)
z (as in
please)
ridge)
z (as in
...
Con-
azure)
tinu- -
ants.
Voice-
th(as
shfasin
sheen)
less
in thin)
ch (as
in chin)
ENGLISH SOUNDS 111
6. Classification of Vowels. The vowels lend them-
selves less readily to description and classification than
the consonants, because the positions and movements of
the organs of voice in the production of vowels are less
easily observed and stated than they are in the produc-
tion of consonants. Somewhat loosely, vowels are often
spoken of as (a) front palatal vowels, in which the
voiced sound is modified by narrowing the passage of
the mouth by means of raising the tongue towards the
hard palate, and (b) back palatal or guttural vowels,
formed further back in the mouth, by the tongue and
the soft palate. Front palatal vowels are a (in man) ;
e (in let) ; a (in hate) ; ey (in they) ; ay (in say) ; i (in
kin) ; i (in machine) ; ee (in seen). Back palatal or
guttural vowels are oo (in food) ; oo (in wood, good) ;
o (in bone)] o (in not); i (in mine); a (in father); a (in
fall). A loose distinction often made is that between
close and open vowels, the tongue in the close vowel
being raised further toward the roof of the mouth than
in the open vowel. Thus the vowel o is said to be close
in note, but open in not; the vowel e is said to be
close in the borrowed word fSte (or in the case of the
same sound with different spelling, in the native words
mate, late, etc.), but open in the word men. The mechan-
ical device of placing the cedilla beneath the vowel to
indicate the open quality is sometimes used, as in 9, 9.
The classification of vowels as close and open is not a
good one, however, since o and o, e and e, are, so far as
sound goes, which is the essential matter, really two
quite different vowels, tho written alike, and each,
in an exact system, should have its distinctive name.
Another distinction which is often loosely and incor-
112 MODERN ENGLISH
rectly made is that between long and short vowels.
The vowel o of not is said to be the short vowel, the
long of which is exemplified in note ; so also the vowel
of met is said to be the short e sound, the vowel of they,
the long e sound. But an examination of these sounds
will show that o of not is not merely the o of note short-
ened, nor is e of met merely the shortened sound of the
vowel of they. The difference is not merely that of
length, but also of quality; and we have to do with
two entirely separate and different vowel sounds in each
case. In using the terminology long and short, care
should be taken that the vowels so described are really
of the same kind. Thus the first vowel of the word
motive is the short sound of the vowel in note, the two
sounds differing only in the degree to which they are
prolonged, and the long vowel sound of fate is short
in the first syllable of the compound pay-roll.
A real distinction which should be observed is that
between simple vowels and diphthongs. A simple vowel,
as its name indicates, is one which consists of only one
vowel sound; a diphthong is a double sound which
begins with one vowel quality and shades off at the end
into another. The vowels of note, of fate, of food are
all simple vowels; but the vowel of house, now, slough
is a double sound, starting with the sound of a in father,
and ending with the sound of u, giving the combination
au (so spelled in German haus, laut, etc.). The other
English diphthongs are the vowel of try, buy, ride, com-
posed of a + i, equivalent therefore to ai, and the
diphthong o + i, that is oi, as exemplified in boil, boy,
coin. It should be noted that simple vowels are some-
times written with two letters, as, for example, the
ENGLISH SOUNDS 113
simple vowel in great, pair, lead, pay, tho(uglt), and
many others ; and, on the other hand, that diphthongs
are often written with one letter, as in ride, try, etc.
One should observe always, therefore, the sound and
not the spelling in determining whether a vowel is a
diphthong or not.
7. Alphabet and Sounds. The symbols or letters
of which our alphabet is composed are, it is obvious,
quite conventional and arbitrary. There is no inherent
reason why the symbol T, with its variant forms t and £$»
or the symbol D, with its other forms d and jQ,, should
stand each for its own sound. So far as the appropriate-
ness of the symbols to the sounds goes, they might be
interchanged without loss. Originally alphabetic sym-
bols may have had some peculiar appropriateness to the
sounds which they represented, either as a sort of " visible
speech," indicating the position of the vocal organs by
the shape of the symbol, or as "picture writing," like the
hieroglyphics of the Egyptians, indicating objects which
bore definite relations to the various sounds. The
English alphabet, however, has long since passed out of
any such stage of development, and is now a set of in-
trinsically meaningless symbols to which specific values
are arbitrarily attached.
It is also obvious that the number of sounds used in
speaking the English language is greater than the
number of symbols available for representing sounds.
A conservative estimate would make the number of
clearly distinguishable different English sounds about
forty ; the number of symbols in the alphabet is twenty-
six. The language, therefore, has not at its command a
sufficient number of characters to represent all its sounds,
8
114 MODERN ENGLISH
and is driven consequently to use the same symbol for
different sounds, as, for example, the vowel a in the
words hat, hate, path, bare, ball, about. The conven-
tional symbols of the alphabet, it is thus seen, may vary
as to their significance within certain pretty wide limits.
If we turn now to the sounds of the language them-
selves, we shall find them in many ways very imperfectly
and inconsistently represented. Thus we may have a
simple sound represented by two symbols, as the vowel
ea of seat, or the consonant th of thing. Or the same
sound may be represented by several different symbols
or groups of symbols, as, for example, the sound of s (<?)
in race and erase ; or of k in call, king, quell, shock, box ;
or the vowel sound which appears in the words late, pay,
great, fail, veil, they, fete. Or the same group of letters
may represent such various values as ough in lough,
through, thought, cough, hiccough, enough. Letters are
frequently used, also, without any value, the so-called
silent letters, like the e of bare, the c of scissors, the k of
knife, the s of island, aisle, the w of write, the g of
foreign, sovereign.
If these facts are held in mind, we shall be understood
when we say that English is not a phonetic language.
It is of course true that our alphabet does represent for
us the sounds of the language ; but it represents these
sounds in an imperfect and inconsistent way. A per-
fectly phonetic language would be one in which every
sound had its appropriate symbol, and no symbol more
than its single value. Needless to say, neither the
English language nor any other language ever in prac-
tical use has been thus perfectly phonetic. Languages
vary in the degree of consistency and completeness with
ENGLISH SOUNDS 115
which they endeavor to represent their sounds, and the
earlier periods of English were much more sensitive in
this respect than modern English is. Of the modern
European languages, Italian is the most phonetic, French
and G erman coming between English and Italian at the
two extremes. But even Italian is not completely pho-
netic, and all we can say of the existing languages is
that one is more phonetic than another. For the prac-
tical uses to which language is usually put, the carrying
of a complete and exact system of sound representation
would be an unnecessary burden. It is not important
that every minute difference of sound should have its
own particular symbol, since the language would be made
no more intelligible thereby. Practical utility, however,
demands that a language be phonetic to a certain degree,
and without question it is a grave defect in the English
language that the gap between its written and printed
symbols, that is its spelling, and the actual sounds of the
words of the language, is so great. Indeed the values of
the letters of our ordinary alphabet are so various and
uncertain, that it becomes necessary to settle beforehand
upon some scheme of sound representation before it is
possible to discuss matters which have to do with sound
changes, pronunciation, and spelling.1
8. A Phonetic Alphabet. The purposes for which
a phonetic alphabet may be devised are various. The
1 English has an adverb too, a preposition to, and a numeral two.
What shall we say in writing, that there are three loo's, or three to's, or
three two's, in English? In fact there is of course only one of each. The
idea we want to express is that there is a single phonetic word-form which
has three logical values ; but to express this unequivocally, we need to be
able to express the phonetic form of the words merely as sound, not as
one word or the other.
116 MODERN ENGLISH
scientific student of phonetics may elaborate some
scheme whereby the minutest shades of difference in
the quality and stress of sounds shall be indicated ; such
a system would be almost phonographic in its exactness.
Or the " phonetic reformer " may invent a " practical "
alphabet which he would have take the place of our
present alphabet in daily printing and writing. The
ideal of the scientific student is beyond our present
purpose ; and the vain hope of the phonetic reformer we
may set aside as belonging to the group of those vision-
ary projects, the realization of which is neither possible
nor desirable. But the modest needs of the every-day
student of language demand also some system of pho-
netic representation, one that is simple and intelligible,
and at the same time capable of recording the essential
characteristics of English sounds. It will be understood
that the alphabet which is here presented is for this
purpose ; it is intended merely as an aid in the discussion
of pronunciation, of spelling, and of sounds in general.1
The alphabet makes use, so far as possible, of the ordi-
nary letters of our English alphabet. Long vowels are
indicated by the circumflex (A). No sound has more
than one symbol, and no symbol has more than one
value. The number of sounds, and consequently the
number of symbols, is forty-five, eighteen being simple
vowels, four being diphthongs, and twenty-three being
consonant sounds. Arranged in alphabetic order, they
are as follows :
l The alphabet is a slightly modified form of that recommended in the
Report of a Joint Committee representing the American Philological Associa-
tion, and the Modern Language Association of America, on the Subject of a
Phonetic English Alphabet. New York, 1904.
ENGLISH SOUNDS
LBTTM. KKY-WOBDS.
a ..... (a)rt, p(a)rt, h(ea)rt, f(a)ther,
c(a)lm.
a ..... (a)rtistic, h(o)t, r(o)ck, n(o)t.
se ..... b(a)re, h(ei)r, st(ai)r.
se ..... h(a)t, m(a)tter, h(a)s.
d ..... (a)sk, p(a)th.
b ..... (b)e.
d ..... (d)o.
e ..... m(a)te, th(ey), s(ay).
e ..... m(e)t1
f ..... (f)ee.
g ..... (g)o-
h ..... (h)e.
i ..... mar(i)ne, s(ee).
e(=tj) ..... (ch)ew.
k ..... (k)in.
1 ..... (l)et.
m ..... (m)et.
n ..... (n)et.
e ..... f(a)ll.
e ..... (au)tuinnaL
6 ..... n(o)te.
0 ..... d(o)nation.
P ..... (P)it.
r ..... (r)at.
s ..... (s)et.
1 ..... (sh)ip.
t ..... (t)en.
i For practical purposes it has not been deemed necessary to make here
the distinction between close and open e, noted above. The same ap-
plies to i and u.
118 MODERN ENGLISH
LETTER. KIY-WOBDO.
5 ..... (th)at.
ti ..... m(oo)d.
u ..... p(u)sh.
u ..... h(u)t.
o ..... (a)bout.
v ..... (v)at
w ..... (w)in.
y ..... (y)es.
z ..... (z)est.
3 ..... a(z)ure, plea(s)ure, lei(s)ure.
ai ..... r(i)de, s(i)gh, (ey)e, b(uy).
au ..... h(ou)se.
ei ..... b(oi)l.
iu ..... t(u)be.
The use of most of these symbols is self-explanatory,
over half being exactly as one would most readily in-
fer from their use in the Modern English alphabet. Of
the others, however, a few words of explanation are
needed. In the first place, it should be noted that the
symbols £, §, i, 6, u have what is known as their conti-
nental values, that is, the values which they have in all
the European languages except English, and which in
the earlier periods of English they had also in that
language. The vowel a has, therefore, the value of the
vowel in father, e that of the vowel oifate, i that of the
second vowel of machine, 6 that of note, and u that of
food. The five different sounds with which the alphabet
opens seem a bit confusing at first. But &, as in at, is
our familiar sound, found in numberless words like cat,
fat, that, immaculate, infatuate, etc. The long value of
this sound appears in words like air, there, lair,
ENGLISH SOUNDS 119
pear, etc. The value of & is the broad sound which
appears in father, palm, calm, retard, and a is its cor-
responding short sound. The vowel intended by the
symbol d is a transition vowel between & in father and ge
in bare. It is pronounced by many Americans in words
like path, bath, grass, master, France, glance, raft, laugh,
calf, that is, in words in which the vowel comes before
a voiceless continuant, /, s, th, or a nasal followed by a
voiceless continuant. In some communities, however,
the vowel in these words is pronounced flat, like ge, and
in others it is pronounced very broad, like £ (see § 11
for a further discussion of this sound).
The symbol rj represents a nasalized g, as in sing, thing.
It is a simple sound, altho it is written, in our conven-
tional spelling, with the two letters ng ; if these two
letters were actually pronounced, however, we should
have a word of the phonetic form sin-g9, thin-g9. In
a word like finger, which is pronounced fing-ger, not
fin-ger, we have a nasalized g (that is, rj) followed by
the regular g. The different sounds here described
should be practiced until the distinctions are perfectly
clear.
The symbol £ is invented to express the continuant
consonant usually represented by ch in the regular
alphabet. A phonetic alphabet should have its symbols
consist of but single letters, and it was necessary there-
fore to invent one for the purpose of representing this
sound. The four sounds of o are easily distinguish-
able. Other examples of e are awe, awful, aught, ought
all, lord, form, storm, dog, cloth. The corresponding
short sound 0 does not occur frequently; examples are
the first syllable of audacious, autocratic, auditor. The d
120 MODERN ENGLISH
of note, boat, vote, loan, snow, hoe, tho(ugh), toll, etc., is a
very common sound ; the corresponding short sound, o, is
usually found in dissyllables or polysyllables ; examples
are the first syllable of poetic, bohemian, rotation, co-
operate, also the second syllable of window, furlough,
borrow. The continuant usually represented by sh in the
regular alphabet has again to have a new symbol, J.
The symbols J? and 8, borrowed from the Old English
alphabet, represent respectively the voiceless dental con-
tinuant, as in thin, thick, thing, thought, etc., and the
voiced dental continuant, as in thee, those, their, etc.
The two sounds represented by u and 8 are similar, but
should be distinguished. The sound u occurs only in
stressed syllables, as in up, but, puff, love, above, dull,
courage. The sound a, known as " weak e" is an interest-
ing sound of wide occurrence. It is what might be called
the indifferent or obscure vowel, and is the sound which
all other vowels tend to become when they are not pro-
nounced clearly and distinctly. Vowels are especially
liable to become a when they are not supported by the
stress. Thus the article the is rarely pronounced fully,
as 5£, unless for some special reason it is strongly
stressed ; usually it is pronounced Sa, as in the sentence
I saw the president yesterday. But other words in this sen-
tence are likewise slightly stressed, and when the sen-
tence is somewhat rapidly spoken, the vowel JT, the
second and third vowel of president, and the second
vowel of yesterday, all tend to become this obscure vowel.
The phonetic transcription of this sentence, therefore, as
it would be spoken in ordinary colloquial English, is as
follows : a se 3a Prezadant yestarde*.
For the purpose of further study of the alphabet and
ENGLISH SOUNDS 121
practice in using it, a part of Lincoln's Gettysburg
Address is here given with its phonetic transcription : l
" Four score and seven years ago our fathers brought forth
on this continent a new nation, conceived in liberty and
dedicated to the proposition that all men are created equal.
Now we are engaged in a great civil war, testing whether
that nation, so conceived and so dedicated, can long endure.
We are met on a great battle-field of that war. We have
come to dedicate a portion of that field as a final resting-
place for those who gave their lives that that nation might
live. It is altogether fitting and proper that we should do
this."
fer skor and sevan yirz ago aur faSarz bret fer)> en Sis
kentinent a niu nefan, kansivd in libarti and dediketid tu
$a prepazijan Sat el men ar krietid ikwal. nau wi ar ingejd
in a gret sivil wer, testirj hweftar Saet nejan, so kansivd send
so dediketid, kaen lerj endiur. wi ar met en a gret baetal-fild
av Sset wer. wi haev kum tu dediket a per Jan av fleet fild
aez a fainal restirj-ples fer $6z hu hir gSv Sser laivz flat Saet
nejan mait liv. it iz eltugeftar fitirj and prepar Sat wi Jud
du Sis.
To one unfamiliar with it, a phonetic transcription
such as the above seems funny at first, and of course a
good deal of the humor of dialect stories and poems
consists in an attempted phonetic, or partially phonetic,
transcription of actual speech. This humorous effect is
due largely to the novelty of the new forms, which in-
trinsically are obviously no more humorous than the
symbols of the regular alphabet. That which is novel
seems funny, especially when we already have a habit of
mind established by a different custom. Thus a style
1 Report of a Joint Committee, p. 39.
122 MODERN ENGLISH
of hat two or three years old would excite laughter,
altho it may differ comparatively little from the con-
temporary style, in its own time may have been the
height of the fashion, and in another year or two may
again become the correct or conventional style. Com-
pare also the common inclination of the uneducated
and untraveled to regard all customs and habits which
differ from their own as ridiculous.
9. Sound Changes. Sounds are the least stable ele-
ment in language. The words themselves, the order of
the words, the written or printed forms, all these, tho
they are subject to constant change, are relatively fixed
and permanent as compared with sounds. The most
sensitive part of language, sounds respond delicately to
the slightest and most evanescent influences. It is
probable that if complete phonographic records could be
taken of the speech of an individual, it would be found
that no phrase or sentence phonetically ever exactly re-
peated itself. We may compare the sound -material of
the language to a restless, ever-fluctuating ocean, always
in its essentials the same, but never two moments the
same in the forms assumed by the elements of which it
is composed. It is of the nature of sound, which is the
mere passing breath of a moment, that it should be
difficult to hold or fix sharply in the memory; and it is
only by constant practice and use that we are able to
keep the sounds of our language even approximately the
same. For, with all our effort, we do not succeed in
preventing many changes. Day by day, minute by
minute, shif tings of our sounds are taking place, and
tho most of these are too minute to attract attention
at the time, in the course of years, of a generation or two,
ENGLISH SOUNDS 123
they result in the substitution of altogether new sounds
for the old ones. Just as the light of day at two suc-
cessive moments appears to be the same, but is not, since
it is by the accumulation of momentary changes that the
great result of day and night is obtained, so our speech,
which at a given moment we think we hold firmly in
our grasp, is constantly slipping away and assuming
new forms.
So far as human observation goes, it is difficult to see
that anything is gained by the constant series of changes
which are affecting the phonetic side of language. No
process of beneficent evolution, or the contrary, has
been at work in the vast majority of the changes in
English sound, no principles of development reveal
themselves. In this respect language differs from its
history on the side of its inflections and vocabulary.
The changes in the English inflectional system have re-
sulted in a greater simplicity and efficiency in the struc-
ture of the English language ; and the development of
the vocabulary has made the language richer and more
variously expressive. But sound changes appear to
have taken place largely without any end in view, merely
because it is the nature of sound to be impermanent and
variable.
Many of the changes which take place in language
sounds are so slight and of such momentary importance
that they never demand consideration. It is not essen-
tial to intelligibility that the sounds of language should
always conform to what we may regard as the perfect
types of the sounds. We allow a considerable latitude in
the speech of individuals, for we understand when words
are only approximately correctly pronounced. There is?
124 MODERN ENGLISH
therefore, a large area of negligible variation in the
sounds of speech. When a sound change, however, is
persistent, so that it affects the language in general,
or the particular language of a community, it then
becomes matter worthy of observation, and, so far as
is possible, of scientific generalization. Generaliza-
tion of this sort, based on the observation of sound
changes which have proceeded in a regular fashion,
are known as phonetic laws. It should be clearly un-
derstood, however, that phonetic laws are laws only
in the sense that they state what takes place, not that
they imply a lawgiver who makes a law which they
must follow. Like the laws of physics, the law that
night succeeds day, or that water when frozen expands,
the laws of sounds are based entirely upon experiment
and observation.
Sound laws are therefore general habits or customs,
and a discussion of why sound laws should arise would
be a discussion of why and how general habits and cus-
toms are formed. Imitation is undoubtedly the most
powerful single factor in bringing about uniformity in
the use of language, therefore the most powerful single
factor in the formation of linguistic laws. This applies
not only to sounds but to all other aspects of language.
This imitation may be conscious or unconscious, tho
it is usually the latter. Children, for example, imitate
the sounds and the words which they habitually hear,
without giving any thought to the matter. They accept
blindly the authority of their elders, and it is only adult
people, who have learned to observe their speech and to
reason about it, who become aware of the changes that
are taking place. But even among adults the conscious
ENGLISH SOUNDS 125
attitude of mind towards language is relatively rare.
They also usually form their habits in language by an
unconscious adaptation to the familiar use about them.
It is obvious that no discredit attaches to imitation of
the kind we are describing. Every one must be imita-
tive to a very large extent in his use of speech, because
speech is a common social possession and not the right
of any one individual. There could be no worse kind of
speech than one which was altogether original, altogether
different from the speech of others, because such speech
would be unintelligible.
Many sound changes are due in their origins to or-
ganic causes, such as the modification of the physical
organs of sound-production. Thus it is a general and
obvious principle that a syllable which bears a heavy
stress is likely to be pronounced more sharply and dis-
tinctly than it would be if it bore only a light stress.
Or the rapidity with which one speaks will usually be
observed to affect very markedly the clearness and dis-
tinctness of the sounds. Changes which are due to such
natural tendencies as these affect the people altogether ;
they tend to become general, therefore, without imita-
tion, because the same natural law operates upon all
equally. It will be necessary now to examine the changes
in sounds more fully from these two points of view, the
imitative and the organic tendencies towards change in
the sounds of speech.
10. Imitative Sound Changes. It is only when we
look back over the history of English sounds and observe
them in a long perspective that we can see the results of
imitative sound laws on a large scale. When we com-
pare the system of sounds used in Old English, however.
126 MODERN ENGLISH
with that used in Modern English, we see that there has
been an almost complete displacement. This is especially
true of the vowels, which are always much less stable
than the consonants, our Modern English consonants
differing on the whole but little from their use fifteen
hundred years ago. The vowels, however, have under-
gone great changes. Words which in Old English, for
example, had the vowel a, by the Middle English period
had changed this vowel to 6, and Modern English has
gone a step further and changed the Middle English 6
into 6\ Thus Old English stan (stan), became Middle
English ston (sten), and Modern English stone (st6n).
Following the same phonetic law, Old English ban (ban)
became Middle English Ion (be"n), Modern English bone
(bon) ; Old English bat (bat) became Middle English lot
(bet), Modern English boat (b6t). Other instances of the
operation of the same rule, or law, are the following :
OLD ENGLISH. MIDDLI ENGLISH. MODERN ENGLISH.
gan (gan) gon (g©n) go (g6)
wrat (wrat)1 rvrot (wret) wrote (r6t)
Jam (fam) fom (fern) foam (fom)
blawan (blawan) blowen (blewen) blow (bio)
papa (papa) pope (p©pa) pope (p6p)
wa (wa) wo (w0) woe (wo)
Other vowels have changed just as completely. Thus
Old English 6, omitting the transition stages, has become
regularly u in Modern English, as illustrated by the fol-
lowing examples :
1 The w in wr, as well as the h in hi, hr, were all pronounced in the OW
English period.
ENGLISH SOUNDS 127
OLD ENGLISH. MODBEN ENGLISH.
mod (mod) mood (mud)
bloma (bloma) bloom (blum)
col (kol) cool (kul)
don (don) do (dft)
hrof (hrof) roof (ruf)
scok (skoh) ^oe (Jii)
To complete the list of the long vowels, Old English
§ has become the Modern English i; Old English i
has become the Modem English diphthong ai ; and Old
English u has become the Modern English diphthong au.
These three groups of changes are illustrated by the
following words:
OLD ENSLISH. MoDimx EHOLIIB.
cen (k§n) keen (kin)
seon (s§on) see (si)
med (m§d) meed (mid)
slepan (slepan) sleep (slip)
pipe (pipe) pipe (paip)
hwit (hwit) white (hwait)
tvid (wid) wide (waid)
is (is) ice (ais)
hus (bus) house (haus)
mu\ (mup) mouth (maup)
hlud (hlftd) loud (laud)
bru (bru) brow (brau)
If we should continue our examination of the other
vowels and diphthongs, short and long, of the Old Eng-
lish period, we should find that nearly every one of them
had shifted greatly from its original form, that the origi-
nal form had become lost, and that through imitation a
128 MODERN ENGLISH
new form had become general and regular. Just who it
was who started each specific change, and for what rea-
son, it is impossible to say. It is not probable that at
any period one could put his hand on a definite individ-
ual, or group of individuals, and say that this person or
that was responsible for a specific change. The changes
advanced undoubtedly by minute degrees, and the man
of the Old English or the Middle English period was at
no time conscious that -his speech was changing to such
an extent that a few hundred years later it would seem
to his descendants almost entirely a different language
from their own. There is no reason to believe that our
own speech to-day is much more stable than was that of
the Old English period. Unconsciously to ourselves we
are being drifted here and there on those currents of
speech-sounds which our descendants two or three hun-
dred years hence will be able to trace through their
curves and meanderings, and thus to formulate and gen-
eralize into phonetic laws, as now we formulate the
changes in the speech of our Old English ancestors. In
some few instances, however, we can trace changes and
tendencies in our contemporary speech, and these deserve
a few words of special consideration. Before passing on
to the consideration of contemporary imitative sound
changes, it may be interesting to examine a passage of
Old English and the same passage in Middle English in
their respective phonetic forms, and to compare these
earlier sounds of the language with those of Modern
English. For this purpose we may choose a passage
from the New Testament, giving it first in an Old Eng-
lish version, made before the year 1000, accompanied by
a literal translation and a phonetic transcription, and
ENGLISH SOUNDS
129
then the same passage in Wycliffe's version, made in the
last quarter of the fourteenth century. The Old Eng-
lish version is as follows :
Da hi aet ham waeron, he
ahsode hi: "Hwaet sm6ade g§
be wege ? "
Ond hi suwodon. Witod-
llce hi on wege sme"adon
hwylc hyra yldost waere.
pa he saet, he clypode hi
twelfe ond saede him: "Gif
eower hwylc wyle beon fyr-
mest, beo se eaftmodust ond
eower ealra pen."
pa nam he anne cnapan
ond gesette on hyra middele.
pa he hine beclypte, he salde
him :
"Swa hwylc swa anne of
pus geradum cnapum on mi-
num naman onfehS, se onfehS
me. And se pe me onfehS,
he ne onfehS me, ac pone pe
me sende."1 — Mark ix, 33-37.
pa hi aet hsim waeron, h§
aksode hi: "hwaet smaaade
ye be weye ? "
Ond hi suwodon. Witod-
like hi en weye smaaadon
hwilk hira ildost w£re.
pa he saet, he klipode hi
twelve ond s£de him : " Yif
^ower hwilk wile be"on fir-
mest, beo s§ s^aSmodust end
eower fealra }>e*n."
pa nam h§ ^nne knapan
end yes6tte en hira middele.
pa h§ hine bekli'pte, b§ saade
him:
uSwa hwilk sw§, anne ef
pus yera'dum knapum en mi-
num naman enfe'hp, se en-
feyhp m8. 6nd se 5e me
onf§'hp, h§ ne enf^rhp m§,
ak pone Se m§ sende."2
1 From Skeat, The Holy Gospels in Anglo-Saxon, Northumbrian and Old
Mercian Versions, Cambridge, 1871-1887. Literally translated this goes as
follows : " When they at home were, he asked them : ' What considered
ye by the way ? ' And they were silent (suwodon). Verily they on the
way considered which of them eldest (i. e., most honorable) was. When
he sat, he called them twelve and said to them : ' If of you any will be
foremost, be he humblest and of you all servant.' Then he took a boy and
set him (the pronoun is not expressed) in their midst. When he embraced
him, he said to them : ' Whosoever one of such boys (of pus geradum
cnapum) in my name receives, he receives me. And he who receives me,
he receives not me, but him who sent me.'"
2 The stress is always on the first syllable of diisyllabic and polysyllabic
words, unless otherwise indicated.
9
130
MODERN ENGLISH
The same passage from the Wycliffe Bible is as fol-
lows:
And whanne thei weren in
the hous, he axide hem :
uWhat tretiden ye in the
weie?"
And thei weren stille. For
thei disputiden among hem in
the weie, who of hem schulde
be grettest.
And he sat, and clepide
the twelue, and seide to hem:
"If ony man wole be the
firste among you, he schal be
the laste of alle, and the
mynyster of alle.
And he took a child, and
sette hym in the myddil of
hem. And whanne he hadde
biclippid hym, he seide to
hem,
Who euer resseyueth oon
of such children in my name,
he resseyueth me. And who
euer resseyueth me, he res-
seyueth not me aloone, but
hym that sente me.1
It may be of interest to add the same passage in the
King James version :
33 And being in the houfe, he afked them, What was it
that yee difputed among your selues by the way.
1 From The New Testament in English according to the Version by John
Wycliffe about A. D. 1380 and revised by John Purvey about A. D. 1388.
Ed. Forshall aud Madden, Oxford, 1879.
and hwana 8e weran in Sa
hus, he aksida hem : " hwat
tretidan ye in "Sa weya ? "
and Se weran stila. For S3
disputidan amer) hem in Sa
weya,, hwe ef hem Julda bd
gretast.
and he sat, and kle*pida Sa
twelva, and s§da to hem : if
eni man wela be Sa firsta amerj
iu, he Jal be Sa lasta ef alia,
and (5a ministar ef alia.
and h§ tok a cild, and seta
hi ui in Sa midil ef hem. and
hwana he hada biklipid him,
h§ seda to hem,
hwe evar res^vap en ef
sue eildran in mi nama, h6 re-
sevap me. and hwe evar re-
s§vep me, he reseva)? net me
alone, but him Sat senta me.
ENGLISH SOUNDS 131
34 But they held their peace, For by the way they had
difputed among themselues who should be the greateft.
35 And he fate downe, and called the twelue and faith
unto them, If any man defire to be firft, the fame fhall be
laft of all, and feruant of all.
36 And he tooke a child, and fet him in the midft of
them ; & when he had taken him in his arms, he faid unto
them,
37 Whofoeuer fhall receiue one of fuch children in my
Name, receiueth me ; and whof oeuer fhall receiue me, receiu-
eth not me, but him that fent me.1
11. Contemporary Imitative Sound Changes.
One of the most frequently discussed instances of con-
temporary sound change is that which centers about the
pronunciation of certain words containing the vowel ae
or &. Without attempting to follow tbe history of these
sounds through the whole course of their development,
we shall merely point out the fact that they have been
constantly changing, that the word path was pronounced
p&p by one generation, pSJ? by another, and pdp by still
another. Generally, the feeling which determined the
use of one sound or the other seems to have been that
the particular sound chosen was more " refined " than
the others ; and it is a curious fact that each of the three
sounds has at different times been elevated to this posi-
tion of eminence. Thus in the first quarter of the nine-
teenth century, in London the pronunciation of the
vowel of words like path, past, ask, glass, bath, dance,
etc., as ge, like the vowel of hat, cat, etc., lengthened,
1 The Holy Bible, London, 1611. 1st ed. of the King James Version.
The pronunciation is approximately the same as that of Modern English.
Notice the large number of silent letters as compared with the Middle
English and the Old English pronunciation.
132 MODERN ENGLISH
was regarded as elegant, and, of course, by those to
whom it was strange, as affected. This is well illustrated
by Leigh Hunt's description of a night watchman, who
was affecting the speech of his betters. "Of varieties
among watchmen," says Hunt, l u we remember several.
One was a dandy watchman who used to ply at the top
of Oxford Street, next the park. He had a mincing way
with it, pronouncing the a in the word past as it is in
hat, making a little preparatory hem before he spoke,
and then bringing out his ' past ten9 in a style of genteel
indifference."
A few years later, the elegant pronunciation of this
sound in this country became established as &, that is, the
broad sound of a in father. This was undoubtedly due,
in the main, to the influence of the speech of New Eng-
land, particularly Boston, which, owing to its literary
position during the lifetime of Longfellow, Emerson,
Hawthorne, Lowell, and the other great figures of the
first flowering period of American literature, was often
regarded as the seat of culture in America. From
Boston, where it was a normal and usual pronunciation,
the broad sound a passed over by imitation to the speech
of other communities. Thus Richard Grant White, 2 a
native of New York and the arbiter of taste in his day,
goes so far as to say that "The full, free, unconscious
utterance of the broad ah sound of a is the surest indica-
tion, in speech, of social culture which began at the
cradle." To a certain extent the educated American
public seemed to agree with this astonishing dictum ;
conscientious speakers, if they did not have it naturally,
1 Walks Home by Night. The Companion, Feb. 6, 1828.
* Words and Their Uses, Chapter III, p. 50 (New York, 1898).
ENGLISH SOUNDS 183
tried to cultivate this broad ah sound which was to be
the test of social culture, and it was, and still is, to some
extent, taught in schools as the only correct and elegant
pronunciation. But the public was not prepared to go
the whole way, and instead of the full, broad & as in
father, it has now shown a tendency to compromise on a
vowel between se of hat lengthened, and & of father, a
vowel for which we use the symbol d. This vowel, which
has been well described as a" refined transition " between
£ and se, is the one which is now, or is tending to become,
the natural and normal use of certain communities in
America, chiefly in the East, in words like path, past,
glass, master, dance, glance, plant, answer, etc., and
which is largely imitated by speakers in communities in
which the natural and native pronunciation of the vowel
in these words is 5*3. Whether the vowel d will ever
become natural and general all over the country, or
whether the pendulum will swing back and 26 or &
become the refined and imitated pronunciations again,
only he can foretell who knows how to predict the
whims and vagaries of fashion.
The question is often asked, Which of these three pro-
nunciations is the " correct " one, pee]?, or p£p, or pdp ?
Since the very broad pronunciation of £ is rarely heard
now or advocated, in any community, we may eliminate
it and reduce the choice to one between p&J? and pdp.
If the preceding discussion has been followed and
understood, it will be apparent that it is not necessary
to choose between the two pronunciations, that one is
not correct to the exclusion of the other, but that both
may be equally correct. A phonetic rule or law, it will
be remembered, was defined as a generalization based on
134 MODERN ENGLISH
observation of the actual use of the language, apart from
any notion of a lawgiver who establishes this or that as
the law of language. Now if we observe the actual use
or custom of the language, we shall see that some people
or some communities say p&p and others say pop, and
further that the question of good English or bad English,
that is, of correctness, does not enter here, unless we
assume arbitrarily that one must be right and the other
must be wrong. The question, however, is not one of
right and wrong, but merely of two differing customs.
In cases of this sort one's own individual preference and
taste must decide. If some speakers prefer peep and
others pap, the question of the one side giving up in
favor of the other must depend entirely on the weight of
authority which the one is willing to grant to the other.
Each must decide for himself which law or custom he
wishes to follow.
Another vowel sound as to which the question of
imitation, that is, of choice between differing customary
sounds, arises, is the sound of short open o in words like
log, dog, fog, stalk, bog. The usual tendency in America
is to pronounce the vowel of these words as e, i. e., deg,
feg, stek, beg. In some communities, however, and by
some speakers, the words are pronounced with a sound
exactly equivalent to a, as in what, watch, quality, follow-
ing thus the pronunciation of words like not (nat), rock
(rak), hot (hat), cob (kab), stop (stap). Their phonetic
form according to this pronunciation would therefore be
dag, fag, stak, bag. On the other hand, by imitation of
the pronunciation deg, feg, etc., this quality of the
sound passes over into words like not, hot, rock, stop,
which are then pronounced net, hot, rek, step.
ENGLISH SOUNDS 135
Still another group of words may be cited in illustra-
tion, words like roof, root, soot, hoof, hoop, and others.
By some, perhaps most, speakers these words are pro-
nounced with the vowel u, as in mood, tool, moon, goose,
etc., their phonetic form then being ruf, rut, sut, huf,
hup, etc. Other speakers pronounce these words with
an open short u-sound, u, the sound of the vowel in put,
foot, good, hood, stood, and many other words. Accord-
ing to this pronunciation, their phonetic form would be
ruf, rut, sut, huf, hup, etc. What the final outcome will
be in the case of these three pairs of sounds, se and d, e
and a, u and u, depends entirely upon the extent to
which imitation takes place. Perhaps in time all words
containing the a- vowel before a continuant consonant
may come to be pronounced alike, either as se or d ; like-
wise, all words containing the o-vowel may come to be
pronounced as e, not, hot, got, rock, thus becoming net,
het, get, rek, or as a, dog, fog, log, thus becoming dag,
fag, lag; and all words containing the oo- vowel may
settle in the pronunciation u, put, foot, good, stood, be-
coming general as put, fut, gud, stud (a pronunciation
which is now a common one in Scotland), or on the pro-
nunciation u, soot, hoof, root, mood, goose, thus becoming
sut, huf, rut, mud, gus. Or the law of imitation may
not be strong enough to bring about uniformity of
usage in any of the three instances, in which case we
shall continue as we are at present, some speakers using
one sound and some speakers the other. This will
be the most likely state of affairs so long as the different
sounds are felt to be equally correct, that is, so long as
they are all used by speakers who must be grouped with
the class of the educated and refined. If, however, for
136 MODERN ENGLISH
some reason or other, the pronunciation dag, or the pro-
nunciation ruf, should come to be regarded as less ele-
gant than deg and ruf, just as at present there is a strong
tendency to regard the pronunciation pap as more ele-
gant than the pronunciation p&J>, the likelihood is that
dag and ruf would be given up entirely in favor of deg
and ruf. Of the three groups of words, the one conse-
quently concerning which it is safest to prophesy is the
path-glass-ask-dance-group, because the law of imitation
here is given a special direction by reason of the some-
what special favor in which the one sound is held.
A group of words which at present show a tendency
towards sound change, but in which the law of imitation
meets with some restraining opposition, is that consisting
of words like tube, duke, due, Tuesday, new, and others.
Many speakers pronounce these words with the sound of
u, giving thus tub, duk, du, tusde, nu, like true, fruit,
dew, rule, rude (after 1 and r the sound is always u, not
iu), that is tru, friit, du, ml, rud. This pronunciation is
more generally heard in words of more than one syllable,
as induce, produce, duty, etc., than it is in monosyl-
lables. Yet both in monosyllables and in polysyllables
it may be frequently observed, even, it may be pointed
out, in the speech of persons who think they always
pronounce the ifi. sound, as tiub, diuk, diu, tiusde, niu,
prodius, etc. There is, among people who attach much
importance to traditional and dogmatic rules, a strong feel-
ing that the u pronunciation in tub, dftk, etc., is wrong,
or even vulgar. The only right pronunciation, they say,
is tiub, diuk, etc. But is tub "incorrect''? If it is a
widely occurring pronunciation, as our observation at-
tests, then it must be one of the laws or customs of the
ENGLISH SOUNDS 187
language. But if it is a custom of the language, it has
the same kind of authority as tiub, which itself becomes
" correct " only by being a law or custom of speech. Nei-
ther has any other authority than that which it acquires
through the habits or customs of those who speak the
language. The question of choice is again the question
of which group of speakers, that is, which habit or custom,
one wishes to follow. If one observes that the pronun-
ciation tub is the habitual, customary, and unaffected
speech of his linguistic community, one need have no
hesitation in following it. If, on the other hand, accord-
ing to his observation, tub is a pronunciation which is
characteristic of the uneducated speaker and is heard
only from such speakers, his choice is equally easy to
make. The difficulty and the duty, in both instances, is
to make sure that the observations upon which one's
judgments are based are real and not prejudiced, and are
sufficiently extensive to justify a generalization. Above
all they should be derived not from the traditional state-
ments of books, but from direct observation of actual
practice.
A few further stray instances of contemporary sound
changes may be cited as illustrative of the kind of ques-
tions which continually arise for decision. Among old-
fashioned people one often hears the pronunciation of
the word deaf as dif, the usual conventional pronunci-
ation now being def. The pronunciation dif, however,
is historically justifiable, the vowel having the same
origin as the vowel in sheaf (Jif), deep (dip), and believe
(biliv), and formerly it was in good current use among
educated as well as uneducated speakers. Through
some whim or fashion of the moment, which now has
138 MODERN ENGLISH
been forgotten, the pronunciation def managed to creep
in, was generally imitated, and thus has now become
the general, and in that sense the correct, pronunciation.
The pronunciation dif, however, still persists as a sur-
vival in the speech of old-fashioned people, and, since
they are always slower in arriving at imitative inno-
vations than the educated, it persists also in the speech
of the " ignorant " and " uneducated."
There is at present some tendency to discriminate
between the use of rise as a verb and as a noun ; in the
former case the word is pronounced raiz, in the latter,
rais, following the analogy of words like use as noun
(ius) and as verb (iuz); device (divais), devize (divaiz).
This change, however, is not at all general, and is chiefly
in the hands of more or less conscious and affected users
of the language. The same is true of the two pronun-
ciations of either and neither as iSar, niSar, and aiSar,
naiSar. In all communities in America the pronunci-
ation, iSar, nitter, is by far the more general and usual,
the second pronunciation being but rarely natural. The
question of correctness and choice between the two is
again to be decided entirely by one's preference. One
who wishes his customs of speech to be normal and
inconspicuous will generally choose to say iftar, niftar;
one who prefers a slight mannerism of speech, who
affects differences of speech that will distinguish him
from others, is at liberty to choose aiSar, naiSar. The
situation is somewhat similar in the instance of the two
pronunciations of tomato as tom§to and tomato. Both
pronunciations are in good natural use in different sec-
tions of the country, tho the pronunciation tometo is
by far the more common. The second pronunciation,
ENGLISH SOUNDS 139
tomato, becomes an affectation only when it is assumed
by persons whose normal pronunciation is tometo for
the sake of distinguishing their speech from that of
their environment. It is clear that it would be a much
more reasonable and admirable endeavor for a speaker
to strive to adapt his speech always to the use of his
environment than to search out usages in speech that
will set him off and distinguish him as different from
his environment.
12. Dialect. When, through the process of imita-
tion, the speech of a certain community acquires char-
acteristics peculiar to that community, which thus
distinguish the speech of the community from that
of the country at large, or from other sections of the
country, we have a dialect. Dialect characteristics
may affect both the popular and the cultivated speech,
altho they are almost always much more strongly
marked in the speech of the common daily intercourse
of the people than they are in the speech of more
careful and conscious speakers. Almost every com-
munity has its local popular dialect, as, for example,
the Hoosier dialect of Indiana, so skillfully used by
James Whitcomb Riley in his poems ; the New England
dialect, used by Lowell in the Biglow Papers ; the
Virginia dialect, made familiar to all of recent years
through many a story of Southern life. We may speak
also of dialect not from a geographical point of view,
but from a racial and linguistic point of view. When
persons whose native tongue is different from English
settle in an English community, they are likely to develop
a peculiar kind of English, which consists of a mixture
of their own native tongue with English, resulting in
140 MODERN ENGLISH
a speech which is neither standard English nor a foreign
language, but a sort of mixed popular dialect of English.
Thus we have the negro dialect in this country, the
Pennsylvania German dialect, which, however, contains
such a large proportion of German words and is pro-
nounced so much in the German fashion that it might
better be called a dialect of German than of English;
in certain regions which have been largely settled by
Scandinavians, in Minnesota, Iowa, and other places,
there has also grown up a mixed popular Scandinavian
and English dialect. The Irish brogue, or dialect, is
familiar to all; and in cities in which there is a large
Hebrew element, a Hebrew dialect with marked indi-
vidual characteristics has grown up. None of these
dialects, however, either of the local or mixed kind,
tend to spread beyond their own respective communities.
When they are used in literature, it is for the purpose
of giving local color to a situation, or, in character
studies, for the purpose of making the speech of the
character harmonize with his surroundings. The use of
dialect for local color is found as far back as Chaucer,
and is of course very common in later fiction, poetry,
and comedy. The value of comic dialect characters on
the stage has long been known, and they can be found
as far back as Shakspere's Welshman, Scotchman, and
Irishman in Henry V. The comic effect in all such in-
stances arises from the violent contrast between what
is regarded as the standard and correct speech and the
speech of the dialect character, Welshman, Frenchman,
village philosopher, or whoever it may be.
The line marking the separation of the popular and
local dialect from the standard speech of cultivated
ENGLISH SOUNDS 141
persons is not, however, a sharp one. The ascent from
the popular to the standard speech is gradual, and since
every speaker is necessarily a native of some local com-
munity, his speech, especially his daily colloquial speech,
is almost sure to bear some traces of its local origin.
Just to what extent one is willing to allow these native
and local characteristics of speech to remain must be
left to individual choice. Perhaps no well-bred speaker
would be willing to have his speech present such marked
local characteristics that it immediately determined him
as belonging to some special class or community. Such
a manner of speech might fairly be called provincial.
In general, the more formal one's speech is, the less it
should be marked by localisms or provincialisms. The
reason for this is that in formal discourse one usually
is addressing a larger audience and one made up of
more diverse elements than is the case in ordinary daily
conversation, and consequently economy of attention
demands that we should avoid such peculiarities of
speech as might offend the taste of any one present.
Every educated person owes it to himself, therefore,
to be able to divest his speech of its local characteristics
and to speak a language which is approximately stand-
ard. What one shall regard as approximately standard
must again depend, in the end, on individual observa-
tion; but on this question we shall have more to say
later.
13. Organic Sound Changes. In the preceding para-
graphs we have been speaking of certain changes in the
pronunciation of English sounds which become general,
or tend to become so, through the process of imitation.
Besides these changes we must consider a second group
142 MODERN ENGLISH
in which the changes are dependent less upon the law
of imitation than upon purely natural and physical
causes. These we may group under the general head of
organic changes. The underlying explanation of all
these changes of this second kind is to be found in the
fact that our speech rests upon varying and entirely dif-
ferent planes of utterance. Sometimes we speak very
slowly and distinctly, at others we speak rapidly and
with less attention to the form of each individual word ,
certain words or groups of words we stress, while others
are spoken with a less degree of energy. In general, the
principle holds that the amount of energy we put forth
in the operation of the organs of speech is in inverse ratio
to the obviousness of the idea to be expressed. In
speaking a conventional formula, as, for example, the
greeting How do you do ? we enunciate the words very
indistinctly. We do not say Hau du iu du ? but perhaps
Hau do du? or Hau du? or even, the dialect writers tell
us, Howdy ? It is not only in the speech of the ignorant
and uneducated that such relaxed pronunciations find a
place, but in the speech of everybody. Some little prac-
tice in self-observation is often required, however, before
a speaker realizes the actual phonetic character of his lan-
guage. We are likely to have some theoretical notion of
an ideal perfect pronunciation, — the conviction perhaps
that we speak as we write, — so firmly fixed in our
minds that we think we say what we think we ought to
say, whereas what we actually say is something quite
different. The question whether or not it is right to
permit ourselves to use these relaxed pronunciations we
shall consider later. In the meantime we should observe
that the principle has always been in operation, and
ENGLISH SOUNDS 143
that it has deeply affected both the written and spoken
form of our language. A few historical illustrations
will make this point clear.
In Milton's Paradise Lost, in a passage in which the
poet is speaking of Dagon, the fish-god, there occurs the
curious-looking word grunsel :
In his own temple, on the grunsel-edge,
Where he fell flat and shamed his worshipers.1
The meaning of this word would be hard to guess from
Milton's form. But when we know that it is simply
worn down from a compound ground + sill, the analogy of
window-sill, door-sill gives us a ready clue to its meaning,
even tho a compound ground-sill is no longer in cur-
rent use. Milton's grunsel is only one of many words
with a similar history. Our formula at parting, for ex-
ample, which we now spell Good-by or Good-bye, and
pronounce, with the stress on the second syllable, gad-baf,
or even without any vowel in the first syllable, g'd-bai,
was originally the whole phrase Q-od be with you. This,
however, was entirely too long for a conventional for-
mula, and, its literal sense being lost, it gradually came
to be pronounced in an obscured and indistinct way.
From the very start it became God be wi' ye. This
further contracted into God bwye, a form which appears
in the dialog of the comedies of the eighteenth cen-
tury. Having gone so far, the original meaning of the
phrase became altogether lost; the first syllable was
mistaken for our word good and the second for our word
by, and we reach thus our modern form good-by. Many
words of the language have become obscured in fori»
l Bo<k T, 11. 460-461.
144 MODERN ENGLISH
in the same way. Our Modern English word lord is de-
rived from the Old English compound hlaf-weard, the
first element of which is English loaf (of bread), the
second ward (i. e., guardian), the whole word meaning
originally the guardian of the loaf, or supplies in gen-
eral. This word was, of course, originally a descriptive
epithet for protector or leader of the people ; in time,
however, the elements of the word ceased to be appre-
ciated separately, and since the word stood for a single
idea, which was not analyzed into the two notions of
bread and guardian, it came to be pronounced as a sim-
ple word. From hlaf-weard it became hlaford, then,
with the loss of the A, which was general in all words
in the initial position followed by another consonant,
lauerd, and, finally, lord. By a similar process, Modern
English woman has been derived from Old English wif-
man, the second element being the generic name for
human beings, and the first element wif-, the indication
of sex. The word having become fixed in the language
consciousness of the people as the conventional symbol
for the idea woman, it was no longer felt to be necessary
to analyze it into its descriptive parts, and it thus con-
tracted into the form woman. A like change has made
Modern English stirrup out of Old English stig-rdp,
which literally meant mounting-rope, from stig-, mean-
ing " to mount " (cf. German steigen, and Modern Eng-
lish stile, from Old English stig-oT), and rap, English
rope. Modern English nostril is derived from the Old
English compound nos-, " nose " + ftyril, " hole," the orig-
inal compound meaning thus "nose-hole." The word
window is derived from the two elements wind, and eage,
44 eye," the whole meaning " wind-eye," " the eye or hole
ENGLISH SOUNDS 145
by which the wind enters the house." The word punish
appears also in the obscured form punch, the relation in
meaning being obvious.
Many further illustrations might be cited of what
were originally careless, or better, relaxed, pronuncia-
tions, making their way into the written as well as
spoken language. For the present, however, it will
suffice to point out a few instances in which these re-
laxed pronunciations have made their way into recog-
nized use in the spoken language, but have not yet
succeeded in changing the written language to accord
with the pronunciation. Thus we write the compound
of sheep + herd, shepherd, but we pronounce it shepurd
(Jepord). The nautical terms leeward and boatswain are
pronounced luard (luard) and bdsen (b6san). The ad-
verb and preposition compound towards is pronounced
tords (terdz), altho other compounds with -wards, as,
for example, forwards and backwards, are pronounced
approximately as they are spelled, except in the popular
speech, where they also have become obscured, as towards
has in the correct or standard speech, being pronounced
there forards and backards (ferordz, bsekordz). Other
illustrations from correct speech are wrist-band, pro-
nounced rizbond, cupboard, pronounced kubard, fore-
head, pronounced ferad. A similar development has
taken place in many place names and family names.
Thus the name Salisbury is phonetically Solsbery (selz-
beri) ; the name of one of the colleges of the University
of Oxford is Magdalen, which is pronounced Maudlin,
and which is etymologically precisely the same word as
the English adjective maudlin. The name Gloucester,
priginally from Old English Gleawan-ceaster, is pho
10
146 MODERN ENGLISH
netically Gloster ; Leicester is pronounced Lester ; and
Cirencester, a town in southern England, is pronounced
Sister. The discrepancy between the spelling and the
pronunciation is much more marked in place names in
England than it is in any other English-speaking coun-
try ; it is so great, indeed, that it offers fair justification
for the old story of the traveler, who on his return from
a visit to England insisted that the English name
Cholmondeley (pronounced Chumly) was spelled Mar-
joribanks (pronounced Marchbanks).
In all obscured words of the kind that we have been
discussing, the same principle is involved. The words
were originally spoken distinctly and in full. As time
went on, however, and the words came to be very fa-
miliar to all persons, it was felt to be unnecessary to give
them their full value. They were intelligible in an ab-
breviated and " telescoped " form, and following the nat-
ural law of economy, they came to be used only in this
abbreviated form. If we turn now to our contemporary
speech we shall find that the same principle holds good.
When we speak rapidly or speak even in an ordinary con-
versational and colloquial tone, we have an entirely dif-
ferent kind of utterance from that which we have when
we speak carefully and formally, as when we speak to a
person who understands English imperfectly. In the
latter cases, each word is given a sharp and clear enuncia-
tion and bears a separate stress. In the former cases, the
words are run together more ; only one or two important
words in a group are stressed, the rest being pronounced
more or less indistinctly and vaguely. But when a word
which in other instances ordinarily has no stress, for some
reason, usually that of emphasis or antithesis, is given
ENGLISH SOUNDS 147
a stress, then it becomes clear and distinct and usually
has a different phonetic form from that which it has when
in unstressed position. Thus the sentence / saw your
sister yesterday, would normally be pronounced 9 se
yar sister yestarde ; but the sentence I did nt see your
sister but he saw mine, in which we have two pairs of
antithetic, and consequently emphatic, words, /and he\
and your and mine, would be pronounced ai didnt sf yur
sister but hi se main. This difference in the phonetic
form of words is sometimes recorded in the spelling,
the preposition of, for example, usually pronounced uv,
or simple a, as in the phrase time of day, taim 9 de* (cf.
four o'clock, from four of clock), being the unstressed
form of which the adverb off is the stressed. Likewise
the preposition to, pronounced ta, as in Pm going to towny
aim gOirj t9 taun, is the unstressed form corresponding
to the adverbial stressed form too (tu). To illustrate
this relaxed or natural form of speech a few connected
sentences may be quoted, first in the conventional spell-
ing, then in the actual phonetic form of the author's col-
loquial speech. The sentences are as follows : " What 's
the French for < I don't understand ' ? I want to let this
Frenchman know I can't understand what he 's saying.
It's rather odd, I can talk French myself, but I can't
understand it when it 's spoken. You should tell them
not to speak so fast. I don't believe they can speak
slow ; they are too excitable." In ordinary conversa-
tional tone, the phonetic form of these sentences would
be as follows : hwats 89 frene fgr " 9 d6nt undarstsend " ?
9 want 9 let Sis frenem9n no 9 ksent undgrstaend hwat fz
seirj. its raeS9r ad, 9 kan tek frene mgself, but 9 kaent
undarstsend it hwen its spokan. ift Jud tel $9m nat to
148 MODERN ENGLISH
spik so fsest. 9 d6nt biliv Se kaen spfk slo ; Se or t&
iksaitebal.1
Perhaps not all speakers would use exactly the forms
which have been put down in this phonetic transcription
as representing, as nearly as possible, the use of the
present writer. We must allow for variations among
individuals, some persons not only following different
customs, but also by nature speaking more slowly and
distinctly than others. Thus the phrase, I can talk
French myself might, in the pronunciation of some
speakers, take a fuller form of the pronouns than those
given above, being pronounced ai kan tek frene maiself.
But the more obscure forms of the pronoun will cer-
tainly be heard in the pronunciation of the majority of
speakers. Another point should be noticed which our
phonetic transcription does not take into account, and
that is the matter of binding, or liaison, to borrow a
term from French. Our custom of separating the
words of connected discourse by spacing is purely con-
ventional. It has grown up largely in modern times
since the invention of printing. The manuscripts of
the earlier periods, in Old English, for example, do not
usually separate the individual words, but run them
together in a straight ahead, running or cursive, style
of writing. This method of writing, tho it would seem
strange and inconvenient to us now, is indeed more in
accord with our actual manner of speaking than our
present printed and written use. For in speaking we
do not normally pronounce individual words, but rather
phrases or breath-groups, the pauses coming where they
are demanded by the logical sense and not before and
1 Adapted from Report of a Joint Committee, etc., p. 42.
ENGLISH SOUNDS 149
after each word. A phonetic transcription of the first two
sentences of the above passage, taking account of this
liaison, or binding of words into breath-groups, would,
therefore, be as follows : hwatsSafrene faradSntundar-
staend? awantalet SisfrenemannO aksentundarstaend
hwatizselrj.
Perhaps the most interesting and important practical
question which arises from the observation of these facts
is, What shall be our attitude towards these colloquial
or relaxed pronunciations ? Shall we try to get rid of
them as careless, lazy, and inelegant ? Is there an ideal
form of the language towards which we should strive
and in which such pronunciations shall find no place ?
One not infrequently meets with speakers who are pos-
sessed of this conviction. Such theorists tell us that
the article the should always be pronounced Si; the
preposition of should be av or ev ; the verb can always
keen, never kan, and so with all other words. They
tell us that every word should be separated sharply
from its neighbors, that there shall be no liaison of word
with word. They would have us pronounce the phrase
a good deal as e gud dil, instead of 9 gudil; at all as
set el, instead of 9tel. If the word suggest has two g's
in the spelling, they would have us pronounce two,
sugjest, instead of the normal and natural sajest ; or in
such words as nation and educate, they would have us
pronounce the words as n£tyen and ediukSt, instead of
n§fan and ejiukgt. Needless to say, this "prunes and
prisms " sort of pronunciation is both absurd and impos-
sible. The attempt to carry it out would result in what
we should rightly say was a language affected, unnatu-
ral, and un-English. The fact is that such theorists
150 MODERN ENGLISH
have an entirely false conception of the nature of lan-
guage, of the authority of the printed or written word,
and of the source of what shall be regarded as standard
and correct. They forget that the written and printed
form of language comes after the spoken form, that it is
merely a mechanical invention devised to recall and
suggest the real and living language, which is the
spoken language. They forget also that the mechanical
device of printing and writing can only imperfectly and
inadequately represent the sounds of speech, and that
speech, to use the figure again which we have already
used, like the waves of the ocean, is constantly chang-
ing and assuming a multitude of new forms, whereas
printing and writing tend to become more and more
fixed, conventional, and unchanging. To make speech
conform to the printed and written forms of language
is very much as tho one should try to make the trees
of a forest grow in conformity to an artist's picture of
them. Both speech and trees have a life of their own
which is free and independent of man's attempts to
reduce them to a descriptive formula.
The standards of correct speech must be found, there-
fore, not in the printed or written form of language,
but in the normal, natural conversation of daily life.
It might seem that, having elevated the natural speech
to this place of dignity, we have justified as right
and correct all pronunciations of the colloquial and
uncultivated speech whicli have followed the laws of
natural development, and that if we may say terdz
for towards, we may just as correctly say ferardz for
forwards and bsekordz for backwards. It is true that
the vulgar pronunciation of forwards and backwards,
ENGLISH SOUNDS 151
and a host of other words, has followed exactly the
same principles that have resulted in the standard
pronunciation of towards and words of like kind ;
but it is not true that we are at equal liberty to
choose either in our pronunciation. For the law of
imitation now enters to determine what shall be chosen
and what shall be discarded. To repeat the statement
of a preceding paragraph, one that cannot be too clearly
held in mind, phonetic laws, as well as all other laws of
language, become laws because they sum up or general-
ize the custom or usage with respect to a body of similar
phenomena. They are not laws because they express
the mandate of some person or authority empowered to
declare what shall be done, but they are laws or rules
because they state what actually is done. There is no
individual or autocratic power in language, but all work
together voluntarily in groups. The popular or uncul-
tivated speech has its laws or rules just as truly as has
the standard or correct speech. Consciously or uncon-
sciously every speaker follows the customs or rules of
his own special group ; for him these are the laws of his
language. It has already been sufficiently demonstrated
that these laws or rules are not fixed once and for all,
but are constantly adapting themselves to each other
and changing. Now, what a speaker of to-day is chiefly
concerned to know is what the laws or rules of his own
present day speech, of his own group, shall be. To
determine this there is only one means, and that is
observation. He must turn and examine the speech,
the living speech, of those persons with whom he is
thrown in contact, with such added help as he may get
from books and dictionaries in extending the field of his
152 MODERN ENGLISH
observation. In case of a doubtful pronunciation, he
must determine what group of speakers he will unite
himself with, — that is, the customs of what speakers he
will imitate or follow. He will observe that at present
the law of the popular speech is to pronounce forwards
as ferardz, and, extending his observation, he will per-
ceive that it is not the law of cultivated speech so to
pronounce the word. The choice of the group with
which he will unite himself then lies in his own hands,
and, other things being equal, will usually be in favor
of the cultivated speech. The pronunciation of the
cultivated speech is for him the correct use because he
chooses it ; it is the law of his language.
It is obvious from what has been said that no pronun-
ciation is absolutely and inherently right and another
wrong. Although the standard towards (terdz) and the
popular forwards (ferardz) follow the same natural law
and linguistically are on the same level, in the one case
the result has been accepted by the group of speakers to
which the cultivated and educated person wishes to be-
long, in the other it has not. In so far, therefore, the
one is correct and the other is incorrect ; it needs, how-
ever, only the acceptance of the popular form into gen-
eral use to make it as correct as the other. Historically
it has, of course, often happened that there has been a
shifting back and forth of popular and standard forms.
Thus, the word sound appears without the final d in
Chaucer :
Soun is noght but air y- broken.1
This is the correct form, historically, since the word is
derived from Latin sonum, the d being gratuitously
1 House of Fame, 1. 765,
ENGLISH SOUNDS 153
added in later times. Thus, the Elizabethan poet and
translator Stany hurst, commenting on the length of cer-
tain syllables in English meter, says : " Yeet sowning
in English must bee long, and much more yf yt were
sounding, as thee ignorant generaly, but falslye dooe
wryte." l Yet the same writer drops a final d in the
word rind from Old English rinde, spelling it ryne :
" Not onlye by gnibling vpon thee outward ryne of a
supposed historic." 2 As it happens the forms of these
words which later custom has settled upon are sound
and rind, but they might just as well have been soun
and rine. In further illustration of the shifting of the
nd sound, the word lawn may be cited. In Middle Eng-
lish, for example in Chaucer, this word is always launde,
with a final d. Later English has dropped the d, as
Stanyhurst wanted to do with rind.
It is obvious, then, that the burden of responsibility
in making a choice between two divergent pronuncia-
tions rests on the individual. Every person has not only
the liberty of choice, but the necessity of choice. When
a question of pronunciation comes up, each must decide
for himself the form he will choose to use. If he at-
tempts to put off the responsibility on another, say on a
dictionary or the opinion of some one whose advice is
sought, he is merely removing the appearance of respon-
sibility, for in these instances he must decide for himself
the value of the sources of information which he seeks
and which he is willing to imitate or follow blindly.
Plainly, also, if the responsibility rests with the indi-
1 In Gregory Smif >, Elizabethan Critical Essays, I, 142.
2 Ibid., p. 136. B« spelling gnibling he apparently derives by analogy
to gnaw.
154 MODERN ENGLISH
vidual, the penalty also falls upon him. If the illiterate
person pronounces forwards as ferardz and knows no
better, because the field of his observation, his experi-
ence, has not made him acquainted with a different
pronunciation, he must nevertheless bear the odium of
being classed with the uneducated when he comes into
contact with the educated. He pays the penalty of his
ignorance, and so does every one else who uses forms of
language which he would not use if his sensitiveness
to, and observation of, language had been keener and
broader. Each must decide for himself whom or what
group of persons he will regard as cultivated and edu-
cated, — that is, the laws and customs of what group he
wishes to follow. Each must decide for himself, also,
what innovations he can risk. If he choose unwisely,
if he follow a false standard of refinement and cultiva-
tion, he must bear the consequences until experience
and observation shall so far widen his horizon as to
enable him to follow the law of the group of which he
really wishes to consider himself a part.
14. The Standard of Pronunciation. The question
of a standard pronunciation has been to a large extent
answered in the discussion of the preceding paragraphs.
By the term standard of pronunciation, one usually
means a fixed norm, an established and accepted form of
the language, which shall serve as the model upon which
all speakers shall fashion their speech. This standard is
elevated to'the position of the " correct " speech, all devi-
ations from it being regarded as incorrect. A grave
difficulty, however, confronts the student, and this is
the difficulty of determining whether there actually is a
standard of English pronunciation which shall serve as
ENGLISH SOUNDS 155
the pattern and model for all English-speaking people,
and if so, where it is to be found. In the first place, we
may safely say that there is no ideal and perfect inher-
ent form of the language, towards which all speakers
should strive as towards an ultimate goal. There is no
objective system of language outside of the minds and
experiences of the people who use and speak the lan-
guage. In seeking for a standard of pronunciation, con-
sequently, men must look to themselves and their own
use, not to some extra-human and ideal system towards
which they shall dutifully strive. Any standard which
is chosen must be made up from the laws of the actual
spoken use of some group of speakers, because it is only
in actual spoken use that language really exists.
In the attempt to fix upon some body of spoken use
as the standard language, the question may be ap-
proached from two points of view, first, the geographical,
and, second, the social or educational point of view. In
attempting to establish a geographical standard of spoken
use, choice is made of the speech of some one region or
community, which is to be regarded then as the model
for all other communities. In other words, one dialect
is chosen as the standard to which all other dialects
shall conform. In some countries this principle is rec-
ognized in actual practice. The standard French dialect
is the dialect of Paris, the standard Italian dialect is
the dialect of Florence, or rather of Tuscany, the prov-
ince in which Florence is situated; a'nd the standard
Spanish dialect is the Castilian, the dialect of Madrid.
These dialects are standard for their respective coun-
tries, however, because the people of these various coun-
tries have voluntarily accepted them as their standard,
156 MODERN ENGLISH
not because Parisian French or Tuscan Italian or Castil-
ian Spanish have any inherent right to the exclusion of
other dialects. It simply so happens that the people of
these various countries, in the development of their civ-
ilization, have come to look upon certain communities as
the center of their national life and culture. Turning
to the English-speaking countries, however, we find an
entirely different state of affairs. No one community is
now accepted as affording the model of speech to which
all others must conform. Theoretically we might say
that London, as the capital of the native home of the
English language, ought to be regarded as the home of
the standard language. As an actual fact, however, the
speech of London is not so regarded, not even by the Brit-
ish themselves. The English-speaking people through-
out the world do not look upon London as affording
the ideal speech which it is their duty to imitate and
follow. Indeed, so different is the manner of speech
of Englishmen from that of Americans that the former
is often used in America as the mark of a comedy
character on the stage — just as in England " the Ameri-
can accent" is similarly used as a laughter-provoking
device. Of course the stage Englishman and American
are usually exaggerations, but the normal speech of the
two countries is sufficiently divergent to be easily per-
ceived, and too divergent to allow one to stand as a
model for the other. " No American speaker or writer
ever thinks it needful to adopt the British form of his
own language, any more than a British speaker or writer
thinks it needful to adopt the American form." l
Practically it would be impossible for British English
1 Freeman, Some Impressions of the United States, p. 56,
ENGLISH SOUNDS 157
to serve as the model for American English, or Ameri-
can English for British English. The two peoples, de-
spite their many similarities and relationships, do not
come into sufficiently intimate and frequent personal
contact to enable them to know directly the manner of
speech of each other. And it is of course only by direct
personal contact that the speech of one community can
impose itself upon that of another.
Coming nearer home, neither do we find in our own
country any city, Washington, for example, or any re-
gion, which can lay claim to the place of distinction
which the French accord to Paris and the Italians to
Florence. The speech of Chicago does not feel itself
under any compulsion to adapt itself to that of Boston,
or that of Boston to that of Chicago. The speech of
New York cannot impose itself upon that of New Or-
leans, or that of San Francisco upon that of St. Louis.
In short, we do not acknowledge that the speech of any
one community has compelling power over that of any
other. We have no acknowledged seat or center of
national life and culture, and consequently we do not
elevate to the position of a standard the speech of any
city or state.
Failing a local geographical standard, the next position
would be that the standard speech is not the speech of
any one community but the speech of the country as a
whole. In answer to this the obvious query comes, Is
there a common general speech of the country as a
whole? Does the average Bostonian speak like the
average Chicagoan ? Most certainly not. He does not,
not only because he does not want to, but because he
could not if he would. The citizen of one community
158 MODERN ENGLISH
does not know how the citizens of another speak, because
it is only by a long-continued residence in a strange
community that a visitor can acquire a wide and exact
knowledge of its manner of speech. All we can say is
that some comparatively few widely traveled and cos-
mopolitan speakers have acquired a manner of speech
which is general enough not to betray the immediate
locality of its origin, tho it must always have character-
istics individual enough to class it broadly as Eastern
or Western or Southern. With the vast majority of
speakers the local characteristics are even more marked.
The local characteristics of one community may extend
over a wider area than those of another, the dialect char-
acteristics of Virginia, for example, covering a less extent
of territory than those of the Middle West ; but each,
nevertheless, has its local metes and bounds, and for its
section they are distinctive. We have already remarked
that the speech of large cities especially tends to become
markedly local and dialectal. Thus to one observant of
such matters, the speech of Boston or Philadelphia is
soon perceived to be noticeably different from that of
their near neighbor, New York. Theoretically one might
say that it is the duty of the speakers of each community
to strive for a common and universal speech ; that, if
the Bostonian will not speak like the Chicagoan or the
Chicagoan like the Bostonian, then they should come
together on some middle ground. Each region thus
yielding some of its individual characteristics, we should
arrive at a compromise among the various local speeches
which would be a universal, cosmopolitan speech. The
obvious obstacle in the way of this theory is that the
laws of language are not based on theory, but arise from
ENGLISH SOUNDS 159
actual use. When the Bostonian and Chicagoan are
thrown so intimately together, when intercourse between
them is so frequent and long-continued that they become
practically one in their habits and customs, then, and not
till then, will they speak a single speech. Then they
will develop a new dialect comprehensive enough in its
limits to include both Chicago and Boston. A standard
speech cannot be imposed dogmatically ; it cannot even be
chosen voluntarily. It must grow, as all other customs
grow in language, gradually and naturally. And until
some such change takes place in the country as a whole,
until from a group of more or less clearly denned com-
munities, it becomes one great homogeneous community,
so long we shall have local differences of speech and
so long will the theory of a universal standard speech
remain a vain and empty dream.
Besides the local or geographical aspect of the question,
the matter of the standard speech may be approached
from a second point of view, the social or educa-
tional. We have already pointed out that the speech
of different social groups or classes differs widely. The
popular, or vulgar, speech is different from that of the
educated person, and the colloquial and every-day speech
of the latter is different from his careful and formal
speech. The question of choice between the popular
and illiterate speech and the speech of educated and
cultivated people presents little difficulty. Perhaps
every one will agree without question that the speech
of the uninformed and uninstructed has no claim to be
regarded as the standard or correct speech, and that, on
the contrary, the speech of the cultivated portion of
society has every claim to be so regarded. The diffi-
160 MODERN ENGLISH
culty comes not in making the choice, but in preparing
the way for the choice, in determining just who are the
cultivated and educated and refined speakers whom we
are willing to regard as affording the models or laws of
the correct or standard speech. The difficulty of defin-
ing education, culture, and refinement is one that has
often been felt. They are qualities that may be readily
perceived when they are exemplified in individuals, but
often defy description and analysis. Perhaps the main
source of the difficulty lies in the fact that the qualities
mentioned are largely matters of opinion, that no per-
son is absolutely educated or refined or cultured. One
whom I might regard as an educated and refined person,
another, with higher or at least different standards, might
regard as uneducated, as crude and vulgar. Everything
depends upon the point of view, the predilections, the
prejudices, the customary habits and ways of thinking of
the person who acts as judge and critic. The bearing of
this upon the question of the standard of correct speech
is direct. What shall I regard as educated and refined ?
Where shall I place the line between the lower and the
higher, that which is to be approved and imitated and
that which is to be condemned and rejected ? To these
questions there is no general answer. Each person must
put the questions to himself and must answer them
for himself. He must judge and choose according to
his own light and according to his own opportunities
of experience and observation. It is the end of edu-
cation to enable one to make right decisions in such
matters, and the whole process of education cannot be
stated in a word. It is obviously necessary to make
these decisions not only with respect to a few great
J)K. Came you from Padua from 2*&rt»t
Ncr. From both.
! My Lord 'Kcn&ia greets year G race.
2fo/I WhydoiUhou whet thy knife fotameftly?
ft*. To cue the forfeiture from hat bankrout there.
CIA. Not on thy foalc : bat on thy foule harfli lew
Thou rr.ak'ft thy knife keene t but no met tall can,
No, not the hangman* Axe bcarc halfe the kcenncfle
Ol thy fh arpe enuy. Can no prayers pierce thcc>
/**. No, none that thou haft wit enough co make.
</»-.f . O be thou damn'd, incxccrablc doggc,
And for thy life let iufhce be accui'd:
Thou almotlmak'ft me waiter in my faith}
To hold opinion with PithworMi
That foulcs of Animals infufc themfelties
Into the trunkcs of men. Thy curtiihfpirie
Goucrn'd a Wolfe, who hang'd for humane (laughter^
Eueofroni tli9 gailowes did h:s fell foule fleet;
Ami whil'ft thou layed in thy vnhallo wed dara,
Infus'd It fclfc in thce : For thy deiircs
Are Woliiifli, bloody, fteru'd,and raucnou^
It*. Till thou candrailethefealefrotDofTaiybond
Thou but cffcnd ft thy Longs to fpcake fo louj^: *
Repairs thy wi: good' youth, 01 it will fail
Toendleflc ruine. I Hand licerefor I tw.
JDv. This Letter from TZtiUri* doth commend
A yoog and Learned Do^or in our Cour c ;
Whtretshe?
Air. Meattetidethheerehardhy
To know your «ifwer,whcthcr y ou'l admit him.
D** With all my heart. Some three or four of jfOV
Go giuchim ctttteous conduct to thts place,
Masuc time the Court (hall hcm'Bcgariets Lcttet'.i
Oxr Grtccfa&vndirfltHd, t
THE FIRST FOLIO OF SHAKSPKRE.
Merchant of Venice, Act IV, Sc. i, 11. 119-152.
(For description, see Appendix.)
162 MODERN ENGLISH
figures or authorities, not only with respect to public
speakers, for example, whom one hears only at rare
intervals, but also with respect to one's daily associ-
ates and the hourly customs and habits of familiar life.
The decisions of the latter kind are naturally the more
important ones, but at the same time the ones concern-
ing which it is least possible to give a general guiding
rule. Here again individual judgment is the only way
we have of deciding who the good speakers are among
those whom we meet. We are naturally inclined to
regard our own judgment in such matters as universal
and final, but this is an assumption that is likely to
be questioned as soon as we try to impose our stand-
ards and decisions upon others.
The authority of dictionaries and other printed works
rests upon somewhat the same basis as that of persons.
Dictionaries and other guide-books are the work of
finite human beings, and tho, in general, the authors
of them are men of exceptional weight and authority
because of their greater information and extent of
observation, they are nevertheless fallible and limited
in their experience. Consequently, when the statement
of a dictionary differs from one's own observation, the
sensible thing to do, after one has made sure that the ob-
servation is true, is to disregard the dictionary altogether
and to follow the example of actual use. Moreover,
from the nature of the case, dictionaries are bound to
become antiquated. Before one gives much weight to the
decision of a dictionary, one should make sure that the
dictionary is a record of contemporary use. Early
editions of Webster's dictionary,1 for example, record the
1 The later editions are known as Webster's International Dictionary.
ENGLISH SOUNDS 163
pronunciation dif for deaf, as well as many other uses
that are no longer current or have become quite dialectal.
But even the more contemporary dictionaries are not
always a certain guide. In the great proportion of in-
stances they, of course, are, since the question of double
use arises only infrequently. One should exercise con-
siderable caution, therefore, before one differs from the
opinion of a reputable dictionary like the New English
Dictionary, the Century, or the Standard, and all the
more caution when these various dictionaries agree.
Occasions are not wanting, however, in which reputable
use is at variance with the united opinion of even the
best dictionaries. Thus the word peremptory is stressed
by both Standard and Century dictionaries only on the
first syllable, whereas the pronunciation peremptory is
certainly the more usual one, even among careful speak-
ers. Both dictionaries stress octopus only on the second
syllable, contrary to the usual custom of stressing it on
the first, a pronunciation which is acknowledged as a
secondary one by the New English Dictionary. For
culinary the dictionaries record only the pronunciation
kiu'linseri, altho the pronunciation kulinaeri is perhaps
as frequently heard. The word vizor is recorded as
vi'zor or vi'zer, although one hears as often, perhaps
more often, the pronunciation vai'zar, or vai'zer. In
some instances the dictionaries record two pronuncia-
tions, leaving to the choice of each person the one he
prefers to use. Thus, we have the forms sedvertai'zmant
and sedver'tizmant ; skwelor and skwelar; ske'dsul,
ske'diul, and in England, Je'diul. Other words in which
the dictionaries as well as usage disagree are numerous.
The International (Webster's) Dictionary records only
164 MODERN ENGLISH
the pronunciation o'asis, which is the preferred form in
the Standard Dictionary ; but the Century records only
oa'sis, and the New English Dictionary gives both oa'sis
and o'asis. The pronunciation oa'sis is decidedly the more
common one in America ; its use in England is also attes-
ted by the scansion of the following line from Tennyson i
My one oasis in the dust and drouth.
A similar uncertainty obtains in the pronunciation of
legend, which is sometimes le'jond and sometimes li'jond.
One hears also two pronunciations for progress, prSgres
and pre'gres ; and for drama, dr^ma and dr§ma. There
is also a divergence of use in certain more or less recent
words, as, for example, vaudeville, pronounced vo'davil
or ve'davil; automobile, pronounced etornO'bil or eto-
mobil' ; coupon, pronounced ku'pen or kid'pen.
Webster's International and the New English Diction-
ary record only the pronunciations petran and metran
for patron and matron. The Century and Standard give
a second pronunciation, psetran and msetran. On the
other hand, for patronage the International and the New
English Dictionary give only the form psetrenej, fol-
lowed also by the Standard ; the Century gives as second
pronunciation, p§trenej. For matronal the International
gives first msetrenal, second metrenal ; the New English
Dictionary gives only the second pronunciation ; and the
Century and Standard give the second as a preferred
pronunciation, and the International's first as a secondary
pronunciation. Can anything more confusing be im-
agined than the attempt to reason out a principle of
choice from the statements of the dictionaries with
respect to these four words?
ENGLISH SOUNDS 165
A pronunciation of the word hearth as hurp, riming
thus with earth, birth, etc., is widely current in the
United States, both in popular and in the more careful
speech. The only dictionary, however, which recognizes
this pronunciation is the Century, which gives it as a
second pronunciation. The preferred pronunciation in
the Century, and the only one recorded by the Interna-
tional, the New English, and the Standard, is harp, an
assonance to heart, part, etc. The pronunciation hurp is
not only a legitimate one in present Americana usage, it
is also supported by history. It is indeed a survival
from a pronunciation which was once general and
standard in English, as is illustrated by the rime in the
following lines from Milton's II Penseroso :
Far from all resort of mirth
Save the cricket on the hearth.
This pronunciation, according to the New English Dic-
tionary, still persists in Scottish and in the northern dia-
lects of England. And, as we have pointed out, it also
persists in good use in American speech, which in many
instances has been strongly conservative of earlier usages.
An instructive comparison may be made between this
pronunciation of hearth as hur]?, and the pronunciation of
clerk. This latter word is always pronounced klurk in
A.merican speech, with the same quality of vowel as hurp.
In England, however, the customary pronunciation is
kl&rk (with the r, however, slightly pronounced or alto-
gether omitted), a pronunciation which has affected the
spelling of the word when it appears as the proper name
Clark, Clarke. The pronunciations hurp, klurk are the
more original pronunciations, of which the forms harp,
klark are a later development. This later form is illus-
166 MODERN ENGLISH
trated in other words from earlier -er in which the spell-
ing has been changed to accord with the pronunciation,
such as bark, dark, hark, etc. In the word sergeant, and
in the words hearth and clerk as pronounced harp, klark,
the earlier spelling has remained in spite of the change
in pronunciation. The word person has assumed two
orthographic forms, the one cited being the more original
form, from which was developed, in a specialized sense,
the word parson. What has happened, consequently, in
American .speech, with respect to the words clerk and
hearth, is that in clerk the earlier form has persisted
as the standard use, whereas in the case of hearth,
the earlier pronunciation persists pretty generally in
the popular speech and to some extent in the culti-
vated speech, altho in the latter place it tends to be
crowded out by the later pronunciation, exemplified
in such forms as heart, dark, hark, etc., becoming thus
harp.
One or two further miscellaneous examples of uncer-
tain use may be given. The pronunciation pa'resis is
the only one recognized by the International, Century,
Standard, and the New English Dictionaries. But in
actual speech, to some extent in the medical profession
and almost always outside it, the pronunciation heard is
pare* sis. The New English Dictionary authorizes only
recondite ; the International and Standard prefer re-
con'dite, but give as second choice, rec'ondite. On the
other hand the Century gives recon'dite as first choice,
and re'condite as second. All the dictionaries record
only inqui'ry (inkwai'ri), disregarding completely the
frequently heard pronunciation with stress on the first
syllable.
ENGLISH SOUNDS 167
15. Spelling Reform. The consideration of the ques-
tion of spelling reform rightly finds a place in a discussion
of English sounds, for the reason that English spelling
is merely an outward and visible means of representing
the sounds of the language. The language itself ex-
isted in all its essentials long before it was reduced to a
written or a printed form, just as to-day the illiterate
person who knows nothing about reading or writing is
nevertheless possessed of the power of language. Spell-
ing or writing is, therefore, nothing more than an at>-
tempt to reduce to a fixed and permanent formula what
was already pre-existent in the impermanent use of
spoken speech. It has already been pointed out, that
whatever the immediate descriptive or pictorial charac-
ter of written language may have been in its origin, it
has now completely lost its pictorial value and is merely
a set of conventional and arbitrary signs, the signifi-
cances of which have to be learned &nd-helcL in mind .by
a pure act of memory. In this respect written language
is on exactly the same level as spoken language. In
the latter, as a result of many successive ages of custom
and use, we have settled upon certain sounds and se-
quences of sounds as conveying certain ideas. The
value and meaning of these sounds and groups of
sounds have to be learned anew by every individual
who acquires command of the language. Parents, by a
long period of discipline and instruction, teach their
children how to make the sounds and what ideas the
sounds stand for. No child has the command of lan-
guage inherently and by nature, but only as he learns it
by .unitating the _s^eech_pf _othfirs. In the same way,
through a long process of development, we have come
168 MODERN ENGLISH
to settle upon certain written symbols and groups of
symbols as standing for certain sounds and groups of
sounds. Every child now learns to make this arbitrary
connection between the symbol and the sound, just as
before he had learned to make a connection between the
various sounds and the respective ideas which they were
used to designate. Now, having settled upon a conven-
tional set of visible written symbols to stand for audible
spoken sounds, the question of reform in our system of
visible written symbols arises when an endeavor is made
to make more perfect or consistent our system of sym-
bols. Spelling reform, indeed, is only a name for this
endeavor when it becomes conscious. More or less un-
conscious spelling reform has been going on ever since
the beginning of written language, because from the
very beginning written language has been changing in
order to adapt its system to the changes in the spoken
language. When, for example, in the Middle English
period, the initial consonant in such Old English words
as firing, hleap-an, and hrof ceased to be pronounced,
and the words consequently were spelled ring, leap, and
roof, that was as much a spelling reform as any that can
be advocated nowadays. It is safe to say that every
change in spelling that has taken place in the history of
the language has taken place because some one thought
the change a necessary or advisable improvement in the
system of spelling. The motive underlying the change
may not always have been wise or well considered, but
it is certain that changes have never taken place in a
completely haphazard and causeless way.
The question is sometimes asked, Why is it necessary
for us to think about the matter of spelling at all?
ENGLISH SOUNDS 169
Since our system of spelling is an arbitrary and conven-
tional one, does it matter much what conventions we
use ? Why should we set to work consciously to alter
or improve that which, when all is said, is certainly
capable of performing, and for many generations has
performed, the service for which it is intended ? Or it
is urged that if any changes are to be made, we should
leave them to the next generation or the third or the
fourth, or to whatever generation feels compelled to
make them. To all these queries and objections the
answer is, that we are under no necessity of considering
the question of spelling reform. No matter how com-
plicated or inconsistent or imperfect our system of
written speech may be, if we wish to do so, we can
make it serve. Englishmen have not lived and spoken
and written all these generations without evolving a
written and spoken language which is to some, or rather
to a high degree, adequate to the purposes for which it
was devised. The question, therefore, of the improve-
ment of English spelling is not one of necessity ; it is
one of desire and inclination. If the present English
spelling affords a fairly serviceable medium of written
expression, it does so because it has been an object of
deepest thought and consideration to many generations
of English-speaking peoples. Spelling is a human insti-
tution, and like all human institutions, it has had its
crude beginnings, it has grown as a result of the effort
of individuals, and it has improved by rectifying its
errors and by correcting its imperfections. That it has
now reached a state of ultimate perfection, that it is in-
capable of further improvement, the history of other
human institutions forbids us to believe. We might as
170 MODERN ENGLISH
well refuse to think of aerial navigation, because we are
already able to move upon the earth and the water by
electricity and steam, as refuse to look to the future of
our language because our fathers have handed down to
us their form of the language. The endeavor of every
one truly interested in the welfare of his speech will be
to make that speech more perfect and effective. He
will not rest content in a blind conservatism, but will
be alert and quick to see the value of suggested im-
provement. The matter of the improvement of English
spelling is specially one for the present generation.
Each period is confronted with its own particular prob-
lems in language, and it is on the way in which each
period solves its problems that the language of the
future depends. For our period, one of the problems is
certainly the question of spelling reform, and it is one
deserving of careful consideration and of a fair and
reasonable answer. Our danger of error is no greater,
perhaps is less great, than it has been in any preceding
period, and equable judgment and sound scholarship are
as well able to care for the language of the future as
they ever were in the past.
Just in what respect the accepted spelling may be im-
proved and simplified must be determined by a separate
discussion of individual instances, and as in the case of
the changes in sounds discussed in preceding paragraphs,
the final acceptance of these changed or improved or
reformed spellings must rest upon the desire, or, to use
the term previously employed, the imitation, of the indi-
viduals who use the written and printed form of the
language. It should be remembered that the chief ob-
stacle in the path of improved spelling is a result of
ENGLISH SOUNDS 171
exactly the same cause which has made change and im-
provement desirable. Spelling was at first free to adapt
itself to the spoken forms of words. The simple and
natural rule of spelling was to write as you speak.
Consistency in the spelling of an individual and gen-
eral uniformity among all writers were not regarded as
necessary, or even as virtues towards which one should
strive. In Old English, for example, not only will the
same word be spelled differently by different writers,
but even the same writer does not always use the same
spelling. This freedom in the treatment of spelling
persists down through the time of Chaucer, even down
through Shakspere and later. One need only turn to
an early quarto or folio edition of one of Shakspere's
plays, an edition in which the spelling has not been nor-
malized and modernized, to see that the rules of Eliza-
bethan spelling were much less uniform and consistent
than they are in Modern English. To find in our time
an attitude towards spelling parallel to that of Shak-
spere's, we must turn to the use of those whom we should
now call the imperfectly educated, those who spell very
much as they feel inclined. The reason why the spell-
ing of Shakspere and of the contemporary imperfectly
educated person is on the same plane, is that neither of
these has acknowledged, or in fact is aware of, the ideal >/•
oLajperfejctly-sonsistent and uniform system of spelling.
This is an invention of comparatively modern times, and
it is only in modern times that it has been made a re-
quirement and a test of the conventionally educated
person.
The causes which have operated to bring about this
change of attitude towards spelling are mainly the ex-
172 MODERN ENGLISH
tension of the reading public and the influence of the
dictionaries and spelling-books. The influence of print-
sing and of the rules of the printing-houses upon English
spelling has been very great. In the first place, the
printer with his professional sense of the importance of
the mechanical side of his art, always strives for com-
plete consistency and regularity. He makes his margins
always the same width, his words are always spaced
exactly so far apart, he uses the same kind of type
always for the same purpose, and in countless ways he
(^ndeav^rs_tp_make _M&_ w.ork- as mechanically uniform
and regular as possible. Obviously, one of the first
things to which he would direct attention would be the
question of a uniform spelling; and so we find with
the rise of the great printing-houses in England in the
eighteenth century the origins of a rigidly uniform
system of spelling. About the same time regularizing
tendencies began to show themselves also in the mak-
ing of dictionaries and spelling-books, the purpose of
which was to choose from the various spellings and to
record what was regarded as the one standard and cor-
rect spelling of words. This standard of correct spelling
was usually derived from contemporary printed books,
and consequently the dictionaries gave nothing more than
the statement of the spelling rules of the printing houses.
Among the dictionaries, the most influential was Dr.
Johnson's, the first edition of which appeared in 1755.
This book purported to give the correct spelling of all
words, and it and other later dictionaries after its model
have had great influence in spreading the belief that
words have only one permissible and correct spelling,
and that the one recorded by themselves,
ENGLISH SOUNDS 173
The unconscious influence of the printed word has also
been making for a fixed and conventional spelling. Men
read so much nowadays, newspapers, books, magazines,
and divers forms of printed literature, that the printed
word has come to seem almost more real than the spoken
word. The former certainly is more obvious, more tan-
gible, one might say, and more permanent, and it leaves
a more definite and lasting impression on the memory
than the spoken word. The result of these influences,
of that of the printing-houses, of the dictionaries and
rule books for spelling, and of printed literature in gen-
eral, has been to raise the printed word to a position of
undeserved importance. It tends more and more to
detach itself from the spoken word and to become an
independent and conventional symbol for the former.
Spelling thus becomes a thing apart, a system with its
own rules and regulations that have no relation to any-
thing else. We thus have spelling for spelling's sake,
instead of the natural state of affairs, which is spelling
for speaking's sake.
Recognizing the danger of being tyrannized over by
an unyielding system of conventional spelling, we have
the relief in our own hands. We should remember that
whatever authority the dictionary maker and the printer
have, they have it because the voluntary assent of the
people grants it to them. Neither dictionary maker nor
printer is a lawgiver who has power to legislate finally
as to what spellings shall be and what shall not be.
They are individuals, as are all other users of the lan-
guage, and they acquire their authority just as other
individuals do, that is, by the willingness of others to
follow and imitate them. Granting this, the way of
174 MODERN ENGLISH
the spelling simplifier or improver is clear. He may
choose to follow the spelling of the dictionaries and the
printers when he sees no good reason for deviating from
it; but when he chooses to deviate from it, he has as
great right, and if his judgment is as sound, as good
authority for doing so, as the dictionary has for pre-
venting him.
The most radical scheme of spelling reform is that
which is proposed by the advocates of a phonetic alpha-
bet. They point out to us that spelling, or the visible
/form of language in general, is intended merely as a
representation of spoken language, and that as such it
should be used with systematic consistency and exact-
ness. They show that, on the contrary, our present
spelling in some instances uses letters which are not
pronounced at all, as the final e in late, the ue of tongue,
the I of walk; in others uses the same letter with
different values, as the c in cent and call; the a in hat,
hate, hall ; and in still others uses different letters with
the same value, as s and c in sent, scent, and cent ; a and
-ey in hate and they ; e and ee in he and see. In short,
they point out what is certainly true, that our present
spelling, for one reason and another, has become a very
imperfect and inconsistent means of representing our
present sounds. As a corrective of all these evils, the
phonetic reformers propose that an entirely new alpha-
bet be invented, one in which each sound has its own
symbol and in which no symbol has more than one
value, that this new alphabet replace the old traditional
alphabet, and then that every word be written in this
new set of symbols as it is pronounced. The advantage
of such a reform, if it could be carried through, would
ENGLISH SOUNDS 175
be undeniably great. Our spelling would then be logi-
cal and systematic. Foreigners learning English would
be relieved of one of the chief difficulties which now
lie in their way. Both practically and theoretically
such a system of phonetic spelling would approach the
ideal of the relation which should exist between the
spoken and the written word. Unfortunately, however,
there is not the remotest possible chance that any such
radical reform could ever be put into operation. If our
language were in the hands of some autocratic power
who by an imperial edict was able to declare that this
or that shall henceforth be the law of the language,
there might be some hope for the phonetic reformer.
But the English language is not in the hands of an
individual, or even in the hands of a group of individ-
uals. It is the most democratic of all the institutions
of a democratic people. What the people do and what
the people will is the law of the language. Now ex-
perience has shown that the will of the people is in-
alterably opposed to any such wholesale and violent
overturning of their traditional language as the pho-
netic reform supposes. Our present system of spelling
has come to be as it is slowly and gradually. It has
its roots deeply fixed in the past. It is the form in
which an ancient and dignified literature is recorded,
and on all sides it is worthy of the deep respect and
veneration which we rightly pay to our heritage of
national and social tradition. The attempt, therefore,
to replace the accepted spelling by a system of entirely
new manufacture is not only impossible, but it does
violence to a sentiment of respect and a feeling for the
language which has always existed and which should
176 MODERN ENGLISH
always be cherished. It is not by such revolutionary
methods that the spelling of the future is to be made
better than the spelling of to-day. Now, as ever in
language, changes must take place slowly and gradually.
They must come because they meet with the approval of
. the general body of the users of the language, not because
they seem good to some maker of systems and theories.
A compromise phonetic reform is that which would
endeavor to get along with our present alphabet, but
would so reconstruct the spelling of words that they
would be spelled systematically in the phonetic way
as far as is possible with the traditional alphabet. Thus
the words doe and dough, being pronounced alike would
be spelled alike, both perhaps do, by analogy to so.
The same spelling could not of course answer for doe
and dough and also for the verb do ,• the latter would
therefore have to be changed, say to doo, to conform to
the spelling too, school, food, etc. If, however, oo were
settled upon as having the value of the vowel in do,
then the word rule would have to be spelled rool (like
spool), through would be spelled throo, who would be-
come whoo, fruit would become froot (like root), and so
on through a countless number of similar changes. Now
again, altho many of these changes would doubtless
conduce to simplicity and regularity, the same objection
holds against carrying out a systematic and compre-
hensive scheme of spelling reform along these lines as
against one based on the use of a phonetic alphabet, and
that is, that the changes necessitated are too numerous,
and the violence done to the natural conservative feel-
ing for the language is too great. The work of reform
must proceed more slowly.
ENGLISH SOUNDS 177
A third comprehensive and systematic scheme of
spelling reform, which is the exact opposite of that pro-
posed by the phonetic reformers, is the one which, recog-
nizing the difficulty of making English spelling conform
to English pronunciation, seizes the other horn of the
dilemma, and proposes that English pronunciation be
made to conform to English spelling. The advocates of
this theory, if there are any serious enough in its de-
fense to be called its advocates, point out that we now
have an approximately fixed and rigid system of spell-
ing, and that it seems to be easier for us to make our
spelling fixed and permanent and standard than our
pronunciation. Why not, therefore, make spelling the
standard of pronunciation, and instead of trying to
wjite as we speak, speak as we write ? This ingenious
proposal has one main obstacle in its way, an obstacle
which, as we have had occasion to remark, lies in the
way of many another proposal for the reform of lan-
guage, and that is that the English language does not
grow and adapt itself to the far-reaching plans of theo-
rists, but as it lives and is utilized in the every-day in-
tercourse of life. The history of English pronunciation
has shown that in a comparatively very small number
of words, the written form has reacted upon the spoken
form and altered its pronunciation to conform to the
spelling ; thus, our word perfect (purfekt) is originallyy
a learned spelling, based on the Latin perfectum, for the
word which was spelled parfit in Chaucer and which
was pronounced as it was written. The learned spell-
ing, however, not only crowded out the spelling parfit,
but even, in time, made the pronunciation parfit conform
to the spelling perfect. On the other hand, the word
12
178 MODERN ENGLISH
debt, which Chaucer spelled and pronounced det, be-
cause it is ultimately derived from Latin debeo, debitum,
was given a b by the Renascence spelling reformers ;
this £>, tho we have retained it in our spelling, debt,
has never succeeded in making its way into the pro-
nunciation as has the c in perfect. Other examples
might be cited, but the instances in which pronunci-
ation has adapted itself to the spelling of words are
so few that they show the futility of the endeavor, to
make the principle of speaking as you write one of
general application.
But if the theories for the reconstruction of English
spelling which have just been discussed must be pro-
nounced as impossible and visionary, it does not follow
that nothing can be done for the English spelling of the
present and of the future. We may refuse our support
to radical and revolutionary movements without pass-
ing to the other extreme of ultra-conservatism. There
//is a middle ground between the complete reform of
\y) English spelling and unquestioning acquiescence in and
acceptance of that which we have; and instead of at-
tempting the thoro reconstruction of our spelling, we
may more safely and with greater hope of success
strive for the improvement and simplification of our
present system. Any changes which are made must
be duly considered; they must be tested by the prin-
ciples which have governed the growth of the language
in the past, because it is only by the study of these
historical principles that we acquire a knowledge of
language and acquire safe rules of guidance. Each
change or each group of changes, therefore, offers a
special problem which demands special consideration.
ENGLISH SOUNDS 179
Only a few of the more important can be discussed
here.
A large number, perhaps the majority of instances,
in which the question of spelling arises, come under the
general head of choice between two spellings, both of
which already are in-^mrrent use. The determination
of the choice rests of course upon the circumstances of
each case, but a good rule of general application is, of
two spellings choQSjL_tii£ simpler. Other things being
equal, that is always the simpler and the preferable of
two spellings which is the_shorter, or which is in con-
formity with the more general phonetic practice of the
language. When one has the choice between a familiar
English spelling and a strange or unusual spelling, the
preference should be for the former. . Thus there is little
justification for the spelling gaol when we have the
form jail, or for the spelling troupe when we have
troop.1
In making simplifications in spelling, however, it
should be remembered that it is not necessary^ or Jndeed
possible, to be thoroly consistent. We may decide to
omit certain silent letters, but it does not follow that we
should omit all silent letters. We may omit the u in
honour without omitting it in course, thus spelling that
word like the noun corse. The only safe guiding rule is
to simplify spelling when there are advantages to bev
gained and no counterbalancing losses. Complete lists
1 " Early in the first scene of his Critic, Sheridan used the word
' troop ' in the sense of a theatrical company of actors ; also Malone, in
his edition of Shakespeare published in 1821 (Vol. iii, p. 175), uses the
word 'troop' in the same sense. I must quote them as my authority.
Perhaps I may be wrong, hut I prefer 'troop ' to ' troupe.' " H. M.
Trollope, Life ofMoliere, p. viii.
180 MODERN ENGLISH
of these possible simple spellings cannot be given here,
but a few of the classes of words affected may be indi-
cated.1
In general they will be found to fall under three main
heads, as follows :
(I) Of two possible spellings, choose the one which follows
the usual spelling of the language.
(a) Write center, meter, miter, theater, etc., like father,
winter, manner, etc.
(6) Write criticize, penalize, legalize, and so in all words
with the -ize suffix, avoiding thus the two forms -ise and -ize.
Also in the roots of words with the two spellings s and z,
choose z as being the usual representation for the sound;
examples are raze, teazel, vizor, devize, comprize, surprize,
and so forth.
(c) Write e (instead of se, oe) in word likes esthetic, ency-
clopedia, medieval, archeology, dieresis, etc.
(d) Write -ow instead of -ough in plow.
(e) Write -i for -y in gipsy.
(II) Omit silent letters wherever usage permits it.
(a) Write abridgment, judgment, acknowledgment, etc.,
instead of abridgement, etc. Write the plurals of all nouns
ending in o in -os, that is, potatos, tomatos, negros, pianos,
cargos, folios, etc.
(b) Write ax, adz, develop, domicil, envelop, glycerin, wo,
etc. , instead of axe, adze, develope, etc.
1 For further discussion, students are referred to the lists of double spell
'ngs given in Webster, Worcester, and the Standard Dictionaries ; also to
circulars of the Simplified Spelling Board, where lists are printed of words
in common use which are spelled in two or more ways. Attention may
be called also to the long lists of Amended Spellings at the end of the
Century Dictionary, together with the introductory remarks preceding
these lists. All interested in the question of English spelling should com-
municate with the Simplified Spelling Board, 1 Madison Avenue, New
York City, whose interesting publications will be sent free on application
ENGLISH SOUNDS 181
(c) Write bun, distil, fulfil, fulness, etc., instead of bunn,
distill, etc.
(d) Write wagon, fagot, woolen, etc. , instead of waggon,
faggot, woollen, etc.
(e) Omit the final -me of words like programme, etc.,
writing program, gram, diagram, etc. ; the final -te of words
like epaulette, writing epaulet, omelet, coquet, etc. ; the
final -ue of words like prologue, writing prolog, dialog, cata-
log, decalog, etc.
(f) Instead of honour, etc., write honor, ardor, fervor,
savior, color, etc.
(Ill) Use phonetic spelling whenever it seems advisable
to do so, that is, whenever usage has so far accustomed the
reader to the phonetic spelling that his attention will not be
distracted too much to the new form of the word. Some
phonetic spellings are of course now conventional and regu-
lar, as, for example, fancy, fantasy, with initial / instead of
ph. So also with fantom instead of phantom, and sulfur
instead of sulphur. By the same analogy we should also
write fonetic, fonograf, fosfate, fotograf, etc., spellings
which are at present questioned, but which are bound to be
the spellings of the future. The past tenses of verbs like
cross, crush, clip, mix, that is, verbs in which the stem ends
in a voiceless continuant or stop consonant, may be formed
merely by the addition of t, giving instead of crossed, crushed,
etc., the forms crost, crusht, dipt, etc. These phonetic spell-
ings are to be found frequently in the poets, whose writings,
making as they do a special appeal to the ear, are likely to
be more phonetic than those of prose authors ; but numeroui
instances of their use may also be found in works written in
prose. Likewise the spelling altho and tho are of not un-
common occurrence in literature, either with the apostrophe
added to indicate the loss of ugh (altho', tho'), or without the
ipostrophe. The omission of the ugh is a natural and easy
simplification, and the spelling tho, altho, and thoroly should
182 MODERN ENGLISH
be generally accepted. With many persons, some hesita-
tion is felt with respect to the form thru for through, re-
commended by the American Educational Association, the
Simplified Spelling Board, and various other bodies. The
spelling thru, however, is logical (u after r has the value u,
as in rule, rude, rune, ruminate, etc.), and a good deal of the
disfavor with which it is regarded is due to the novelty of the
form. But the use of any spelling cannot be made compul-
sory, and any one who disapproves of the form thru has per-
fect right to refuse to use it, altho the same liberty of
choice which one claims for oneself one should allow to others.
In spelling reform, as in all other developments in language,
we must trust to a frank interchange of opinion and a ready
acceptance of the best for the accomplishment of changes
that shall be of permanent and general value.
VI
ENGLISH WORDS
1. The Study of Words. The study of words is in
many respects the most approachable side of the study
of language. This is true partly because the word is,
in a way, an independent fact of language, and is
thus much more readily appreciated than are sounds
or inflections. Besides, the word has very immediate
connections with thought. A history of the words of a
language is almost a complete history of the thought
and the civilization of the people which speaks that
language. The study of words is also of very great
importance in the practical affairs of every-day life. One
of the most valuable accomplishments a person can have
is the ability to express himself clearly and forcibly in
language, and to do this he must know how to use words,
must know their significances, their connotations, and
their possibilities. Of course no one supposes that mere
information about words, however wide that information
may be, will make a good writer or speaker ; it is the
just combination of thought with its appropriate words
that is the result to be attained, and it is the proper
purpose of the study of words to provide the unclothed
thought with its fitting garb of expression.
All words have established themselves in the language
in one of two ways, first, either by original creation, that
is, the actual formation of new words or the new adapta-
184 MODERN ENGLISH
tion of old ones, this latter process being as much creation
as the formation of new words outright ; or second, by
borrowing from other languages. These two methods of
building up the vocabulary of the English language will
now be considered in detail.
2. Word Creation. The question which probably
rises first in the mind of the student of vocabulary is,
What is the ultimate origin of the native words of the
language with which we are so familiar? Did some
primitive language creator fashion all words at one fixed
time, and have we continued to use this original stock
since then without adding our creations to it ? Or does
the creation of words still continue as an active process?
To these questions the first answer is that by far the
greater number of words are inherited from countless gen-
erations of speakers of the language who have preceded
us. Our native words are therefore mainly a tradi-
tional inheritance just as our other common social posses-
sions, as, for example, the organization of the family or
the state, are traditional inheritances. They go back so
far that their first origin is prehistoric and can be con-
sidered and explained only with the aid of theory.
The earliest and most primitive theoretical stage of
language about which it is fruitful to reflect is the period
of root-creation. To understand this stage of language
we may examine the parallel to it in the language of
children when they are first learning to speak. To
a child such a word as " ball " may mean anything which
has one of the characteristics of a ball, for example, that
of roundness. Thus he may call an apple "ball," or a
round stone, or the moon, or anything round. To him the
word "ball" expresses the root-idea of anything with
ENGLISH WORDS 185
the quality of roundness. So to a child the word " choo-
choo," to use a childish word, may mean a train of cars,
or a steam engine, or even things which to an older and
more observant person are not at all like these, for
example, a tea-kettle with the steam coming from it. In
very primitive stages of human development we may
suppose a state of affairs similar to that in the language
of the child. Language consisted of a more or less
limited number of generalized word-forms, or root- words,
of wide application, but of corresponding indefiniteness
of meaning.
The first thing which primitive speakers would natu-
rally strive to do, would be to make these root-words
more specific in their values so that language could \|e
more exact. There would thus begin a development and
specialization in the use of words which has continued
to the present day, and which will continue so long as
the language is a living, spoken, and written medium
of expression.
These later developments in specialization did not often
take the direction of the creation of new roots. This is
a power which probably became restricted in very early
periods of the development of language, and which
is now almost completely lost in English, being exem-
plified only in the invention of words the mere sound of
which is descriptive of the objects they name. Examples
of such "echoic words," as they have been called, are
boom, fizz, simmer, sizzle, pop, snicker, whir, whiz, etc. More
usually, however, specialization in vocabulary has come
about in historic times not through the creation of new
roots, but by means of the adaptation and development of
old material. Such adaptations are still to be regarded as
186 MODERN ENGLISH
creations in language, since it is by an internal develop-
ment of its own resources that the language increases
its power and variety. This remains to-day a frequent
method of growth in language, and some of the more
important of these changes, which may be grouped under
the general head of differentiation in vocabulary, will
now be considered.
3. Differentiation by Gradation. As a means of
differentiating the meaning of words, gradation is no
longer an active principle in English, altho the work-
ings of it in earlier periods are still to be observed in
many Modern English words. The way in which words
are differentiated in meaning by gradation may be best
described by means of an illustration. We have, for
example, the verb " drive," with its principal parts
u drive," " drove," " driven." The form " drive" may also
be a noun, as in the phrase " a long drive " ; so also
" drove " appears as a noun in " a drove of cattle " ; and
the first three letters of " driven " in " a drift of snow."
We have, therefore, in these words a sort of root-form
of word for the general idea of driving, which might be
expressed by merely the consonant framework of it as
drv or drf. To differentiate this 'generalized root-
meaning, the language places different vowels in this
consonant frame, in this instance the vowels ai, 6, and i.
Gradation is most readily observed in Modern English
in the tense formation of the irregular or strong verbs,
as " sing," " sang," " sung," to which add also the noun
"song"; "ride," "rode," "ridden," to which add the
nouns "raid" and "road"; "rise," "rose," "risen";
" bear," " bore," " borne," to which add the noun " bier,"
that upon which a body is borne, and " bairn," one who
ENGLISH WORDS 187
is born in the natural sense, and the nouns " birth " and
" burden." Many of the words of the language are thus
held together in such gradation groups, all of the words
of the respective groups having the same general meaning
but each being a specific application of that meaning.
Not all words, however, are members of gradation groups,
some of the oldest and most familiar words in the lan-
guage, such as u house," " stone," " water," etc., appar-
ently standing quite separate and independent. Words
of this sort are, therefore, the only recognizable surviv-
ing representatives of the original root-words.
4. Differentiation by Composition. The method
of word formation or differentiation by composition is
one that has existed from very early times and is still
actively employed in the English language. It consists
not in changing the root-form of the word, but in add-
ing something to it, in placing side by side two previ-
ously independent elements, which then fuse into a single
meaning, different from the meaning of either element
taken singly. The most obvious kind of composition is
that in which we have the juxtaposition of two words
each of which, taken separately, has a definite and clear
meaning. We may call this the composition of full-
words, the various kinds of full-words still compounded
in English being as follows :
(a) Noun + noun compounds, as in typewriter, door-sill,
saw-horse, window-frame, pleasure-trip, pleasureground,
Mayfair, shot-gun, silvertip (the grizzly bear), etc. In all
these instances we have two ideas loosely approximated, to
form a new idea, the specific value of the new idea being
intrusted to the inference of the speaker or hearer. This
method of composition approaches the use of the adjective
188 MODERN ENGLISH
before the noun, but differs from it, as can be seen by com-
paring " a gold ring" and "a goldmine"; or the sentences
" This cane has a silver tip" and " This bear is a silvertip."
(6) Adjective + noun compounds, as in blackbird, black-
berry, Broadtvay, highway, whitewash, hotbed, busybody,
shortcut, quickstep, sweetbread, etc.
(c) Noun + adjective compounds, as in penny -wise, pound-
foolish, water-tight, grass-green, man-shaped, purse-proud,
stone-cold ; cf. EUng Richard III, Act I, Sc. 2, 1. 5 : " Poor
key -cold figure of a holy king."
(d) Adverb + verb compounds, forming nouns, as in
downfall, downpour, output, upstart, upshot, offshoot, undertow,
etc.
(e) Verb + adverb compounds, forming nouns, in words
usually of only very colloquial character, as in * the go-by"
" a come-down," "a break-up," " a cut-off," u a walk-over,"
" a dug-out," etc.
(/) Adjective or adverb -f- adjective or adverb, as in blue-
green, unheard-of, ever-young, evergreen, long-winded, worldly-
wise, outright.
(g) Adverb + verb compounds, forming verbs, as in undo,
overdo, underrate, gainsay, withstand, etc.
(h) Preposition compounds, as in into, because, beside,
alongside, unto, until, etc.
(i) Particle compounds, as in nevertheless, altho(ugh),
altogether, notwithstanding, always, etc.
(f) Verb stem (originally imperative) + noun, expressing
the object of the action of the verb idea, as in breakwater,
breakfast, driveway, standpoint, scapegrace, scarecrow, turn-
key, carryall, etc.1
(k) Phrase compounds, groups of words which through
long custom have come to be written together, as in father-
1 See Bradley, Making of English, p. 114. To this group belongs
view-point, a compound so recent that it is regarded as objectionable by
many.
ENGLISH WORDS 189
in-laio, man-of-war, tradesman (originally trade's man, a
man of trade), goodnight (from / wish you a good night))
hand-to-mouth, etc.
It is often very difficult to tell whether a compound
should be written with a hyphen or hyphens or without
them. The usage of good writers, of dictionaries, and
of the printing houses differs widely in this respect. In
general we may say that the closer the compound the
less need there is of the hyphen. It is a safe rule, there-
fore, to use the hyphen only where it seems necessary,
and this will have to be determined largely by one's own
judgment and observation. It should be noted also that
there is often no essential difference between words which
are written as compounds and other words which are
never so written, as, for example, "out of" and "into"
in the sentence, " He fell out of the frying-pan into the
fire." So words like "notwithstanding," "neverthe-
less," etc., are written together, whereas the approxi-
mately equivalent words, "on the contrary," "in spite
of," etc., are never so written. The question is one
which often has to be left to the arbitrary decision of
usage.
5. Obscure Compounds. Attention has already
been called to the fact (pp. 142 ff.) that one element of a
compound word tends to become obscured in pronuncia-
tion, and thus to lose its significance. As result of this
tendency we now have a great many words in English
which were formerly compounds of full-words, and
which were felt as such, but which now no longer show
the elements of which they are composed. Examples are
window, from Old English wind + edge, " wind-eye " ;
190 MODERN ENGLISH
nostril, from Old English nos + ]>yrel, " nose-hole " ;
starboard, from Old English steor + bord, " steer-board,"
the board (cf. sea-board), or side of a boat, from which
the steering is done ; hussy, from Old English hus -f wif,
" house-wife " ; woman, from Old English wif + man ;
gossip, from Old English god + sib, literally " god-friend,"
used first of the sponsors at baptism, then of any famil-
iar friend of the family, then by natural transition to its
present meaning of gossip; stirrup, from Old English
stiff -h Tap, " mounting-rope " ; dipsey (as in dipsey
chantey), from deep -f sea; brimstone, from brin (by
metathesis from " burn," cf. Germ, brennen) + stone,
" burn-stone " ; barn, from Old English ber + cern, ber =
" barley," cern, " building," the whole word meaning,
therefore, " building in which barley was kept " ; or-
chard, from Old English ort + geard, literally " garden
yard," the first element being probably the same as
Latin hortus. In a word like cupboard the compound has
become obscured in pronunciation, altho the spelling
still keeps clear the elements of which it is composed.
In many instances popular etymology has endeavored to
make full compounds out of words which were of quite
different etymological origin. Thus the word hiccough,
pronounced hickup, seems really to be derived from a
form hicket, the first syllable hick- being allied to the
form hack-, as in "a hacking cough," and the syllable
-et being merely a diminutive suffix. The spelling hic-
cough arose apparently because the word was thought
to have something to do with the word cough. Other
familiar instances of similar popular etymologies are
sparrow-grass from asparagus ; ash-falt from asphalt ;
causeway from the French word chaussee, meaning a
ENGLISH WORDS 191
high-road; crayfish, or popularly crawfish, from Old
French crevice, Modern French Icrevisse. The word
hackneyed, as in " a hackneyed phrase" meaning some-
thing worn down from constant usage, derived from the
Old French haquenSe, " an ambling horse or mare," then
by extension, any horse put out to public hire, and by
still further extension, anything overworked, is some-
times etymologized into hack-kneed. In all these in-
stances more or less unfamiliar words are explained in
terms of other words, the forms of which at least are
more familiar, altho their connection in meaning with
the original word is often quite remote.
6. Compositional Elements. Besides the compo-
sition of full- words, English makes frequent use of cer-
tain word-forms which, taken separately, do not have
any clear and full meaning, but which are used only as
prefixes and suffixes to make more specific the meaning
of other words. These compositional elements, as they
may be called, may possibly all have been full- words at
some remote period, but if so this full meaning of most
of them has been lost more completely than it has in the
case of the obscure compounds mentioned in the pre-
ceding section. The method by which compositional
elements are used to differentiate the meaning of words
is too familiar to need extended illustration. The ele-
ment -dom, for example, forms compounds like kingdom,
wisdom, freedom, etc. ; -hood forms the compounds
knighthood, childhood, manhood, priesthood, etc. ; -ship
appears in friendship, kinship, worship, fellowship, etc. ;
-er is very common as a suffix in nouns of agency, as
in baker, writer, singer, driver, teetotaler, abstainer, etc.
Examples of prefixes are a- in arise, alight ; be- in bedeck,
192 MODERN ENGLISH
berate, bespeak, etc. It is to be noted that the free use
of compositional elements to form new words has been
very much restricted by traditional usage. With the
suffix -th we can form the noun youth from young, truth
from true, mirth from mer(ry), wealth from weal, health
from heal, etc. ; but we cannot form gloomth from gloom,
or wrongth from wrong, or illih from ill, etc. Moreover,
certain compositional elements tend to take on a very
specific value, not of course to the extent of becoming
full-words, altho they acquire the power of changing
the root word in a very definite way. Thus the prefix
be- has acquired to a considerable extent the power of
giving a derogatory or slightly contemptuous sense to
the word with which it is compounded, as in bepraise,
befog, bedeck, bedizen, bedevil, belabor, bedaub, besmear,
bemire, befuddle, becalm, bedraggle, bemuse. This value
of be- is illustrated in the following stanza of Kipling's
Cruisers :
As our mother, the Frigate, bepainted and fine,
Made play for her bully, the Ship of the Line ;
So we, her bold daughters by iron and fire,
Accost and destroy to our master's desire.
So also the suffix -ard, when it is limited to persons, is
used only in a derogatory sense, as in coward, sluggard,
niggard, wizard, dullard, dastard, bastard, dotard, drunk-
ard, beside which we have only a few nouns, such as
blizzard, gizzard, custard, mustard, etc., of various etymo-
logical origins. The suffix -ish also has an interesting
history. In the earlier periods of the language it was
used to form adjectives of quality without particular
connotation, as in Englisc, " English," folcisc, " folkish "
(i. e., to use the modern Latin equivalent word, " pop-
ENGLISH WORDS 193
ular ") ; and Chaucer (Troilus and Criseyde, V, 1. 1813)
even speaks of "hevenish inelodye." Later the suffix
came to be applied to adjectives in order to indicate a
slight degree of the quality named by the adjective, as
bluish, brackish, sweetish, etc., and then, perhaps through
such words as boyish, girlish, to give a somewhat con-
temptuous or scornful turn to the word, as in womanish,
mannish, childish, as compared with womanly, manly,
childlike, and in other adjectives like bookish, heathenish,
etc.1 In Chaucer, however, the suffixes -ly and -ish had
not yet been differentiated. This is shown by his phrase,
"heavenish melody," with which compare his use of
fiendly where we should now have to say fiendish :
That man hath a feendly herte.
Book of the Duchess, 593.
Inflectional elements are often closely related to com-
positional elements, and, as has already been pointed out,2
many of them were probably independent full-words
which have become very much obscured in the course of
time.
7. Differentiation by Metaphor. This method of
differentiating the meanings of words consists in chang-
ing a word from one order of thought to another without
changing its form. This may be done in various ways,
as follows :
(1) A concrete term may be changed from one concrete
sense to another, as, for example, the word crane, originally
1 It is interesting to note that a parallel development has taken place
in the case of the same ending, -isch, in German, as in words like diebisch,
narrisch, etc. See Brugmann, The Nature and Origin of the Noun Genders,
pp. 28-30.
2 See above, pp. 56-58.
13
194 MODERN ENGLISH
the name of the bird, becomes also the name for the hoisting
machine, the most notable thing about both cranes being their
long legs. The word horse, first the name of the animal,
may mean also a piece of gymnasium apparatus, or a rack
for hanging objects on, as a clothes-horse. The noun
key from its first literal sense passes to numerous meta-
phorical senses, as, for example, its use to designate a book
which gives answers to problems contained in another book ;
or we may speak of an important fact as u the key to the
mystery." Primarily the word chest meant only a box, usu-
ally a box in which valuables were kept; but about the
sixteenth century it came to be used also of the framework
of the breast which encloses the heart, a figurative use which
is exemplified in various conscious metaphors before it
settles down into the literal meaning. Thus we have the
following couplet in Shakspere's Richard II, Act I, Sc. 1, 11.
180-181 :
" A jewel in a ten-times barr'd-up chest,
Is a bold spirit in a loyal breast."
Shakspere's contemporary, Sir John Davies, elaborates the
same figure in the following stanza of his Nosce Te Jpsum
wi$h a fullness of detail which to a modern writer would be
quite impossible now that the word chest has acquired literal
and commonplace meanings :
" O ignorant poor man ! what dost thou beare
Lockt up within the casket of thy brest?
What iewels, and what riches hast thou there !
What heavenly treasure in so weake a chest! 5>1
This feeling for the figurative use of chest may be further
illustrated by the use of box in a similar way in the following
passage from a seventeenth century writer : "I had yours
lately by a safe hand, wherein I find you open to me all the
Boxes of your Breast." 2
1 Davies, Nosce Te Ipsum, ed. Grosart, I, 114.
2 Howell, Familiar Letter^ ed. Jacobs, U, 378.
ENGLISH WORDS 195
The parts of the human body are used very frequently with
this transferred metaphorical value. Thus head may be used
of the head of a nail, screw, or pin ; of a head of lettuce ; the
front of an engine, as illustrated by " head- light "; and of
many other similar objects ; we also speak of the leg of a
table or chair ; the foot of a mountain ; the hand of a watch
or dial ; the eye of a needle ; the nose of a boat or ship ; the
ear, meaning handle, of a bottle, as in Cowper's John
Gilpin'sRide, " Each bottle had a curling ear " j1 the mouth of
a vessel or a river ; the beard of a head of wheat or barley j
the teeth of a saw ; the tongue of a wagon ; the cheek of
a peach ; the arm of a lever ; the bosom of the earth ; and
there are many other instances, literally too numerous to
mention.
(2) A concrete word may be changed from a physical sense
to an intellectual or spiritual sense, as the adjective burn-
ing in "a burning desire," or cold in "a cold disposition,"
or heavy in " a heavy heart." The word sad had originally a
physical meaning which persists, however, only in a few uses,
like sad-iron, or as descriptive of heavy, soggy cake or bread.
The adjective sullen has a somewhat similar history. It is
derived ultimately from a Late Latin solanus, through the
French, meaning " single, solitary." Thus Chaucer in his
Parlement of Foules (1. 607) has the cuckoo say that if he
can have his mate, the other birds may be sullen, or in
Chaucer's spelling, soleyn, all their lives. This meaning
persists fairly late, as may be seen from its use by Defoe
(Essay on Projects, London, 1697, p. 244): " But there is a
direct Signification of Words, or a Cadence in Expression,
which we call speaking Sense ; this, like Truth, is sullen and
the same, ever was and will be so, in what manner and in
what Language soever 7t is express'd." From single or soli-
1 The word ear, in " ear of corn," is etymologically a different word,
though now it is usually thought of as being a metaphorical use of the
name of part of the body.
MODERN ENGLISH
tary in the physical sense to the meaning aloof, sullen, in the
spiritual or mental sense, is an easy transition.
(3) An intellectual word, on the other hand, may be used
to designate a concrete person or object, as the word wit, in
its intellectual sense meaning brilliance or ingenuity, in its
concrete sense, as in the sentence " He is a great wit," mean-
ing " a witty man." So trust in its intellectual sense is the
name of an abstract quality, in its concrete sense it is the
name of a group of men organized for certain purposes of
business. Dialectally and colloquially, also, the abstract
noun misery takes a concrete sense in sentences like "I've
got a misery in my back " ; compare also the use of pain
as both abstract and concrete.
(4) Words appropriate to living beings may be transferred
to inanimate objects. This process is frequently exemplified
in poetry, where Ruskin has given it the name "pathetic
fallacy." Thus Coleridge in The Ancient Manner speaks of
4 'the silly buckets," and Ruskin quotes such lines as " the
cruel, crawling foam." l In ordinary colloquial use we have
such phrases as " a dumb waiter," " a blind alley," " a crying
need," etc. These are, or were originally, very strong meta-
phors and had the effect of personifying the objects to which
they applied. They differ thus from the examples given under
(1), such as the " leg of a chair," which is a perfectly matter-
of-fact use of the word " leg."
(5) Words appropriate to one group of sense perceptions
may be extended in their use by applying them to a different
group, as when we speak of " aloud color," or " a sweet
voice," "a dull sound," "a bright melody," etc.
1 Modern Painters, Part IV, Chapter XII : " The foam is not cruel,
neither does it crawl. The state of mind which attributes to it these char-
acters of a living creature is one in which the reason is unhinged by grief.
All violent feelings have the same effect. They produce in us a falseness in
all our impressions of external things, which I would generally characterize
as the ' Pathetic Fallacy.' "
ENGLISH WORDS 197
8. Differentiation by Functional Change. One of
the most interesting of the ways in which our vocabu-
lary is given variety in use is by the passage of a word
from one part of speech to another. Modern English is
especially free in its use of this kind of differentiation,
or specialization in words, as is shown by the following
illustrations : 1
(1) Adjectives become nouns, as in " the good, the true, and
the beautiful "; " so much to the good " ; " he has gone to the
bad " ; " he was ordered to the front " ; " a nickel " = a five-
cent piece; " a pug " = a pug dog; "the young of the
eagle " ; " the village green " ; "a square " — a city block or
square; "the blues"; "the pine barrens" This happens
frequently in the case of proper adjectives, which lose their
adjective value and become pure nouns, as china, from " China
ware " ; calico, from " Calicut cloth" ; bantam, from " Ban-
tam fowl."
(2) Nouns become adjectives, as in " a New York bank,'1
" a beefsteak dinner," " a dinner card," " an insurance agent,"
" a railway official," "a city superintendent," " a water fam-
ine," etc. 2
1 Note how closely some words in Modern English, because of the vari-
ous functional and figurative values which they may have, have come to
approach the use of root-words in their ability to express a large group of
related ideas. The word head, for example, may be a noun naming the
part of the body ; or the beginning of anything, as the head of a liat, or
page, or river or lake ; or anything shaped somewhat like a head, as a
head of cabbage, the head of a drum, the head of a nail or screw, etc. It
may also be a verb, as in the sentence, " He heads the list," or " This
lettuce heads early," i. e., makes a head. It may further be an adjective,
as in " the head waters of the rivers," " the head clerk/' " the head (cf.
chief, from Latin caput through French chef) difficulty," etc.
1 Some of these examples are essentially the same as the noun -f noun
compounds described above, differing only in that they are not written with
hyphens. This method of differentiation is sometimes adversely criticised
by grammarians and rhetoricians. It is, however, one of the most active
methods of word change in present English, and the language would be
much the poorer without this capability.
198 MODERN ENGLISH
(3) Verbs become nouns, as in "a brand of goods," from
Ihe act of branding ; " a drive of logs " ; " the kelp " (i. e.,
the servants) ; " to give one a lift " : ' '&Jind " ; " the domi-
nant, primordial beast who had made his kill and found it
good " (London, Call of the Wild) ; " Yield them permit to
eat the sacred corn " (Aldrich, Judith and Holof ernes) ; "a
combine."
(4) Nouns become verbs, as in " to house the poor" ; "to
carpet a room " ; " to stone a cat " ; " to bridge a stream " ;
" to board a ship or train."
(5) Pronouns become nouns, as in (i In the south only
the shes with young and the fat he-bears retire for the sleep."
(Roosevelt, Hunting the Grisly, p. 54.)
(6) Adverbs become verbs, as in " He downed his oppo-
nent the first round " ; " Then he offs with his hat."
(7) Adverbs become nouns, as " Now is the accepted time " •
" A noise was heard from without " ; " I have just come from
there."
(8) Adjectives become verbs, as in " The house fronts the
street " ; " Acid sours milk '' ; " Who will brown the toast ? "
" He backed the horse," etc.
(9) Prepositions become adjectives, as in " a through
train"; " the under dog"; " by product"; in bystander,
byword, etc., the preposition has been united to another word
forming a close compound. The word by-laws is sometimes
mistakenly supposed to be made up of the preposition by +
the noun law, the compound having the sense of secondary or
minor law. In origin, however, the element by in by-law is a
Scandinavian word meaning "town," as it appears in place-
names like Whitby, Derby, etc. The original meaning of the
compound was therefore " town law." and this, in distinction
to the general or national law, readily passed Over into the
derived modern meaning of secondary or minor law.
(10) Adverbs become adjectives, as in "the off horse";
* the then Bishop of Lichfield " (Newman, Apologia, p. 31) *
ENGLISH WORDS 19&
u waiting for the down mail to Falmouth " (ibid., p. 32) ;
" outer darkness " ; " over rocks and down timber " (Roose-
velt, Hunting the Grisly, p. 59).
(11) Verbs usually intransitive become transitive, as in
"Cornell will row Wisconsin "; "to walk a horse"; "to
walk the streets " ; " to jump a fence " ; cf . Whitman, in
Captain, my Captain: "I walk the deck my captain lies."
(12) Verbs usually transitive become intransitive, as in
"I don't sing, but I 'm fond of playing."
To some slight extent we also have differentiation by
accent in Modern English. Thus we have the verbs perfume',
compound', contract', present', etc., with the corresponding
couns per'fume, com/pound, con'tract, pres'ent, etc. Some-
times the difference in accent is accompanied by other slight
differences of form and pronunciation, as in the adjectives
hu'man, humane', an' tic, antique'.
9. Slang. Any consideration of creation in language,
or the differentiation in the meanings of words, must
necessarily take up the question of slang. There is an
initial difficulty, however, in that it is extremely hard to
give a satisfactory definition of slang. The matter is
very largely one of individual feeling. What is re-
garded as slang by one person is regarded as perfectly
correct, colorless English by another. Thus the phrases
" on the wrong tack," " to go back on one," or " to give
oneself away," etc., may be regarded by one speaker
merely as good vigorous colloquial English, whereas
another over-cautious speaker may reject them as utterly
reprehensible and " slangy. " So also the phrase "out of
sight " acquired a certain slang use which for a time was
widely current ; but certainly no one would think that
Lowell meant to use the phrase with this value in the
following lines from the Vision of Sir Launjal:
200 MODERN ENGLISH
He sculptured every summer delight
In his halls and chambers out of sight.
A similar illustration is to be found in the use of " fire "
in the sense of discharge or expel, as in " to fire a person
out of a room " ; exactly the same occurs in Shakspere,
without any of the connotation of slang, in the following
lines, the thought of which is the presence of two spirits,
one good and one evil, in man's heart :
Yet this shall I ne'er know, but live in doubt,
Till my bad angel fire my good one out.
Sonnets, cxliv.
Indeed the feeling for slang is on the whole of rather
modern origin. In Shakspere's day and earlier the lan-
guage was free to be as expressive as it could and in
any way in which it could. Slang can arise only when
certain things are not permitted, for there is always the
flavor of forbidden fruit in slang. In reading early
authors, consequently, one is frequently struck by forms
of expression which would have been slang if the con-
ventions of the time had been more rigid. Thus Chaucer
(Parlement of Foules, 1. 595) says : There been mo sterres,
god wot, than a paire, " There are more stars, God knows,
than a pair," which is a close parallel to the recent slang
expression, " There 's more than one pebble on the beach."
In the Digby Plays (p. 14, 1. 338) occurs the expression,
thou to make me a knight, that were on the newe, which
cannot fail to remind one of the modern " on the side."
An Elizabethan critic, Richard Carew, wrote a little
treatise on the excellency of the English tongue, about
the year 1595, in which he illustrates the richness of the
English language by showing in how many different
ways we can get rid of a person; his list is as follows,
ENGLISH WORDS 201
and it is interesting to see how many of his phrases
would now fall under the general condemnation as
slang: " neither cann any tongue (as I am pers waded)
deliuer a matter with more varietye then ours, both
plainely and by prouerbes and Metaphors ; for example,
when wee would be rid of one, wee vse to saye Bee going,
trudge, pack, be faring, hence, awaye, shifte, and, by cir-
cumlocution, rather your roome then your company e,
Letts see your backe, com againe when I bid you, when
you are called, sent for, intreated, willed, desiered, inuited,
spare vs your place, another in your steede, a shipp of salte
for you, saue your credite, you are next the doore, the
doore is open for you, theres noe bodye holdes you, no
bodie teares your sleeue, etc." l
The term slang is sometimes used in a very wide
sense to include all those characteristics of language
that one disapproves of which do not come under the
head of bad grammar or of vulgar and improper speech.
Such a definition of slang, however, is decidedly too
wide. For there is a certain group of words with very
clearly denned characteristics which everybody feels as
having something in common, a spirit or tone, to which
we should limit the term slang. To fall in this group
a word must possess certain elements of novelty and
originality in its use, it must be of a somewhat quaint,
picturesque, playful, or humorous color, and above all
it must have patness, freshness, and timeliness in its
applications. Slang words, however, are always more
readily felt than described, and the best way to consider
them is, perhaps, to take up the various types of words
which fall in the class.
1 In Gregory Smith, Elizabethan Critical Essays, II, 2t2.
202 MODERN ENGLISH
(1) Counter words as slang. By counter words are
meant such words as are chosen by common social un-
derstanding to do service for a great variety of uses.
These words thus become a sort of blank counter for
certain ideas to which we do not then give exact and
definite expression. The invention of such words is a
social convenience ; it is not always necessary to state
precisely what we mean, and it is therefore often con-
venient to have an accepted, conventional word to take
the place of a specific word. Such counter words in
present use are words like nice (for the precise meaning
of which see the dictionary), in all sorts of phrases, as
in " a nice time," " a nice walk," " a nice place," "a nice
day," " a nice dinner," etc. ; or its contrasting counter
word, awful, as in " an awful job," " awful weather,"
" an awful bore," etc. Counter words because of their
constant use tend to become weakened in value, to be-
come almost colorless in meaning, with the result that
they indicate merely a general attitude of mind of the
speaker as favorable or unfavorable to the objects spoken
of. Owing to this tendency, it frequently becomes
necessary to replace old worn-out counter words by new
ones. At the time of the present writing, for example,
the adjective fierce is much used as a general slang term
of disapproval ; anything which is unpleasant is fierce.
Whether or not fierce will become a generally used
counter word, like nice and awful, and will thus weaken
to a vague general meaning, time only will tell. The
likelihood is, however, that in a short time it will alto-
gether disappear. Looking back over only a few years,
one can recall numbers of counter words, or phrases,
which sprang up and were used for a time and then
ENGLISH WORDS 20S
dropped completely out. If we examine the literature
of earlier periods we shall find that each had its own
counter words. Thus in the eighteenth century the
counter word used in commendatory senses equivalent
to our nice was the word elegant. It was used in all the
ways in which nice is now used, and in certain directions
its use was more extensive, as in such phrases as " the
elegant author of the Essay on Man," "An elegant essay,
novel, or poem," etc. It has persisted to the present time,
mainly in the phrase, " An elegant time." In the Eliza-
bethan period the favorite counter word, equivalent to
nice and elegant, was fair. Such a play as Shakspere's
Love's Labour 's Lost, which is very contemporary in its
diction, is full of illustrations ; note especially the begin-
ning of scene one in act four. The variety of its use
may perhaps be better illustrated by the following pas-
sage in prose, taken from one of the works of a contem-
porary of Shakspere :
" There is now building in Amiens a very faire Nunnery
for the same Carmelite Nunnes, which do now live in
another Nunnery that is more obscure and less delightful
for their contemplation. They remove shortly from that
wherein they now live to that which is now building, because
it is a more private and solitary place for their meditation,
and the service of God. Unto this new Nunnery there
belongeth a faire garden full of fine spacious walkes, beset
with sundry pleasant trees. I was at the monastery of the
Capucins, in whose church there were two faire altars, with
many pictures of Christ and Saint Francis. They have a
faire garden belonging to their Monastery, neare to which
they have a Cloister, wherein are hanged many religious
pictures, emblemes, and posies tending to mortification.
" At Saint Germans Church there is a wondrous rich altar,
204 MODERN ENGLISH
very abundantly decked with precious ornaments, especially
a gilt Tabernacle. This is the fairest Altar by many degrees
that I saw in all the City.
" The towne house which is very neare to the gate as you
come into the city from Pickeney is very /air, being three
Btories high, and built with bricke, having goodly armes
in it.
"The fairest cage of birds that I saw in al France, was
at the signe of the Ave Maria in Amiens, the workmanship
whereof was very curious with gilt wyres.
" A little on this side Paris, even at the towns end, there is
thefayrest Gallowes that ever I saw, built upon a little hil-
lock called Mount Falcon, which consisteth of f ourteene fair
pillars of free-stone : this gallowes was made in the time of
the Guisian Massacre, to hang the Admiral of France Chatil-
lion, who was a Protestant, Anno Dom. 1572." 1
The question of the attitude which we shall assume
towards the use of these counter words is of considerable
interest and importance. It is sometimes said that we
should avoid using such words of generalized meaning,
that to do so impoverishes thought, and that we should
always strive to use definite and specific words. But
suppose the idea we want to express is not definite and
specific, but vague and general? Suppose we meet a
person casually and in friendly salutation remark that it
is a nice day ? Does not the word nice express there all
that it is necessary to express ? It shows that we have
in general kindly feelings towards the weather and no-
body cares particularly whether it is because of the warm-
ness or coolness or wetness or dryness of it. In short,
there are many occasions when we need to express indefi-
1 Coryat's Crudities, reprinted from the edition of 1611, London, 1776,
Vol. I, p. 19. The concluding paragraph is on p. 26.
ENGLISH WORDS 205
nite and conventional ideas or feelings, and for this pur-
pose we need indefinite and conventional words. There
is, therefore, a proper time for the use of counter words,
and then no other words would take their place. When
the mind has occasion to use definite and specific words
to express its thought it will look about and find these
words ; but the person who never uses any other than
colorless, indefinite, and general words does so because
the character of his thought is always colorless, com-
monplace, and vague. The corrective, therefore, of a
too vague and general use of words is not merely to
discontinue the use of the offending words, but to have
something really definite to say.
(2) Slang as picturesque metaphor. This is probably
the source of the largest number of slang words. They
originate from a striking and novel metaphor which is
almost always of a ridiculous, or at least humorous, color,
because of a grotesque contrast between the literal and
the figurative meanings of the word. Thus recent slang
has taken the two nouns bird and peachy and has used
them in all manner of commendatory senses ; anything
admirable or excellent may be spoken of as a bird or a
peach. A person who expresses an opinion differing
from one's own may be said " to be off his base," a met-
aphor apparently taken from base -ball. Or one whose
mental operations are peculiar is described as " cracked,"
or " off his nut," both being derived from the metaphor
of the head as a nut. The word kick is used in a slang,
metaphorical sense " to oppose " or " to object." Origi-
nally used of buckling a saddle to a horse's back, the
word cinch, in its slang use, now means to have a tight
hold on anything, a sure thing, or an easy time, etc. The
206 MODERN ENGLISH
metaphorical use of fire, probably from the figure of
firing a gun, has already been mentioned ; with it may
be compared the similar use of bounce. The word pull
passes in slang from its literal meaning to the metaphor-
ical one of influence. In the same general group belong
the words graft, grafter, which literally apply to the
grafting of something extraneous to an original stock,
as a twig on a branch, but metaphorically to the person
who gets more than the legitimate income from his posi-
tion. In a recent trial a motion to dismiss a slander
suit was made on the ground that grafter was not a recog-
nized word of the knguage. The judge wisely overruled
the motion, and if he had not, the report goes on to say,
" what legal redress would a man have when called a
muckraker or a mollycoddle, both of which words are of
much later vogue than grafter f " Illustrations of these
metaphorical slang creations might be increased indefi-
nitely. Each day in each community the number is
added to. Most of such inventions have a very short
existence ; they take the popular fancy for a time, are
excessively used, and then are crowded out by some new
novelty. It should be observed, however, that this
method of word creation by the invention of slang
through metaphor is a natural linguistic process that
has gone on for a long time, that to it the language
owes much of its effectiveness and expressiveness, and
that as a natural helpful linguistic process, our attitude
towards it should not be too scornful. It needs only
the acceptance of usage, for example, to make a good,
expressive word of the slang word kick. In many in-
stances words which were originally striking and pic-
turesque metaphors have been accepte4 into convex
ENGLISH WORDS 207
tional good use, as, for example, the word sulky, the
name of a vehicle, first used because the vehicle being
one-seated suggested the idea of selfishness and sulki-
ness. Numerous other examples have already been
given under the discussion of differentiation by metaphor.
The main reason why slang words do not now make
their way into good use so freely as they did formerly,
is that our standards and conventions in language have
become more fixed. We are inclined to estimate lan-
guage not immediately from the point of view of its
power and value in the expression of thought and feel-
ing, as was the tendency in Shakspere's day, but from
the point of view of its agreement or disagreement with
the preceding traditional use of the language. In what
we call the lower forms of society, however, for ex-
ample, among street Arabs and gamins, such a thing
as the idea of slang does not exist. To another person
their speech may be very slangy, because it is contrary
to the customs and traditions which he has accepted as
established and correct. But to the boy or man on the
street all language is used merely for the sake of ex-
pression; to him that is its only purpose and justifica-
tion, and he consequently feels free to create and
change as much as he pleases. In other words, lan-
guage is more likely to be a natural, growing, develop-
ing medium of communication among the untrained
and unconventional than it is among the educated and
conventional.
(3) Slang as cant phraseology. Every profession, or
every group of people engaged in the same activity, tends
to develop a vocabulary peculiar to itself, which we may
call a class, or technical, or cant vocabulary. It is the
208 MODERN ENGLISH
professional jargon of the respective groups of people.
Thus the stock markets have invented a great number
of professional words and phrases, such as bull and bear ;
one is long on a certain stock when one is well provided
with it, and short on it when one is inadequately pro-
vided ; a deal by which one person is shut out of a cer-
tain combination is known as a freeze out ; and so with
many other words and phrases. Another group of per-
sons which has developed a very rich cant slang vocabu-
lary is the college and school group. The college boy
flunks on examination, or makes a fluke of a recitation;
when he or his professor talks vaguely and beside the
point, he drools, and so on indefinitely. Still other
groups which make frequent use of cant terms are
sportsmen of various kinds, the race-track, the ken-
nel, the base-ball and foot-ball field, for example, each
having its own special vocabulary ; and perhaps more
than any other, the floating population of crooks and
tramps. In this last group we need only mention such
words as crook, hobo, bum, booze, etc., to suggest hosts
of others. It should be noted that the cant vocabulary
of one group is largely unintelligible to another group,
the cant terms of the stock-markets being understood
only by those in that business. It is obvious that
the cant terms of a profession or of any group of people
may cease to have slang value to the people who habitu-
ally use them, becoming to them merely the literal
names for the activities of their profession and thus a
part of their technical vocabulary. Words of this sort,
however, seldom pass beyond the limits of their group
into general use.
(4) Slang as picturesque sound. Often a slang word
ENGLISH WORDS 209
does not apparently have any clear logical meaning, but
comes into use merely because its sound is amusing or
suggestive of some idea. Such a word is the now cur-
rent skidoo, the present-day equivalent of the older ske-
daddle. Similar words are mosey, meaning to walk
slowly and aimlessly; snide meaning cunning, tricky;
biff, a blow ; plunk, first a silver dollar, perhaps from the
sound of it as it falls on a counter, then merely dollar ;
flub or chump, a more or less heavy, stupid person. In
this class might be included language abbreviations, like
prof, doc, exam, for professor, doctor, examination; phiz
for physiognomy; and such language mutilations as
bizny for business, picture-askew for picturesque, etc.
Many slang words seem to be suggested by the high-
sounding Latin vocabulary, such as bogus; spondulix ;
slantendicularly ; catawamus ; bamboozle ; cahoots ; di-
does ; hocus pocus, etc. Occasionally an actual Latin
phrase, for example, non compos mentis, or simply non
compos, is used as a slang expression by persons who
know nothing of the origin of the phrase.
10. Attitude towards Slang. Since slang is not an
abnormal or diseased growth in language, but arises in
the language just as other words arise, there is no reason
why such words in themselves should be condemned.
Intrinsically they are not bad, but rather good, in so far
as they show activity of mind and a desire to be vigor-
ously expressive on the part of the speaker. But since
from the circumstances of their development and use,
slang words carry with them a certain individual color,
flavor, or tone, whatever we may wish to call it, that gives
them a marked distinctive value, the use of them sbjould
be determined by their appropriateness to the mood or
14
210 MODERN ENGLISH
Perhaps we should
make a distinction between speaking and writing, allow-
ing ourselves somewhat more liberty in speaking than in
writing, in neither instance, however, completely sup-
pressing the creative instinct in language. In answer to
the frequent charge that " Slang is vulgar," we may say
that slang in itself is no more vulgar than other words
of the language, that there is nothing inherently^vulgar
in a slang word. A word is vulgar only when the idea
which it expresses or connotes is vulgar, and this is true
of other words as well as slang. But that slang words
often carry with them by suggestion or connotation ideas
or shades of thought that may fairly be called vulgar, or
at least undignified, cannot be denied. The reason for
this is that the slang words often come from the lan-
guage of a grade or of classes of society the activities of
which as a whole are looked upon as vulgar or undigni-
fied. On the other hand certain slang words may carry
with them exactly the opposite connotation when they
are the cant terms (such words as smart set, swagger,
swell, etc.) current among people who are regarded, or
who regard themselves, as leaders in matters of fashion
and conventional manners. A second statement that
" Slang limits vocabulary " might be accepted if it were
true that vocabulary limits thought. But the true state-
ment is that vocabulary is the expression, the measure
of thought, and its extent and character is determined
by the extent and variety of thought itself. To say that
slang limits vocabulary is literally to say that vocabulary
limits vocabulary. That loose and lazy thinkers are in-
clined to use one word to express many shades of thought
is true not only in the use of slang words, but of many
ENGLISH WORDS 211
other words of the language.1 It may be said in general,
however, that the continual use of slang, since much of
its effect depends upon a kind of temporary conventional
smartness, is a fair indication of a cheap and shallow
mind. The slang habit is vicious because it cheapens
by constant use an activity of language which is needed,
but which, to produce its proper effect, must be employed
only when it is needed. Slang is nearly always con-
scious in its origin and in its use. It is almost always
more expressive than the situation demands. It is in-
deed a kind of hyperesthesia in the use of language. It
differs thus from idiom, which is normally expressive.
" To laugh in your sleeve " is idiom because it arises out
of a natural situation : it is a metaphor derived from the
picture of one raising his sleeve to his face to hide a
smile, a metaphor which arose naturally enough in early
periods when sleeves were long and flowing; but "to
talk through your hat " is slang, not only because it is
new, but also because it is a grotesque exaggeration of
the truth.
11. Word Borrowing in English. The background
and the basis of the English vocabulary is of course
Teutonic or Germanic, by inheritance, just as its inflec-
tional and general grammatical systems are. From the
earliest historical times, however, this Teutonic base has
been enriched by the borrowing of words from other lan-
guages, sometimes more rapidly and abundantly than at
others, dependent upon the extent to which the English,
1 Cf. the various loose meanings of the word^/ur, such as to arrange, to
mend, to settle or plant firmly, and even to punish, as in " 1 11 fix him/*
The corrective of this fault is the determination and definition of the
thought so clearly that more discriminating terms must be used to express
it adequately.
212 MODERN ENGLISH
or their Anglian, Jutish, and Saxon ancestors, were
brought into contact with other peoples.
The first historic borrowings which we can clearly
trace are borrowings from Latin while the Angles, Jutes,
and Saxons were still resident on the Continent.
Words of this sort are the common possession of a
number of Germanic languages. Examples are wine,
from Old English win, Latin vinum ; monger (as in fish-
monger), Old English manger -e, Latin mango, to buy or
sell ; pound, Old English pund, Latin pondo ; wall, Old
English weall, Latin vallum ; street, Old English street,
Latin strata (via) ; and a few others. Not many words
were taken over from the Latin at this early period,
those that were borrowed being chiefly commercial terms,
like monger, pound, etc., and military terms like wall
and street, the Roman streets or roads being built prim-
arily to facilitate the passage of troops from one part
of the Empire to another.
12. Celtic Borrowings. After the migration to
England of those Continental tribes which later consti-
tuted the Anglo-Saxon people, the language and the
people with which they were first brought into contact
and from which we should expect them to borrow words
were the native Celtic language and the Celts. The re-
lation of the Celts to the Anglo-Saxons was that of a
subdued race to its conquerors,1 and we should hardly
expect, therefore, that the Anglo-Saxons would borrow
very abundantly from the Celts. The tendency would be
in the other direction, for the Celts, the weaker and less
1 Of. Old English wielen, " slave-woman/' tihe feminine form of the
name Wealh, " Welsh/' by which the Anglo-Saxons named their Celtic
servants.
ENGLISH WORDS 213
influential people, to give up their language for Old
English. The Anglo-Saxon would feel neither neces-
sity nor inclination to borrow from the Celt. And in
fact, so far as we are able to judge now from the Celtic
words used in the literature of the earlier periods that
has been preserved, the influence of the Celts upon the
Anglo-Saxons was very slight. Scholars have been able
to find less than a score of words in the English language
before the eleventh century which can be said with any
degree of probability to have been derived from the
Celtic. Some of these, for example the word dry in Old
English, meaning " magician," and cognate with the first
syllable of druid, have disappeared from later English.
Others, for example mattock, which it was formerly sup-
posed were borrowed from Celtic, have been shown to be
Celtic borrowings from English. The words which we
can be reasonably certain were borrowed by Old English
from Celtic and which are still found in Modern English,
are very few in number ; among them the following are
the most probable : brock (badger) ; down (a hill) ;
slough. To find any extensive influence of Celtic on
English we must turn to the proper names of the
language, such as the names of rivers, mountains, dis-
tricts, etc., many of which naturally retained their
original Celtic names. This is especially true of regions
like Devonshire and Cornwall which for a long time
resisted the attacks of the Anglo-Saxons and thus re-
mained largely Celtic after the rest of southern and east-
ern England had been completely Teutonized.1
1 For the etymologies of the place names of England, see Taylor,
Words and Places, London, 1893, and Names and their Histories, London,
1896.
214 MODERN ENGLISH
It should be remembered, also, in estimating the Celtic
element in English, that the small number of early
Celtic words in English has been increased, tho not
to any considerable extent, by later borrowings from
Irish, as, for example, brogue, galore, shamrock, shillelagh
spalpeen, Tory, usquebaugh, etc. ; from Scotch, in such
words as clan, glen, kail, pibroch, plaid, slogan, whiskey,
etc. ; and from Welsh in coracle, cromlech, flannel, and a
few others. But the entire number of Celtic words in
English is surprisingly small.
13. Latin Borrowings of the First Period. After
the settlement of the Anglo-Saxons in England and the
establishment of their supremacy over the Celts, the
first great event, important for the development of their
civilization and language, was the introduction of Chris-
tianity and of Roman civilization, by means of the
Augustinian mission in the last decade of the sixth cen-
tury. The Anglo-Saxons were thus brought into direct
contact with a civilization that was higher than their
own, and by the same principle which accounts for
the slight influence of Celtic upon Old English, we
should expect a strong influence of Latin upon Old
English. There is abundant evidence to show that the
influence of Latin was profound. The Roman mis-
sionaries were not only preachers, they were also
teachers. One of their first projects was the establish-
ment of schools in which Anglo-Saxon children were to
be educated for the priesthood. The teachers in these
schools were at first naturally Romans, or at least not
Anglo-Saxons ; but in the course of comparatively a
short time persons of pure Anglo-Saxon birth attained
distinction as teachers and scholars. Of these we may
ENGLISH WORDS 215
mention two, Aldhelm, born about 650 and dying in 709,
a pupil of the school at Canterbury, who was the author
of a number of Latin treatises which are still extant;
and Alcuin, who lived from about 735 to 804, a pupil of
the cathedral school established at York. Alcuin has
been described as " the most learned man of his age," l
and when Charlemagne wished to establish schools at
his own court, he invited Alcuin to become master of
them, a post which he held from 782 to 790. Latin
learning was also cultivated by other Anglo-Saxons, as,
for example, the Venerable Bede (c. 673-735), the author
of the Ecclesiastical History of the English People (His-
toria Ecclesiastica gentis Anglorum) ; King Alfred (849-
901), who translated many Latin works into English ;
and jElfric (c. 955-1020), author of many treatises both
in Latin and in English. A natural result of this famil-
iarity with Latin was the incorporation of a consider-
able number of Latin words into the English vocabulary.
It has been estimated that before the year 1050 nearly
four hundred words are found in extant Old English
literature.2 As we should expect, many of these words
are of ecclesiastical character, the new religion and its
organization naturally bringing with it many of its own
words. Words of this sort which appear in the Old
English period and have persisted in use to-day, are
bishop, Lat. episcopus ; apostle, Lat. apostolus ; alms,
Lat. eleemosyna (which in turn is of Greek origin) ;
creed, Lat. credo; candel, Lat. candela ; organ, Lat.
organum; priest, Lat. presbyter.
Another large group is made up of words which
1 See Sandys, History of Classical Scholarship, Vol. I, p. 460.
* See Toller, Outlines of the History of the English Language, p. 79ft
216 MODERN ENGLISH
might be called scientific or learned words, as, for ex«
ample, names of plants, as cedar, Lat. cedrus ; box (box-
tree), Lat. buxus ; or of mathematical divisions of space
and time, as calends, Lat. calendae ; mile, Lat. milia ;
noon, Lat. nona (literally the ninth hour of the day) ;
meter, Lat. metrum. The Modern English tile, which
appears as Old English tigele, from Latin tegula, came
into use in English when the object itself was intro-
duced by the Latins.
The number of words of familiar daily life which
passed from the Latin into Old English was relatively
small. Examples are such words as butter, Lat. buty-
rum; cheese, Lat. caseus ; kitchen, Lat. coquina ; mill,
Lat. molina ; cup, Lat. cuppa; kettle, Lat. catillus. A
number of these words were plainly taken over because
of the superiority of the monastery cooks and cooking
over the native, just as to-day English has a kind of
kitchen-French which has come into the language in a
similar way.
On the whole, however, the influence of Latin upon
English in this period was chiefly upon the learned lan-
guage. But even here the influence was by no means
revolutionary. A good many of the approximately four
hundred words occurring in texts before 1050 are used
merely as glosses, or are single occurrences obviously
due to the immediate need of a translator to find a word
to express some object or idea in his original. Old
English, in the main, was very conservative in the mat-
ter of borrowing words. Even when it came to the
expression of the abstract ideas of Christianity or of
philosophy, Anglo-Saxon authors endeavored to get
along with their own native stock of words and usually
ENGLISH WORDS 217
succeeded remarkably well. For example, in King
Alfred's translation of a philosophical work by the Latin
writer Boethius, entitled De Oonsolatione Philosophiae, in
a typical passage of about 660 words discussing the ab-
stract question of the natare of God, only one Latin word,
englas, Lat. angeli, " angels," occurs. There are fre-
quent words, however, of abstract meaning, such as we
usually express now by means of words of Latin origin.
Examples are mildheort, literally " mild-heart," where we
should now probably say merciful or gracious, both
Latin words through the French; rummod, literally
room-mood, our modern magnanimous ; gdstllce, literally
ghost-like, that is, spiritual ; to-scead, an idea which we
should now express by difference or discrimination;
hwllwendtic, literally while (i. e., time), wend (turn), and
the adjective suffix lie, the whole meaning temporal.
And so with many other words it could be shown that
where Modern English uses a word of Latin origin, Old
English uses its own native words. In this respect
Old English consequently resembles modern German
more nearly than it does Modern English, the present
tendency in English being to express new ideas, espe-
cially of a somewhat abstract character, by means of
words of Latin origin, whereas modern German gener-
ally uses native words for this purpose.
14. Borrowings from Scandinavian. After their
settlement in England the Anglo-Saxons came into re-
newed contact with the Scandinavians of the Continent,
the Danes, Northmen or Norse, and Swedes, at the
beginning of the Scandinavian invasions towards the
close of the eighth century. These invasions, which at
first were merely predatory, soon became wars of actual
218 MODERN ENGLISH
conquest and settlement. By the heroic efforts of Al-
fred and his successors the Danes were kept out of
Wessex for a time, but the other parts of England, es-
pecially the northern, soon succumbed to them, and with
the conquest of Cnut, in 1016, the whole of England
passed under Danish control, and a Danish king ruled
at the same time both Denmark and England. The
Danish conquerors of England readily amalgamated with
the native Anglo-Saxon population. In this instance the
Anglo-Saxon civilization, having passed through several
centuries of peaceful development, was the higher one,
and the Danes consequently tended to give up their
language for the English language. The two languages,
however, were much alike, and it is often difficult to
tell when a word is pure Old English and when it is of
Scandinavian origin. Many words, so far as their form
goes, such common words, for example, as man, wife,
father, mother, folk, house, etc., might as well be of Scan-
dinavian as of Old English origin, because they are the
same in both languages.1 In some cases, however, ideas
or objects of Scandinavian origin have left their impress
plainly upon the names which were borrowed to desig-
nate them. A number of words were taken over by the
Anglo-Saxons which have not persisted in the language,
as, for example, words connected with the sea, bar da,
cnear, sce<fi, different kinds of ships ; lid, " a fleet " ; ha,
" rowlock," etc. The Scandinavians appear also to have
been active legal organizers, and a number of their law
terms passed over to Old English, such as the word law
itself; by-law (for the etymology of by-, see above, p.
198); thrall, "slave"; the verb era ve ; the second ele-
1 See Jespersen, Growth and Structure of the English Language, p. 65.
ENGLISH WORDS 219
ment in hus-band ; and others. Other Scandinavian words
in English are the nouns sky, skull, skin, skill, haven ; the
adjectives meek, low, scant, loose, odd, wrong, ill, ugly,
rotten, happy, seemly ; the verbs thrive, die, cast, hit,
take, call, scare, scrape, bask, drown, ransack, gape;
probably the pronouns they, their, them ; and the prepo-
sitions fro (to and fro) and till.
These words it will be observed are mostly ordinary
words of common daily intercourse, and in this respect
they differ widely from the Latin words that were taken y
over in the Old English period. From the nature of these
Scandinavian borrowings we may infer that the Scan-
dinavians and Anglo-Saxons lived together on a plane of
equality; their relation to each other was not that of
learned people to an ignorant, like the Latin to the Anglo-
Saxon, or of an aristocratic ruling class to a conquered
and ignoble group of subjects, like the Anglo-Saxons to
the Celts. Anglo-Saxons and Scandinavians, moreover,
lived together probably without much realization of a
difference of nationality. This being the case, we might
expect that the number of Anglo-Saxon borrowings from
the Scandinavians would be much greater than it is.
But the very similarity of the two languages and of the
two peoples probably tended to prevent this. The Scan-
dinavians apparently gave up their language without
much struggle, and the Anglo-Saxons felt little need of
borrowing words from their Teutonic kinsmen, having
already an equivalent vocabulary in their own language.
15. Borrowings from the French in the Middle
English Period. The words which English borrowed
from other languages, Celtic, Latin, and Scandinavian,
before the period of French influence, were comparatively
220 MODERN ENGLISH
few in number. They were not of sufficient importance
to change in any considerable degree the character of the
language, or even to add much to its resources. English
remained throughout a unilingual tongue, a language
made up largely, or almost exclusively, of words of the
same linguistic stock. As a result, however, of the
French influence upon English, we have the introduction
of a large number of words of French origin, so large
a number that they modify the general character and
tone of the language. So numerous and important are
these French innovations that English changes from a
unilingual to a bilingual tongue. The basis of the
language remained English, as it always has through all
stages of its history, but the accretions to this original
English stock were of such a character as to make Eng-
lish sensitive to two language traditions, one Teutonic
and the other Romance. This bilingual character of the
language of the Middle English period has been trans-
mitted to, and augmented by, later periods of English, so
that to-day our language is made up of two historically
clearly distinguishable, tho in practice closely interwoven
strands, the Romance or Latin, and the English or
Teutonic, strands.
The causes which brought about the introduction of
French words into Middle English were partly political,
but mainly social. The relations between England and
France first became politically significant in the time of
Edward the Confessor, who was king of England from
1043 to 1066. Edward had spent the early years of his
life in Normandy in France, and there had acquired
French sympathies and French tastes. When he be-
came king, these sympathies and tastes were naturally
ENGLISH WORDS 221
brought over by him to his English court. Moreover,
Edward filled high political and ecclestiastical offices in
England with Normans, in the face of the disapproval of
the English, who finally rose up in rebellion hi 1052 and
drove these French favorites from the country. On the
death of Edward, the English chose Harold, son of Earl
Godwin, a very powerful English nobleman, as their
king. But a cousin of Edward's, William, Duke of
Normandy, made claim to the English throne on the
basis of some promises alleged to have been given him
by Edward, and in support of his claims he appeared on
English soil with an army at his back, fought and
defeated Harold at the famous battle of Hastings, on
October 14, 1066, and thus a duke of Normandy became
the king of England and the English people.
The effect of the Norman Conquest upon English
institutions and life in general was profound and wide-
reaching. In the first place, William the Conqueror was
a strong and a wise executive. He became the real
ruler of the country, he introduced a system of govern-
ment, and saw to it that it was carried out. The persons
to whom offices of trust were assigned were at first
naturally his own Norman followers, and the language
of the court and the higher official life was of course
Norman French. But secondly, and, so far as the his-
tory of the language is concerned, more importantly, the
Norman Conquest was significant because it changed
England from an insular, self-dependent country to one
with interests beyond itself. Through the Norman
Conquest England became more fully acquainted with
continental customs and habits of life, with French
learning and with French literature, than it had been
222 MODERN ENGLISH
before. What all this meant to England can hardly be
overestimated; for the French of the eleventh and
twelfth centuries were undoubtedly the most highly
civilized nation of Europe, and of this civilization the
English thus became partakers and sharers.
There is a frequent misapprehension which needs to
be corrected, concerning the attitude which William the
Conqueror assumed towards the English language. It
is often assumed that William's attitude towards English
was hostile, that he endeavored to crush it out and to
substitute Norman French in its place, just as the Czar
of Russia has recently attempted forcibly to compel the
Finns to give up their native language and use Russian.
The investigations of historians 1 have shown, however,
that this was not William's purpose, either with respect
to the English language or with respect to the political
institutions of the English people. William was too
wise a statesman not to make use of everything that
would help him, and instead of being hostile to the
English language and English customs, the indications
are that he rather strove to use them in the effective
organization of his kingdom. English was never, there-
fore, a forbidden language, tho naturally it was re-
garded for a long time as an ignoble language. The
speech of the court and the higher official life was
French, and Englishmen who sought favor at court of
course learned French. There were thus two strata in
the social body, each with its own language. English
continued to be spoken uninterruptedly after the Con-
1 See especially Freeman, The Norman Conquest ; and the same author's
essay, " The English People in their Three Homes," in Some Impressions of
the U***** States.
ENGLISH WORDS 223
quest, but it tended to become what we should now call
the language of the ignorant and uncultivated ; it per-
sisted therefore as a popular dialect. French, on the
other hand, became the accepted speech of the higher
political and social life.
The number of Normans in England, as compared
with the number of Englishmen, must always have been
small. There were several reasons, however, why these
Normans were not immediately absorbed by the more
numerous English. In the first place, a higher civiliza-
tion, tho confined to relatively few people, does not
readily yield to lower influences ; it is conservative and
strives to be self -perpetuating. Second, French culture
in England was continually refreshed by communication
with the Continent. William was king of England, but
also duke of Normandy, and many of his nobles who
held possessions in England also had important relations
with France. There was thus a continual passing back
and forth of the official society between England and
Normandy. In the meantime, however, those French-
men whose possessions and interests were all in England
would be compelled in self-defense to learn English.
Their workmen and their overseers, the people upon
whom all the practical affairs of daily life depended,
would be English ; and as these English would have
little opportunity to learn French, however great their
inclination, the only thing for the landlords to do was to
learn English. In the year 1204 an event happened
which made communication between French and English
in England more than ever frequent and necessary.
This was the loss of the province of Normandy in the
reign of King John, and the consequent loss of their
224 MODERN ENGLISH
French possessions by the Norman nobles in England.
From this time on English continued to gain as the
national speech of the country. French remained as
the cultivated speech of the higher social classes, but
it came to be more and more felt as an accomplishment,
an artificial, aristocratic class language, as distinguished
from the general, national language of the people. As
soon as this had come to pass, French as a spoken
language in England was doomed. It might continue to
be used as the language of polite conversation, to some
extent as the language of literature and scholarship;
but the language which does not send its roots down
into the actual, every-day life of a people is condemned
to sterility and death. French managed to maintain it-
self as a cultivated language far into the fourteenth
century. Robert of Gloucester, writing about 1300,
speaks of English as the language of " lowe men," but of
French as the language of " heie men," by " high men "
probably meaning men of high official rank. The Cursor
Mundi, a long poem written in the north of England
in the first quarter of the fourteenth century, defends
English on patriotic grounds as the right language for
Englishmen to use. Ralph Higden, in a Latin historical
work called the Polychronicon, written near the middle of
the century, says that children in school were compelled
to leave their own language^ (showing that English was
the native language of school children in his day) and
to construe their lessons in French, a state of affairs
which Higden regards with disfavor. Higden also says
that gentlemen's children are taught French from the
time that they are rocked in the cradle. The Polychroni-
con was translated into English by John Trevisa about
ENGLISH WORDS 225
the year 1385, and in his translation Trevisa comments on
Higden's statement, observing that in his day matters
had changed somewhat, that children now studied their
lessons in English; whereby, says Trevisa, they have
this advantage, that they learn their lessons more quickly,
but this disadvantage, that they know no more French
than their left heels. In the meantime, in the year 1362,
it had been ordered that pleadings in the law courts
should be in English and not in French. By the end
of the fourteenth century it was for once and all de-
termined that English was to be the language of Eng-
land. This final triumph of English is indicated most
forcibly by the choice of English for literary purposes by
Chaucer. Familiar as he was with French, Chaucer could
have written in that language if he had so desired. But
his observation had convinced him that French was a
decaying and passing language in England, that the
real, vital language of the country was English, and that
any literature which should express English character
and life must be written in the English language.
Chaucer, therefore, while his example contributed to
raise English in the respect of the people, did not by his
single effort make English a language fit for literature.
It had become so before Chaucer wrote, and what the
poet did was to see his opportunity and use it. In his
choice of English we have the final victory of English
over French, the language of the people against the
language of the higher life, of the court, of polite con-
\ersation, and of literature.
16. Chronology of French Words in English.
When we come to consider the question of the times at
which French words were taken over into English, we are
15
226 MODERN ENGLISH
met by an interesting condition of affairs. As we hav«
already seen, intimate relations between France and Eng-
land began in the time of Edward the Confessor, contin-
uing after the Conquest in a much more influential way
to the time of the loss of Normandy in 1204. Even
after the loss of Normandy, however, French continued
to be used in England as a cultivated or polite language,
and it was only at the beginning of the fourteenth cen-
tury that English began to take the place of French, a
tendency that became complete at the end of the cen-
tury. Now it is remarkable that it is not until we come
to English works written near the beginning of the four-
teenth century that we find French words abundantly
used. In the Ormulum, for example, a poem of about
ten thousand long lines, written near the year 1200, only
twenty-three words of French origin are used.1 The
Brut of Layamon, a poem of more than 56,000 short
lines, written early in the thirteenth century, contains
only 150 words of French origin.2 The proportion varies
slightly with different writers, other works contemporary
with the Ormulum and the Brut showing some a larger
and others a smaller relative number of French words.
But the number for two centuries after the Conquest is
never very large. Gradually, however, the use of French
words in Middle English texts increases until it reaches
its highest point between 1300 and 1400, or more exactly
between 1350 and 1400, just the period in which French
was losing ground as a national language and English
was gaining ground. How is this to be explained?
First of all, by the fact that when the higher classes, th<?
1 A list of them is given by Kluge, Englische Studien, XXII, 179 fl.
* For a list of them, see Moiiroe, in Modern Philology t IV, 559 ff.
ENGLISH WORDS 227
speech of which is naturally reflected in the literature of
the period, took to speaking English, a language for
which they had hitherto had more or less contempt, they
naturally carried over into English many words from
their French. Their English was a sort of Gallicized
English, improved and polished, as they probably
thought, by being interlarded with French words.
The very tendency, therefore, which brought about the
elevation of English resulted also in the introduction of
numerous French words into English. Moreover, we
need not suppose that the English themselves of the
middle and lower classes were averse to borrowing
French words in this period. French was recognized as
a polite language, the language of culture, education, and
travel, especially as the language of literature, and the
occasional use of a French word conferred a touch of
distinction upon the person who used it, just as to-day
we have a sort of " society French," such words as debu-
tante, fiancee, foyer, etc., and a sort of literary or esthetic
French, words like genre, denouement, technique, which
persons of a somewhat unripe culture are fond of using.
The French which was thus cultivated at the end of
the fourteenth century was no longer the old Anglo-
Norman French of the original conquerors of England.
That had in the course of time grown old-fashioned,
tho from this Anglo-Norman French are of course de-
rived most French words taken into English before 1350.
The new and the fashionable French which was culti-
vated in the last half of the century was Central French,
the dialect of Paris, the chief city of the French, and the
dialect also in which the great body of French literature
was written. We thus see that the Conquest itself and
228 MODERN ENGLISH
its immediate political results were less influential in
bringing about the introduction of French words into
English than these later social causes. Indeed the in-
fluence of French upon the English vocabulary did not
become pronounced until the Conquest had become
practically forgotten and the racial distinction between
Norman and English obliterated. The real explanation
of the influence of French upon English is to be found
where the influence of one language upon another is
almost always to be found, in the give and take of the
members of one social group upon another in the daily
concerns of life.
17. Kinds of Words Borrowed from French.
In general, words of all kinds, of all parts of speech, and
from all walks of life were taken over into English,
both from Anglo-Norman and from Central French,
during the Middle English period. As a result of this
borrowing, many English words were lost, French words
like mercy i charity, power, soldier, peace, etc., taking the
place of words which in the Old English period were
drawn from the Teutonic stock. Or it often happened
that an Old English word was preserved beside a French
word of similar content, the Old English word, however,
generally taking on a somewhat less dignified meaning
than the French wor^ as, for example, French chair
beside English stool ; French city beside English town ;
French labor beside English work. Sir Walter Scott, in
Ivanhoe, has called attention to pairs of words of this
sort, such as French beef, mutton, veal, and pork, as com-
pared with English ox, sheep, calf, and swine. He draws
the inference that the ox and the other animals, so long
as they were only objects of care and expense, were the
ENGLISH WORDS 229
concern of the humble Saxons, but when they were
dressed for the table and were ready to be enjoyed, then
they passed into the possession of the Normans and took
the French names, such as beef, etc. But there is no
reason to suppose that the Saxons were so poverty-
stricken and oppressed as not to be able to eat beef,
mutton, or pork. The French names for the dressed
meats were taken over because they were the polite
names, and the Saxon when he had prepared his ox or
his sheep for the table would himself be pleased to call
it beef and mutton.
It would be difficult to go through the whole list of
borrowed words and classify them exactly, so as to show
just what ideas the language tended to express in French
to the exclusion of English. As has already been stated,
words of all kinds, the most simple as well as the most
polite, were taken over, many of them maintaining only
a temporary place in the language, but most of them
persisting to the present day. These words we no
longer feel as French in origin, and we use them in the
same way as we use all other words of the language.
They have become indeed an essential and inseparable
part of the language, and any attempt to distinguish and
to discriminate against words of French origin of this
period is artificial and vain. As illustrations of short
and simple words of French origin borrowed in the
Middle English period, we may cite the following : able,
age, air, boil, card, chair, course, cry, debt, doubt, ease,
engine, face, flower 5 fruit, hasty, hour, hulk, jolly, move,
pass, oust, peck, river, soil, table, use, etc. These simple
words, the number of which could be increased indefi-
nitely, are exactly on the same plane as the popular words
230 MODERN ENGLISH
of Scandinavian origin cited above, and native words
of Teutonic origin. They are completely amalgamated
with the rest of the language, and have become thus to
all intents and purposes identical with the popular native
element. It is, therefore, not this part of the borrowed
French strand in the English vocabulary that is most
characteristic, so far at least as the style of English is
concerned, of the influence of French upon English.
Besides these simple, commonplace words there is
another large group of words of French origin which is
specially significant of the relations which existed be-
tween French and English in this period, a group of
words which clearly reflects the attitude of mind of the
English of the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries both
towards their own and towards the French language.
This difference is well illustrated by the lines in
Chaucer's Prolog to The Canterbury Tales, in which he
describes the virtues practised by the knight :
he lovede chivalrye,
Trouthe and honour, fredom and curteisye.1
Of these five nouns, the second and the fourth are Eng-
lish words, the first, the third, and the fifth are French.
The English words, truth and freedom, are the names of
two simple manly virtues, fundamental virtues in Eng-
lish character. The French words, chivalry, honor, and
courtesy, name virtues of a different kind, courtly vir-
tues, such as only those who are bred under certain con-
ditions can know and practice. Honor and courtesy are
determined by a code of conduct, a code which has been
made elastic enough to permit a gambling debt being
l Ll. 45, 46.
ENGLISH WORDS 231
called a " debt of honor." But truth and freedom are
words which need no definition, because they have no
doubtful meaning ; they are not names for varying rules
of conduct, but are names for permanent essential traits
of character. It would be easy of course to make too
much of this distinction, especially if we should attempt
to show that French words, as is sometimes supposed,
were generally borrowed to designate the shallower and
more artificial ideas and sentiments. A truer statement
would be that the French element often has the qualities
of courtliness and grace, these words themselves, courtli-
ness and grace, being French words, and the ideas for
which they stand being largely French ideas. To the
French the Middle English period was indebted for those
standards of conduct which we usually group under the
broad head of chivalry. Anglo-Saxon society may have
been simple, earnest, and sincere, but it can hardly be
said to have been light or graceful. The characteristics
of charm and fancy, of polish and lightness, do not ap-
pear prominently in English literature, and probably did
not exist in any considerable extent in English life, until
after the period of French influence. It is the polite
part of the English vocabulary, taken over from French
at this time, that constitutes the striking difference
between the language of the Middle English and the
Old English period. This is illustrated by borrowed
words which have to do with eating and table-manners,
as, for example, the words dine, dinner, supper, table
(for Old English board), plate, napkin, fork, pasty, feast,
besides many names of edibles, of kitchen utensils, and
of ways of preparing food, such as roast, broil, boil, and
others. Costume and dress also changed and became
232 MODERN ENGLISH
much more elaborate in the Middle English period,
French words here again often taking the place of Eng-
lish ones. Examples are coat, cloak, gown, boot, cap,
etc., also many names of cloths. Words of address
were taken from the French, such as sir, madam, master,
mistress, as well as many from the higher titles, like
prince, duke, duchess, marquis, baron, captain, sergeant,
colonel, officer, etc. Names of relationship, except the
immediate relationships of the family, were expressed by
French words, as uncle, aunt, nephew, niece, and cousin ;
but father, brother, mother, sister remained English. Ac-
complishments were usually French, both in word and
fact. Four of the six talents mentioned by Chaucer in
the following couplet descriptive of the gallant Squire
in The Canterbury Tales, require French words to name
them:
He koude songes make and wel endite,
Juste and eek daunce and weel purtreye and write.1
Many of the terms of sport, especially hawking and hunt-
ing, were taken from the French, and naturally also a
great many words connected with the higher official life,
as, for example, crown, state, realm, royal, country, nation,
power, etc. ; words xfonnected with war and military
affairs in general, as arms, peace, battle, armor, banner,
siege, and a great many others ; words pertaining to the
law courts and the administration of justice, as, for ex-
ample, judge, justice, court, suit, plea, plead, etc. ; numer-
ous words of ecclesiastical meaning, as service, savior,
relic, cloister, preach, prayer, clergy, clerk, etc. But
most important of all, perhaps, is the long list of words
i Prolog, 11. 95, 96. Endite = compose ; juste = joust ; eek = also.
ENGLISH WORDS 235
of more or less abstract value denoting chivalric ideas or
matters of general conduct. The words honor and cour-
tesy have already been cited from Chaucer. To them
should be added the word villainy, in Chaucer's well-
known line descriptive of the Knight in the Prolog to
The Canterbury Tales :
He nevere yet no vileynye ne sayde.
The word means in Chaucer not quite what it does in
Modern English, in the earlier sense signifying any con-
duct not befitting a gentleman. Other words of this
kind are duty, fame, virtue, gentle, valor, chivalry, cour-
age, liege, degree, rank, standard, nolle, grace, favor,
simple, pleasant, agreeable, amiable, manner, dignity, rev-
erence, piteous, dainty, dalliaunce, familiar, vaunt, adven-
ture, coward, charm, chastity, beauty, benign, oblige, fault,
majesty.
It is a significant fact that it would be extremely diffi-
cult to find an Old English equivalent to many of these
words, the reason being that the exact shade of thought
or feeling expressed by the French words was not a part
of Anglo-Saxon experience. The life of the English
people in the fourteenth century was much richer and
more varied than it had been in the ninth or tenth centu-
ries, and this growth in richness and variety, largely due
as it was to their contact with French life and civiliza-
tion, is also largely expressed in words of French origin.
18. Renascence Borrowings in English. The bor-
rowing of French words, which has been described in the
foregoing paragraphs, continued with but little diminu-
tion down through the fifteenth century. Towards the
of this century the tendency to import words of both
234 MODERN ENGLISH
French and Latin origin was greatly strengthened by the
general drift of the Renascence movement, that revival of
learning and of interest in literature, both classical Latin
and Greek and English vernacular, which, in its results
upon language, was hardly less important than the period
of French influence of which we have just spoken. The
effect of the Renascence upon English is interesting and
remarkable also because it was almost altogether the
result of conscious effort. In preceding periods, any
changes which affected the language took place largely
without the conscious knowledge of the people who
spoke the language. Words were borrowed from Scan-
dinavian or French because it was convenient to have
the Scandinavian or French words. But there was no
avowed theory that it would be a good thing to add to
the English vocabulary by borrowing from these lan-
guages, words being taken as the need for them arose in
r the social intercourse of daily life. In the Renascence
I period, however, there arose a perfectly conscious move-
ment, on the part of scholars and authors, to extend the
limits of the English vocabulary by direct borrowing
from other languages. This was quite in keeping with
the general spirit o£ the Renascence, one of its most
characteristic aspects being a deep and general interest in
questions of language. From their study of the classical
authors, the Renascence scholars were naturally led to
the consideration of the matter of style in literature, the
ability of a language to express all the various shades of
thought and feeling of the human mind and heart. The
perfect models of style they thought were to be found in
such writers as Cicero and Vergil, and tho a modern
vernacular such as English could never hope to rival the
ENGLISH WORDS 235
classical languages, these latter were nevertheless the
ideals towards which the modern languages were to strive.
A modern language could not be as good as Latin, but it
ought to strive to be as like as possible to Latin. There
arose thus the idea of "improving" the language, of
" augmenting " it, of making it richer and fuller, and
more capable of expressing what the Latin language
could express so well. The desire to translate the
monuments of classical literature into English also en-
couraged the belief that English should be improved,
for obviously there could be no adequate translation
into English until that language should be at least
approximately as expressive as the language from which
translation was to be made. The great endeavor, there-
fore, of the Renascence reformers was to enrich the vo-
cabulary and to make the language more expressive.
Their ideal was one of art, and they cultivated language
mainly as a medium of artistic, literary expression.
As is true of all reform movements, the positive OP
radical party is sure to beget a reactionary or conserv-
ative party ; and so in this movement also the enrichers
or improvers had to contend with the opposition of the
conservatives, who maintained that English should not
borrow words from other languages, but should try to
develop her own native resources. The conservatives
contended that if English needed new words they should
be taken from the earlier periods of her own language,
rather than from foreign languages. Both of these bodies
of theorists in the end helped towards the enrichment
of the language, the one by external borrowing and
imitation, the other by internal development.
The Renascence in England is characterized by two
236 MODERN ENGLISH
events, both of them of the greatest importance in
the history of the language. The first of these is the
revival of learning, meaning thereby the study of Greek
and Latin literature; the second is the introduction of
printing. There was very little knowledge of Greek
in England during the Old and the Middle Eng-
lish periods. The first Englishman to acquire profi-
ciency in Greek in the Renascence period was William
Tilly of Selling, near Canterbury, a Benedictine monk,
who died in 149-4. Others who succeeded him were his
nephew, Thomas Linacre (1460-1524), William Grocyn
(1446-1519), and William Latimer (d. 1545). Sir
Thomas More (1480-1535) was also a student of Greek,
and the great Dutch scholar, Erasmus, lived for several
years in England, and gave instruction in Greek at the
University of Cambridge. To these names may also be
added that of William Lily, first High-Master of St.
Paul's School in London, and author of the Latin gram-
mar which Shakspere, as well as most of his contempo-
raries, used as a school-boy. The direct influence of
Greek upon English in the Renascence period was,
however, very slight as compared with the influence of
Latin and French, ^ahe study and the knowledge of
Greek were more important as expressive of a deep and
enthusiastic interest in language merely as language,
rather than as affecting directly the feeling for, and the
use of, the English language.
The introduction of printing into England was due
to William Caxton, an Englishman born in Kent about
1415. He lived on the Continent a number of years,
and during his residence in the Low Countries learned
the printer's trade. On his return to England he set up
ENGLISH WORDS 237
a press of his own, and on November 18, 1477, the first
dated book printed in England issued from his press.
His work was very favorably received by the nobility
in England, and thereafter Caxton's press was kept busy.
To find material for publication, he himself became a
translator. His first translation was a summary of the
stories centering about the Trojan war, called Recuyell
of the History es of Troy; other translations which he
made were of Reynard the Fox ; Jacobus a Voragine's
Golden Legend ; a modernization of Trevisa's English
version of Higden's Polychronicon ; a form of the story
of the dEneid called Eneydos ; and many others.
As author and translator Caxton was deeply impressed
by the beauty and expressiveness of the Latin and the
French languages, and was desirous of making English
the equal of these languages. To attain this end he
treated English with a freedom not always approved by
his readers, who were sometimes puzzled by the strange
words with which he confronted them. Thus in the
preface to his Eneydos, which was published in 1490, he
says he was attracted to the French book " by cause of
the fayr and honest termes and wordes in frenshe " ; and
having decided to translate it into English, he "wrote
a leef or tweyne " as sample. Then he adds : " and
whan I sawe the fayr and straunge termes therin/ I
doubted that it sholde not please some gentylmen whiche
late blamed me, sayeng that in my translacyons I had
ouer curyous termes whiche coude not be understande
of comyn peple/ and desired me to vse olde and homely
termes in my translacyons. And fayn wolde I satysfye
euery man/ and so to doo, toke an olde boke and redde
therein/ and certaynly the englysshe was so rude and
238 MODERN ENGLISH
brood that I coude not wele vnderstande it. And also
my lorde abbot of westmynster ded do shewe to me late
certayn euidences wry ton in olde englysslie, for to reduce
it into our englysshe now vsid/ and certaynly it was
wreton in such wyse that it was more lyke to dutche
than englysshe ; I coude not reduce ne brynge it to be
vnderatonden/ And certaynly our langage now vsed
varye*h ferre from that whiche was vsed and spoken
whan I was borne/ For we englysshe men/ ben borne
vnder the domynacyon of the mone, whiche is neuer
stedfaste/ but euer wauerynge/ wexynge one season/ and
waneth & dyscreaseth another season." 1
Caxton then adds that his book is not translated " for
a rude uplondyssh man to laboure therin," but for the
clerk and gentleman, and if these do not understand his
words, let them go read Vergil and the other Latin
writers, and then they shall lightly understand all. It
is plain from what he says here that Caxton's sympa-
thies were with the enrichers rather than with the con-
servatives.
As a further illustration of Caxton's method of
Latinizing and Gallicizing English, we may quote the
following extract from the Eneydos :
"For to here/ opene/ and declare the matere of whiche
hereafter shall be made mencyon/ It behoueth to pre-
suppose that Troye, the grete capytall cyte/ and thex-
cellentest of alle the cytees of the countre & regyon of
Asye, was constructe and edefyed by the ryght puys-
saunt & renomed kyng Pryamus, sone of laomedon,
1 Comyn = common ; brood — broad ; ferre = far. The cross-bar, used
in the above passage, is found in manuscripts and early printed books as
a kind of punctuation, standing either for a period or a comma. It is not,
however, very consistently employed.
ENGLISH WORDS 239
descended of thauncyen stocke of Dardanus by many
degrees/ whiche was sone of Jubyter & of Electra his
wyf , after the fyctions poetyque/ And the fyrste orygy-
nall begynnynge of the genealogye of kynges. And the
sayd Troye was enuyronned in fourme of siege/ and of
excidyon by Agamenon, kynge in grece, brother of mene-
laus/ whiche was husbonde to helayne. The whiche
agamenon, assembled and accompanyed wyth many
kynges, dukes/ erles/ and grete quantyte of other princes
& grekes innumerable, hadde the magystracyon and
vnyuersall gouernaunce of alle thexcersite and hoost
to-fore Troye." l
The words in this passage which would likely have
seemed strange to an unlearned Englishman of Caxton's
day are the following: declare; matere = matter;
mencyon — mention ; presuppose ; capytall ; thexcellen-
test = the excellentest ; regyoun = region ; constructe
(from Latin constructum) ; edefyed = edified (from
Latin aedifico, I build) ; puyssaunt ; renomed = re-
nowned ; descended ; thauncyen = the ancient ; de-
grees ; fyctions ; poetyque ; orygynall ; genealogye ;
enuyronned ; fourme = form ; excidyon (from excidium
= siege) ; assembled ; accompanyed ; quantyte ; in-
numerable ; magistracy on = magistracy ; vnyuersall ;
gouernaunce ; thexcersite = the excersite (from Latin
exercitus, army). Of these it is interesting to observe
that only two, excidyon and excersite, are altogether un-
known to the Modern English reader, and that most of
the rest are perfectly familiar to any adult person of
average education. One or two are used in somewhat
unusual senses, as, for example, edefyed in the sense of
1 Eneydos, pp. 10-11.
240 MODERN ENGLISH
" built " (but cf. Modern English " edifice ") ; but the
meanings seem strange because our Modern English
words have ceased to be used with the strict etymologi-
cal value that Caxton gives them. It is interesting to
observe also that Caxton endeavors often to explain
and define his new and strange words by coupling them
with words of similar meaning and familiar form, as,
for example, opene and declare ; countre $ regyon ; first
orygynall legynnynge ; of siege and of excidyon ; excer-
site and hoost. But sometimes also he puts two new
words together, trusting perhaps that they will ex-
plain each other, as constructe l and edefyed; puyssaunt
$• renamed; assembled and accompanied.
Caxton gives great credit to Chaucer as a pioneer in
this attempt to enrich the English language which he
carries on. In the Proem, or Preface, to his edition of
The Canterbury Tales he praises Chaucer in the follow-
ing terms, which indeed carry the methods of the enrich-
ers to the limits of absurdity :
" For to-fore that^he [i. e., Chaucer] by labour embel-
lished, ornated and made fair our English, in this realm
was had rude speech and incongruous, as yet it appeareth
by old books, which at this day ought not to have place
ne be compared among, ne to, his beauteous volumes and
1 The form constructe is a past participle formed from the Latin past
participle constructum, the present form of which is construo, " I build or
construct." It could be appreciated as a past participle only by those who
were aware of this etymology ; for the normal English feeling for a past
participle demanded a participial -ed ending ; and so as the word came to
be accepted into general use, it took the past participial form constructed.
In legal phraseology, however, the form situate (without the -ed) is still
used as a past participle, being of the same formation as Caxton's con-
structe. The present form of Latin constrno appears in English construet
the past participle of which is no longer felt to be construct but construed.
ENGLISH WORDS 241
ornate writings, of whom he made many books and treat-
ises of many a noble history, as well in metre as in
rhyme and prose ; and them so craftily made that he
comprehended his matters in short, quick, and high sen-
tences, eschewing prolixity, casting away the chaff of
superfluity, and shewing the picked grain of sentence
uttered by crafty and sugared eloquence." l
Caxton, however, is unfair to Chaucer in counting him
among the conscious enrichers of the language. Chaucer,
to be sure, used a great many words which were not in
the English vocabulary before the period of French in-
fluence. But the words which Chaucer used were al-
most all of them words which had acquired citizenship
in the English language of his time. He used them
because in the centuries which had followed the Con-
quest they had come to be standard English words.
Another scholar and author of this period who was
extremely zealous in his efforts to enrich the language
was Sir Thomas Elyot (1490 ?-1546). Among Elyot's
numerous books written in English, the most interesting
and important is The Boke named the Gouernour, pub-
lished in 1531, a book on general political philosophy
and the theory of education. Convinced of the poverty
of the Old English, or native, vocabulary as compared
with the Latin, Greek, and French, Elyot set about the
task of augmenting' or enriching his English vocabu-
lary. Naturally, his strange words met with the same
opposition that Caxton's had found. " Diuers men," he
says, "rather scornyng my benefite than receyuing it
thankfully, doo shewe them selfes offended (as they say)
with my strange termes." He was gratified, however,
1 See Pollard, Fifteenth Century Prose and Verse, p. 235L
242 MODERN ENGLISH
that his work should meet with the approval of the
king, Henry VIII, and he expresses the purpose of his
reforms as follows : " His Highnesse benignely recey-
uynge my boke, whiche I named The Grouernour, in the
redynge therof sone perceyued that I intended to aug-
ment our Englyshe tongue whereby men shulde as well
expresse more abundantly the thynge that they con-
ceyued in theyr hartis (wherefore language was or-
deyned), hauynge wordes apte for the pourpose, as also
interprete out of greke, latyn or any other tonge into
Englysshe, as sufficiently as out of any one of the said
tongues into an other. His Grace also perceyued that
throughout the boke there was no terme new made by
me of a latin or frenche worde, but it is there declared
so playnly by one mene or other to a diligent reder, that
no sentence is thereby made derke or harde to be under-
stande." l
Among the examples of what were regarded as
" strange termes^l in his day, but which have now be-
come generally accepted as commonplace words in the
language, Elyot mentions industry, magnanimity, matur-
ity^ sobriety, and temperance. Thomas Nashe, a few
years later, finds much to criticize in the vocabulary of
his literary enemy, Gabriel Harvey. Among the words
and phrases used by Harvey which sound strange to-day
may be cited the following: canicular tales; effectuate; ad-
doulce his melodie ; polimechany. But by far the greater
number of those words mentioned by Nashe are good,
if somewhat learned English to-day; a few may be
given in modern spelling : ingenuity ; putative opinions ;
artificiality ; cordial liquor ; perfunctory discourses ; th*
1 Crofts, The Boke named the Gouernour, p.
ENGLISH WORDS
gracious law of amnesty; amicable end; extensively
employed ; notoriety ; negotiation ; mechanician. Like
Caxton, Nashe is of the opinion that Chaucer was a
great innovator in the use of words, but declares that if
Chaucer had lived to his time, he would have discarded
the harsher sort of his strange words. They were, he
says, the ooze " which ouerflowing barbarisme, with-
drawne to her Scottish Northren chanell, had left behind
her. Art, like yong grasse in the spring of Chaucers
fiorishing, was glad to peepe vp through any slime of
corruption, to be beholding to she car'd not whome for
apparaile, trauailing in those colde countries."1 Yet
Nashe himself is very fond of a learned word, and in read-
ing any of his or his contemporary's works, one is sur-
prised to find how many of their Latin words have made
their way into accepted use. There are, to be sure, many
words which were probably never again used after the
immediate occasion which called them into being. As
we might expect, when a scholarly author sets to work
with the avowed intent of enriching the language, he is
sure to be led into numerous extravagances. And the
extremists among the Latinists, or enrichers, were un-
doubtedly fair game for such satire as that of Thomas
Wilson, in his Three Orations of Demosthenes, 1570,
where he gives the following high-sounding letter, pur-
porting to have come to him from an old schoolfellow :
" Pondering, expending, and revoluting with myself
your ingent affability and ingenious capacity for mun-
dane affairs, I cannot but celebrate and extol your mag-
nificent dexterity above all other. ... I doubt not but
i Works, ed. McKerrow, I, 317. The work in which this passage ap-
peared was first printed in 1592.
244 MODERN ENGLISH
you will adjuvate such poor adnichilate orphans as
whilom condisciples with you and of antique familiarity
in Lincolnshire." l
Another satire on extravagance in the use of big
words is to be found in the character of Rombus, the
schoolmaster, in Sir Philip Sidney's mask The Lady of
May. Rombus addresses his ignorant companions in
language like the following: "Why, you brute nebu-
lons, have you had my corpusculum so long among you,
and cannot yet tell how to edify an argument ? Attend
arid throw your ears to me ... till I have endoctrinated
your plumbeous cerebrosities ! " 2 With the character
of Rombus should also be compared the three artifi-
cial characters in Shakspere's Love's Labour 's Lost, the
Spanish Knight, Don Armado, with " a mint of phrases
in his brain," Sir Nathaniel, the curate, and the pedantic
schoolmaster, Holofernes.
The extravagances of these satirical characters ex-
pressing (as tEey undoubtedly do) to a certain extent
the methods of the augmenters of English, it will be
readily seen that the conservatives and opponents of the
introduction of new words had an important and neces-
sary duty to perform. If the Latinists had been allowed
full sway, they would practically have turned English
into a sort of mongrel Latin dialect. The conservatives,
or the Saxonists as we may call them to distinguish
them from the Latinists, therefore had considerable jus-
tice on their side, and indeed defended their cause with
ability. Yet it is interesting to see that even the most
conservative of the Saxonists are driven unconsciously to
1 Quoted in Raleigh's Introduction to Hoby's Courtier, p. xliii.
a Miscellaneous Works of Sidney, ed. Gray, p. 274.
ENGLISH WORDS 245
use many words of recent introduction from Latin. The
language needed these words to express the ideas which
both Saxonists and Latinists wanted to express; it
needed them to become the cosmopolitan and universal
language which even the Saxonists would have it to be ;
and so, tho they were conservatives, they could not
be altogether reactionaiy and unprogressive. The head
of this conservative faction may be regarded as Sir John
Cheke, first Regius Professor of Greek in Cambridge
University (1540), who lays down the principles of his
school in a letter to his " loving frind Mayster Thomas
Hoby," which Hoby prefixes to his translation of Castig-
lione's Courtier. His statement is as follows : " I am of
this opinion that our tung should be written cleane and
pure, unmixt and unmangeled with borowing of other
tunges, wherein we take not heed by tijm, ever borrow-
ing and never payeng, she shall be fain to keep her
house as bankrupt. For then doth our tung naturallie
and praisablie utter her meaning, when she bouroweth
no counterfeitness of other tunges to attire her self
withall, but useth plainlie her own, with such shift as
nature, craft, experiens and following excellent doth
lead her unto, and if she want at ani tijm (as being
unperfight she must), yet let her borow with such bash-
fulness that it mai appeer, that if either the mould of
our own tung could serve us to fascion a woord of our
own, or if the old denisoned wordes could content and
ease this neede, we wold not boldly venture of unknowen
wordes."
In his Toxophilus, published in 1545, Roger Ascham
also ranges himself under the banner of the conserva-
tives. "He that wyll wryte well in any tongue," he
246 MODERN ENGLISH
says, " must folowe thys council of Aristotle, to speake
as the comon people do, to think as wise men do. Many
English writers haue not done so, but usinge straunge
wordes as latin, french, and Italian, do make all thinges
darke and harde. Ones I communed with a man whiche
reasoned the englyshe tongue to be enryched and en-
creased thereby, sayinge : Who wyll not prayse that
feaste, where a man shall drinke at a diner bothe wyne,
ale, and beere ? Truely, quod I, they be all good, euery
one taken by hym selfe alone, but if you putte Malmesye
and sacke, read wyne and whyte, ale and beere, and al
in one pot, you shall make a drynke neyther easie to
be knowen nor yet holsom for the body." A similar
argument is made by Wilson, in his Arte of Rhetorike
(1553) : " Some seke so far for outlandishe English,
that they forget altogether their mother's language —
and yet these fine English clerks will saie they speke in
their mother^tongue, if a man should charge them for
counterfeyting the king's English. He that cometh
lately out of France, will talke Frenche Englishe, and
never blush at the matter. Another choppes in with
English Italianated, and applieth the Italian phrase to
our English speaking ... I know them that thinke
Rhetorike to stand wholie upon darke wordes ; and he
that can catche an ynkehorne term by the tail, hym they
compt l to be a fine Englishman and good rhetorician."
The same side is taken by Gascoigne in his Posies,
published in 1575. He declares that he has "alwayes
bene of opinion that it is not unpossible eyther in Poemes
or in Prose too write both compendiously and perfectly
in our English tongue. And therefore, although I chal-
1 From Latiu compute — Modern English "count."
ENGLISH WORDS 247
enge not unto my selfe the name of an English Poet, yet
may the Reader finde oute in my wry tings, that I have
more faulted in keeping the olde English wordes (quam-
vis iam obsoleta) than in borrowing of other such Epi-
thetes and Adjectives as smell of the Inkhorne." 1 And,
to quote one more of these scholar-critics, we find Put-
tenham, in his Art of Poesie (1589), joining the chorus :
"Wa finde in our English writers many wordes and
speaches amendable; and ye shall see in some many
inkhorne termes so ill affected, brought in by men of
learnyng, as preachers and schoolemasters : and many
straunge termes of other languages, by secretaries and
marchaunts and travailours, and many darke wordes,
and not usual nor well sounding, though they be daily
spoken in court."
But these complaints and cautionings of the conserv-
atives were largely in vain. The result of the conflict
between the Latinists and the Saxonists was a virtual
victory for the Latinists. The whole situation is admi-
rably summed up in the following passage from a contem-
porary writer, who is rebutting the argument of those
conservatives who maintained that English had lost its
credit and become completely bankrupt as result of
wholesale borrowing:
" I mervaile how our English tongue hath crackt it credit,
that it may not borrow of the Latine as wel as other tongues;
and if it have broken 2 it is but of late, for it is not unknowen
to all men, how many wordes we have fetcht from thence
1 The Posies, edited by Cunliffe, Vol. I, p. 5. Elsewhere he adds that
he has rather " regarde to make our native language commendable in it
selfe, than gay with the feathers of straunge birdes."
2 That is, if it has become bankrupt.
248 MODERN ENGLISH
within these few yeeres, which if they should be all counted
ink-pot tearmes, I know not how we shall speake anie thing
without blacking our mouthes with inke : for what word can
be more plain than this word (plain), and yet what can come
more neere to the Latine ? What more manifest than (mani-
fest) ? and yet in a manner Latine : what more commune
than (rare), or lesse rare than (commune), and yet both of
them comming of the Latine ? But you will saie, long use
hath made these wordes currant : and why may not use doe
as much for those wordes which we shall now devise ? Why
should we not doe as much for the posteritie as we have re-
ceived of the antiquitie ? . . . But how hardlie soever you
deale with youre tongue, how barbarous soever you count it,
how little soever you esteerne it, I durst myselfe undertake
(if I were furnished with learning otherwise) to write in it
as copiouslie for varietie, as compendiously for brevitie, as
choicely for words, as pithilie for sentences, as pleasantlie
for figures, and everie waie as eloquentlie, as anie writer
should do in anie vulgar tongue whatsoever."1
To be sure not all the words, or perhaps even most of
them, which the enrichers attempted to add to the Eng-
lish vocabulary were accepted into general use. But the
principle of their contention was accepted by all, and of
course a great many of their specific recommendations.
It was felt that the English language to be a fitting me-
dium for the expression of all the thought of Europe, of
all that the Greek, the Latin, the Italian, and the French
had expressed, needed to extend its resources. The
result was not a wholesale and violent importation of
foreign words, but rather a tendency towards a generous
1 From The Civile Conversation of M. Stephen Guazzo . . . translated by
G. Pettie out of French (1586), quoted by Raleigh, Hoby's Courtier, pp.
xlv-xlvi.
ENGLISH WORDS 249
liberalism which allowed a writer to introduce whatever
words he could make good use of. Naturally these ad-
ditions to the vocabulary were largely learned or semi-
learned words. There was no reason why common objects
should receive new names, since they already had perfectly
adequate terms to designate them; but ideas of a more
or less abstract character, descriptive words often, and
words designating actions, these frequently required the
invention of a new term. Even when the language
already possessed a fairly adequate word, the invention
of a new and synonymous one often enabled a writer to
express himself more exactly or more musically and
rhythmically. It is of course absurd to give a single
reason for so complex an appearance as the Elizabethan
period of English literature, with its unequaled throng
of poets and dramatists, Shakspere at their head. But
it is perhaps not unreasonable to suppose that the broad-
ening and extending of the English language in the
Renascence period, through its assimilation to itself of
all the preceding culture of Europe, was a necessary
preliminary to the appearance of a world-poet like Shak-
spere in England. There is, to be sure, no telling that
Shakspere might not have been born and expressed him-
self just as powerfully and with just as universal an
appeal if the language had not been subjected to the
critical examination and augmentation of the Latinist
theorizers, if it had remained practically as it was at
the end of the fifteenth century. We cannot prove
that this would not have been true, but we can fairly
doubt it. We can point out that no other Teutonic
nation has produced a figure to be compared with
Shakspere, with the possible exception of Goethe, in
250 MODERN ENGLISH
Germany, and that even Goethe, who lived and died
two centuries after Shakspere, must yield to the great
Elizabethan when we consider both from the side of
their cosmopolitan appeal. Goethe is the greatest poet
of Germany, but Goethe is not known and admired
in Italy, France, and England as Shakspere is in
Italy, France, and Germany. The French influence
of the Middle English period, followed by the class-
ical influence of the Renascence period, both working
upon the solid and constant Teutonic base, these are
the great influences which have made the English lan-
guage what it is, have given it a variety, a richness,
and an adaptability that enabled a great poet like
Shakspere to use it as the measure, not only of all
English thought, but of the thought of the western
world.
19. Word-pairs in English. Before passing on to
the consideration of later borrowings in English, one
question relating to the earlier borrowings frequently
misstated and misunderstood must be given a moment's
attention. This is the question of the use of words in
pairs by the English writers of the Middle English and
Renascence periods, as in the following examples from
the Prayer Book (1549): pray and beseech; dissemble
nor cloak ; vanquish and overcome ; defender and keeper;
dearth and scarcity, etc. It is often mistakenly sup-
posed that this habit of using two synonymous words
for one idea arose in the Middle English period as a
result of the bilingual development of English at that
time. It is assumed that a writer when he used a word
of French origin would join with it an explaining word
of similar meaning of English origin, and, vice versa> a
ENGLISH WORDS 251
word of English origin would be used to explain a word
of French origin.1
An examination of actual usage, however, does not
support the theory, since it is found that words occur in
pairs without reference to their etymological origin. In
Chaucer's Prolog, for example, occur sixteen word-
pairs consisting of one French and one English word,
thirteen in which both are English, and nine in which
both are French, making a total of twenty-two in which
the theory of bilingualism is not illustrated as opposed
to sixteen in which it might be illustrated.2
But there are other good reasons besides this testimony
of actual practice for disbelieving that their etymological
origin had anything to do with the coupling of words
together in pairs. An examination of earlier English lit-
erature before the time of French influence, and conse-
quently before any bilingual tendencies can be supposed
to operate, shows the same custom in the use of synony-
mous word-pairs. In the Blickling Homilies, for example,
written towards the end of the tenth century, in the
Alfredian translation of Bede's Ecclesiastical History,
and elsewhere, we find word-pairs very abundantly
used, both words necessarily being English. Moreover,
it would be easy to find illustrations of the same device
of expression in other languages than English, for ex-
ample, in the Latin of Cicero, in which the theory of
bilingualism could not possibly enter. In short, the real
sxplanation of the use of words in pairs is rhetorical and
oratorical rather than etymological. By the use of two
1 For a typical misstatement of the question, see Earle, Philology of
the English Tongue (1892), §§ 77, 78.
3 See Emerson, Modern Language Notes, viii, 202-20?,
252 MODERN ENGLISH
words a writer often gets a richer cadence, an oratorical
amplification of the expression that may seem to him more
effective than the use of a single word would be. A
language rich in synonyms, as, for example, Modern
English, is peculiarly liable to an abuse of this rhetorical
device ; it is an easy one, and young writers are much
given to the use of two parallel words where one would
answer as well. This is due less to a desire for clearness
than " to that craving for symmetry which finds expres-
sion in all varieties of antitheses and balance. . . . Mr.
Swinburne's adjectives and substantives hunt in fierce
couples through the rich jungle of his prose. The taste for
pairs, once acquired, like all the tastes of the wealthy, is
hard to put off."1 Altho the origin and the use of
word-pairs is due to some such rhetorical or oratorical
cause as has been mentioned, it should not be over-
looked that in the period of the Renascence, with its
more or less conscious attitude towards vocabulary,
the doctrine of bilingualism is a little more to the
point in explaining the use of word-pairs. Undoubtedly
a strange word was often explained by coupling with
it a familiar word, and both Caxton and Sir Thomas
Elyot expressly state that such was their custom.
Translators were especially given to the use of several
words in translating a single word of their original.
Lord Berners' translation of Froissart, for example,
has such groups as the following : " they show, open,
manifest and declare to the reader"; "what we should
inquire, desire and follow"; "with what labors, dangers
and perils," etc. Caxton, also, in order to make sure
that he is expressing the meaning of his original fully,
1 Raleigh, Introduction to Hoby's Courtier, p. Iviii.
ENGLISH WORDS 253
often uses two synonymous words, without reference
however to etymology, when the French or Latin from
which he is translating uses but a single word.1
20. Later Borrowings in English. No later period
G£ English has borrowed words so freely from other
languages as did the Middle English and the Renascence
periods. By the beginning of the seventeenth century
the English vocabulary in its main outlines was fixed
for once and all. Consequently in reading Shakspere,
altho there are occasional words which have become
obsolete, or which are now used in somewhat different
senses from Shakspere's, we nevertheless feel that in
general the dramatist's vocabulary is Modern English.
It is no longer in an experimental stage, as, for example,
Caxton's is, but is the definitely fixed and settled
vocabulary of the English language. This does not
mean that no new words have been added to English
since Shakspere's time. On the contrary, the language
has been continually receiving new words; it does so
to-day, and will doubtless continue to borrow from other
languages as long as the English people are thrown into
contact with other peoples.
21. Later Borrowings from French. French words
have been taken over into English in modern times most
abundantly in the late seventeenth and eighteenth cen-
turies, in the so-called Augustan or Classical period of
English literature. At this time French again came to be
regarded in England as a polite language. This was partly
1 For further discussion of these points, see Raleigh, as above'; Griffin,
in the Publications of the Modern Language Association, xv, 172, note;
Hart, " Rhetoric in the Translation of Bede," in An English Miscellany,
presented to Dr. Furnivall, pp. 150-154.
254 MODERN ENGLISH
due to the influence of Charles II, who, having acquired
French tastes during his residence in France, transferred
his French habits and preferences to the English court on
his restoration to the English throne in 1660. It became
a fashionable custom of the time to interlard one's speech
with French words and phrases, a custom which is fre-
quently satirized in the comedies of the period. Never-
theless a good number of the faddish and fashionable
words thus introduced seemed to be needed, since they
have persisted in the language, and have now become
every-day words in the vocabulary. Examples are words
like cadet, caprice, caress, coquet, dessert, festoon, gazette,
grimace, grotesque, guitar. It should be noted that many
of the French words introduced in this period have the
accent on the second syllable, following thus the French
rule of accent, whereas words of French origin intro-
duced in the earlier periods have all changed the accent
from the second to the first syllable, following the
English rule, as, for example, palace (French palais'),
courage (French courage'). In general it is a safe rule
that when a word of French origin bears an accent on
the second syllable, the word is of late introduction into
English.
In contemporary English, French words of several
kinds have been borrowed. We have, for example, a
number of words which constitute what might be called
hotel French, such as menu, entree, carafe, chef, demi
tasse, suite (of rooms), table d'hdte, d la carte, etc.
Another group comes under the head of milliner's French,
words like toilette, habit (meaning dress) ; coiffure,
manteau, etc. ; and another might be called society
French, words like debut, fiancee, nee, soiree, musicale, etc.
ENGLISH WORDS 255
The interest of the French in automobiles and mechanical
invention in general has resulted in the common use of
a number of words which may be called engineer's
French, e. g., aeronaut, aerostat, caisson, chauffeur, garage,
tonneau, etc.
It is interesting to note that the balance between
Modern English borrowings from French and Modern
French borrowings from English inclines rather in favor
of the English. Some of the English words taken over
into French in the last two centuries are the following :
redingote (English riding-coat), jockey, rhum (English
rum), rosbif (roast-beef), ponche (punch), pique-nigue
(picnic), boulingrin (bowling-green), club, boghei (buggy"),
dog-cart, tramway, cricket, foot-ball, boule-dogue (bull-
dog), lawn tennis, bifteck (beefsteak), pannequet (pan-
cake), sandwich, chdle (shawl), black-bouler (to blackball),
fifoclock (five o'clock), higlif (high life), toast, home.1
22. Borrowings from German. English has never
shown a strong tendency to borrow from German, and
the number of German words in the English vocabulary
is consequently small. Some of those which have been
taken, however, are very characteristic words, like waltz,
carousey poodle, meerschaum; a few words naming ob-
jects or foods, like pretzel, stein (a drinking-mug), sauer-
kraut, mangel-wurzel (the name of a vegetable). A
number of words naming minerals, bismuth, blende, cobalt,
quartz, shale, zinc, etc. are from German, illustrating
1 See Nyrop, Grammaire historique de la Langue Frangaise, Vol. I,
pp. 75, 84-85. Nyrop remarks, p. 84, that " the language which unques-
tionably has furnished and which continues to furnish the largest number
of borrowed words to modern French is English." The words are es-
pecially those connected with "commerce, manufacturing, sport, and
fashion."
256 MODERN ENGLISH
the fact that " it was in Germany that mineralogy
attained the rank of a science." 1 The word carous*,
from German gar aus, that is, " all out," was taken over
in the early Elizabethan period. It designated original] y
a drinking custom similar to that known as drinking
super nagulum — " which is, after a man hath turnd vp
the bottom of the cup, to drop it on hys naile and make
a pearle with that is left ; which, if it slide, and he can-
not mak stand on, by reason thers too much, he must
drinke againe for his penance." 2
A few words are more or less used in their German
form, tho they can hardly be said to have been adopted
into English. Examples are heimweh, " homesick-
ness "; Zeitgeist, literally " time-spirit," that is, u the
spirit of the age " ; weltschmerz, literally " world-pain, ''
" weariness of the world " ; vaterland, " fatherland " ;
hinterland, meaning the region or land back of a sea-
port necessary to support it. In the instance of the
phrase Use majeste, a French phrase is borrowed to des-
ignate what has come to be regarded as distinctly a
German idea, the German word for it being majestatn-
beleidigung. The word kindergarten came into English
with the thing itself, which originated in Germany.
On the other hand, the Germans, like the French,
have borrowed, and continue to borrow freely, from
English, especially of recent years. The words which
they have taken over are of many different kindft
Many words of more or less fashionable character have
been borrowed, showing the German admiration for
English social customs and conduct. A few such word a
1 Bradley, Making of English, p. 103.
a Nashe, Pierce Penilesse, ed. Grosart, II, 78.
ENGLISH WORDS 257
are the following: butler, groom, nurse, porter, gentle-
man, four-in-hand, schlips (meaning necktie, and adapted
from English slip, which, of course, never meant neck-
tie; the Germans, however, confused the word with
their own native word for necktie, i. e., SMeife) ; smoking
(for Tuxedo coat, being an abbreviation of smoking-
jacket) ; knock-about (a soft felt hat) ; Raglan, Redingote,
Mackintosh, Spenzer (English Spencer), Ulster, all these
being names of different kinds of coats. Numerous
words were taken over into what the Germans call
" sport," meaning thereby usually field-sports after the
English fashion. Examples are cricket, croquet, lawn-
Unnis (with all the terminology of tennis), goal, golf,
handicap, rekord (English record), sweater, trainer,
turf, jockei {jockey), finish, robber (i. e., rubber, in
whist), etc. Words of nautical and seafaring character
in general have also been borrowed, e. g., brigg (brig),
chartern (to charter), driften (to drift), ballast, jacht
(yacht), sloop, steward, tender, top (of mast), trimmen
(to trim, i.e., sails, etc.), kommodore (commodore),
s^hmack (smack), etc. A few further miscellaneous
illustrations are the following: bombast, essay, slang,
clown, punch, humbug, lift (i. e., elevator), dschungel
(jungle, Kipling's Jungle Book being called Dschungel-
buch), scheck (check), stocks, store, streik, streiken
(strike, to strike), kake (cake), etc.1
23. Various Borrowings in English. From Italian
Modern English has borrowed a number of words,
chiefly relating to music and the fine arts, as, for ex-
1 See Meyerfeld, Von Sprach und Art der Deutschen und Engldnder,
Berlin, 1903 ; also an article by Professor Tombo, Jr., in the New Yorker
Staats-Zeitung, August 18, 1907.
17
258 MODERN ENGLISH
ample, piano, opera, studio, fresco. Words of Span-
ish origin are desperado, matador, ambuscade, grandee,
and a few others. From Russian have come knout,
steppe, verst, and very recently duma (also spelled
douma and douhma), vodka, ikon, pogrom, etc. Modern
Dutch has given a number of nautical terms, e. g., loom,
dock, hull, sloop, yacht, skipper. A few words have
entered Modern English from the Scandinavian lan-
guages, e. g., floe, fiord, viking, troll, saga, geyser,
gantlet, ski. As a result of the English occupation of
India, a number of words of East Indian origin have
made their way into English ; examples are bandanna,
chutney (a kind of sauce), cowry, loot, indigo, rajah,
rupee, etc. From the American Indians we have bor-
rowed squaw, wigwam, wampum, tobacco, potato, toboggan,
moccasin, pemmican, besides, of course, many place
names. From Malay have come gingham, gong, gutta-
percha, lory, orang-outang, amuck, and ketchup.1 From
Chinese have come tea, mandarin, ginseng; from the
Philippines, datto, manila ; from the Polynesian dialects,
taboo, tattoo. Perhaps there is no people with which the
English have come in contact for any length of time
that has not added a word or two to the language.
These words are all interesting as showing the kinds of
relations' which existed between the English and the
various other peoples. But relatively their number
must always be small. Modern English has not felt the
need of any very extensive borrowing, and with one ex-
ception, to be noted in the next paragraph, has managed
to get along satisfactorily on its inherited resources.
Foreign words are sometimes taken into the language
1 Bradley, Making of English, p. 104.
ENGLISH WORDS 259
temporarily. They are used as long as the special cir-
cumstances which called them into prominence are
present, but afterwards they pass completely out of use.
Thus, during the Spanish- American war a number of
words became familiar to the American public through
their use in the newspapers, words like pronunciamento,
machete, reconcentrado ; and during the Boer war a
number of South African words gained considerable cur-
rency, as, for example, kojy'e (hill), trek, laager, Uit-
lander. But such words might be called "occasional
words." They do not respond to any permanent need
of the people, and after the occasion which brings them
into use, they tend to disappear altogether from the
language.
The one instance in which Modern English continues
to borrow freely from foreign languages is in its scien-
tific and pseudo-scientific vocabulary. Here the general
tendency is to name all new inventions and discov-
eries by Latin or Greek words, usually the former, either
separately or in composition. Thus Lord Rayleigh, the
discoverer of the new element argon a few years ago,
made up the name for it from the two Greek elements
a-, a prefix with a negative value, like English in-, and
epyov, work, the whole meaning " not working," or " in-
active," the significance of the name being found in the
fact that argon does not readily combine with other
elements. The recently discovered Roentgen rays have
also brought to light a new substance, radium, the name
of which is taken from the Latin radium, "ray," the
characteristic of the substance being the emission of rays
of light. Some of the applications of science to practical
purposes have carried with them their classical terminol-
260 MODERN ENGLISH
ogy. The word telephone, for example, is made up <it
two Greek elements, r?;Xe-, " far," and (frcovij, " sound "
Words like telegram, telegraph, telharmonic, are similar
compounds. The word phonograph is made up of Greek
$(*>vr}, u sound," and the root ypacj)-, meaning " to write,"
the whole word thus meaning literally " sound- writer, "
Automobile is a hybrid compound, that is, its two ele-
ments are taken from different languages, auto- being
from Greek avrdv, " self," and mobilehom the Latin word
of the same form, meaning " moving," the whole com-
pound meaning therefore u self-moving.'" Other words
entirely from Latin are carbon, from Latin carbo ; insula-
tion from insulate, which is a past participle from the
Latin verb insulare, formed from the noun insula,
" island " (cf. isolate) ; calcium from Latin calx ; sptv-
trum, from the Latin word of the same form.
Commercial terms are also often made of Latin or
Greek words, as, for example, the names of product. s
like glucose, oleomargarine, cottolene ; the tooth-powd e.r
called sozodont from Greek crwfw, " I save," and 6S6vr-,
" tooth " ; and a great many others of like formation.
24. Etymology. Since the English vocabulary is de-
rived from so many different sources, it will be readily
seen that the study of etymology, which is the study of
the origin and history of words, is one of peculiar impor-
tance to those whose native speech is English. It is not
always, or indeed generally, necessary to know the ety-
mology of a word in order to use it correctly. Words
mean to-day exactly the ideas which they convey from
one person to another, and any forcible attempt to ma ke
their present use conform to their etymological meaning
is pedantic and vain. Thus the word villain etymolojfi-
ENGLISH WORDS 261
oally is related to village, and meant originally a serf, or
person who was bound to the land. From the meaning
of u serf " or " villager," through the stages " ignorant,'*
then " degraded," the word has come to its present
meaning, " an evil or wicked person.1' Its value there-
fore in Modern English must be determined by its use,
not by its etymological history. Nevertheless, as one's
knowledge of the history and origins of one's vocabulary
increases, in the same degree one's use of words will
grow in definiteness and certainty of meaning, and in
richness of content. All great writers have been earnest
etymologists; they have striven to give their words as
full and rich a meaning as they would hold, and the
reader, on his side, can get as much meaning out of them
only when his knowledge equals that of his author.
Etymology, however, is something more than mere
guess-work. Because two words look alike, it is not
always safe to infer that they are forms of the same
word. In Old English there are two words god and
god, the first with a short vowel, giving Modern English
god, the second, with the long vowel, giving Modern
English good. But the two words are etymologically
altogether distinct ; one is not derived from the other,
and the etymology which one hears sometimes from the
lips of preachers, " God is good," is altogether false. In
Modern English the adverb gingerly, as in the phrase
"to touch something gingerly with the tips of the
fingers," looks as though it had some connection with
the noun ginger, — certainly not an obvious connection,
altho with ingenuity one might be able to hammer it
out. In fact, however, the word gingerly is not etymo-
logically related to ginger, but to gentle, gentry, etc., and
262 MODERN ENGLISH
the similarity in form does not indicate any relationship
in meaning.1 This method of explaining the etymologies
of words by their general apparent similarities to other
words was the one in common use until the compara-
tively recent results of the exact study of language,
especially phonetics, enabled scholars to formulate the
rules of etymologizing in a systematic and scientific way.
Thus Chaucer, in his version of the life of St. Cecilia in
the Canterbury Tales, following the custom of his period,
gives a half dozen different etymologies of the name
Cecilia, all of them pure guesses and all of them wrong.
Shakspere, in Cymbeline? gives a similarly fanciful
etymology of the Latin word mulier, " woman," from
mollis aer.
Two writers of modern times who were particularly
given to the vicious habit of careless etymologizing are
Carlyle 3 and Ruskin. In illustration of Ruskin's method
we may quote the following passage : " What do you
think the beautiful word ' wife ' comes from ? It is the
great word in which the English and Latin knguages
conquer the French or Greek. I hope the French will
some day get a word for it instead of their femme. But
what do you think it comes from ? The great value of
the Saxon words is that they mean something. ' Wife '
1 The word niggard is derived from a root-word found in Scandinavian
and English, meaning scanty, stingy, plus the suffix -ard, as in dullard,
coward, etc. This makes the point of the following humorous use of the
word in Higginson's Contemporaries, p. 346 : Dr. Hackett was annoyed by
vagrant boys, who delighted in filling the keyhole of his hut with gravel.
" Such conduct," Dr. Hackett said, " I should call, sir, — with no disre-
spect to the colored population, — niggardly."
2 See Cymbeline, Act V, v, 446 ; also V, iv, 140, and V, v, 437.
8 See Sartor Resartus, Chapter VII, where Carlyle gives the often-
repeated but false etymology of king from kenning (cunning), " canning,"
" the one who can," or " is able."
ENGLISH WORDS 263
means weaver.1 You must be either house-wives or
house-moths, remember that. In the deep sense, you
must either weave men's fortunes and embroider them,
or feed upon them and bring them to decay."
The absurdity of this is obvious. Whatever the word
wife may at one time have meant, it certainly does not
now mean weaver, and all of Ruskin's fine sentiment is
based upon a manifest falsehood. The grave defect of
all such etymologizing is that it takes account only of
the mere surface similarities that exist between words,
similarities which may or may not be indications of a
real relationship, but which are never systematically
tested or examined. The weakness of such etymologiz-
ing is usually to be found in the insufficient knowledge
and observation of the etymologizer. Legitimate and
sound etymologizing is not, indeed, work for novices.
It is a science that follows a method; it has its rules
and tests, and is not dependent only on clever guessing
and imagination. The tests of a reasonable etymology
are these : (1) it must be in accord with the phonetic
laws concerned ; (2) it must agree with common sense
on the side of any change in meaning which the etymol-
ogy supposes ; and (3) in the case of borrowed words, it
must agree with probability on the side of geograph-
ical and ethnological relationships. Thus, if we find a
similarity between a Hottentot word and an English
one of Chaucer's day, it must be shown that English
might have borrowed from Hottentot, or vice versa,
before an etymology deriving one from the other can
become even probable. Until one has had considerable
1 Presumably because wife and iveaver have initial w in common, and
the two somewhat similar sounds /and r.
264 MODERN ENGLISH
practice in the principles involved, the safest method to
follow in matters of etymology is to trust to the author-
ity of reputable dictionaries and special works on that
subject.
A considerable number of words, it should be observed,
have been taken over into English in exactly the forms
in which they occur in their original languages. The
problem of etymology is here a very simple one, since
the words suffer no change of form in transmission. Ex-
amples from German and French have been cited above.
But the language from which such direct borrowings
have most frequently been made is Latin. The follow-
ing is a list of a few words in common use which have
exactly the same form in both languages : animal, apex,
bonus, dogma (originally Greek), excursus, exit, extra,
fungus, genius, index, odium, omen, onus, onyx, opium,
pastor, pauper, premium, series, species, spectrum, termi-
nus, transit.
It was remarked above that the meaning of a word in
Modern English is dependent on its present use, and
not on its etymology, a point which should not be over-
looked. The historical meanings of words and their
contemporary meanings are often the same ; but when the
meaning which Shakspere or Chaucer gave to a word is
different from the meaning which men give it to-da}T,
the earlier meaning cannot impose itself on the modern
meaning. People often say that a word ought to mean
so and so, because its etymology is this or that. They
forget that language is not determined by theories of
what ought to be or what might be, but by the condi-
tions of its actual use to-day, Thus Jeremy Taylor
speaks of "holy and innocent idiots, or plain easy
ENGLISH WORDS 265
people of the laity." A plain person might well resent
being called an idiot to-day, because the word, originally
from Greek ISuorrjs, " a private person," hence a lay-
man, as distinguished from a clerk, has developed very
far away from its primary meaning. The word lewd has
had a similar history. It is derived from Old English
loewed, meaning simply a layman ; like idiot it developed
in an unfavorable direction, first into the meaning igno-
rant, then into its present uncomplimentary significance.
To take another illustration, the word mischief now
applies only to wrongful or vicious acts ; it comes, how-
ever, from an Old French word which formerly meant
merely "misfortune," "that which ends badly." The
Book of the Knight of the Tour Landry, a work of
good counsel which a father wrote for the use of his
daughters at the end of the fourteenth century, and
which was soon translated from the original French
into English, uses the word in its old sense when it
advises the daughters to be charitable, "in the same
wise as seint Elizabeth, seint Luce, seint Cecile, and
mani other ladyes that were charitables. They gauen
the moste parte of thayre good vnto pore peple that
were in necessite and mischeef ." l The same book
speaks of robbery, extortion, tyranny, murder, "and
mani other inconueniencies." 2 To class robbery and
murder together as inconveniences seems a little odd
until we realize the original meaning of the word, which
was " that which is not fitting," " wrong," from the
Latin negative prefix in-, united to the present parti-
ciple of convenire^ to be fitting or proper.
l Early English Text Society, Vol. XXXIII, p. 152.
« Ibid., p. 92.
266 MODERN ENGLISH
Certain words have persisted in English in occasional
uses as faded, traditional survivals. They preserve the
older forms of the words, but have lost the older mean-
ing without supplying a definite new meaning. Thus
we speak of a person as " wading through blood," or
"wading in his own blood." One need only visualize
the picture suggested by the modern sense of " wade "
to see how ridiculous these phrases would seem if the
word were given its literal meaning. But the word wade
in these uses is only a colorless survival from its older
sense, where it means merely " to go, walk," as in the
following line :
Beholde how he wadep yn hys owne blod ! l
Another illustration is the phrase time and tide. The
word tide, in the sense of " ocean tide," fairly fits its use
in the familiar proverb, in which alone the phrase is
used ; but the idea of ocean tide is not usually in the
minds of speakers when they pronounce the proverb.
The word tide in the phrase really has no definite mean-
ing, altho originally it had the same meaning as time,
a sense which is still preserved in compounds like
Christmas-tide, Whitsuntide, etc. In the proverb, there-
fore, it is merely a colorless survival, like wade. Occa-
sional words of this nature are used in an affected way in
modern literary style. Thus one now and then meets
the phrase " hark back " in the sense " return to," as in
the sentence " He harked back to the subject of his for-
mer discourse," or " He was continually harking back to
the experiences of the preceding summer." It is often
vaguely used also in the sense of " imitate," as when one
l Meditations on the Passion, Early English Text Society, Vol. LX, p. 1 7
ENGLISH WORDS 267
poet is said to hark back to another. The phrase has
necessarily become somewhat vague and unnatural, since
its primary significance is lost, and no new definite mean-
ing has been given to it. Originally it was a term in
hunting, and was used of the hounds returning "along
the course taken when the scent has been lost, till it is
found again."1 As long as this literal meaning was
clear, the figurative sense of the phrase was intelligible ;
but with the loss of literal significance, it has become
merely a traditional survival. Another phrase of the
same kind is " at the first blush," as in the sentence, " At
the first blush it would seem that the poets were little
concerned with the practical affairs of life." The word
" blush " has now no meaning which can make this
phrase seem reasonable. Its earlier and primary mean-
ing, however, was "look," "glance," and the phrase
meant " at the first glance." Writers who use it nowa-
days do not often have any clear sense of its meaning,
but affect it merely because they have read it in the
works of some one else.
25. Proportion of the Elements of the English
Vocabulary. Altho the English vocabulary has never
ceased to open its doors for the introduction of for-
eign words, it must not be forgotten that it has always
remained fundamentally and predominatingly English.
The number of words of foreign origin used by different
writers naturally varies with the style and manner of the
writers ; the same writer also uses sometimes more and
sometimes fewer foreign words,depending largely upon the
subject-matter of his composition. It has been estimated
that the proportion of native words to foreign, counting
1 See New English Dictionary, under " hark back."
268 MODERN ENGLISH
each word every time it occurs, is in Shakspere 90 to 10 ;
in the King James translation of the Bible, 94 to 6 ; in
the writings of Dr. Johnson, 80 to 20 ; of the historian
Gibbon, 70 to 30 ; of Tennyson, 88 to 12. In the normal
colloquial English of an average educated person the
proportion of words of foreign origin probably never
rises above ten per cent. This low percentage of foreign
words does not mean, however, that they are ineffective
and unnoticeable in style. Of the ninety per cent of
native words, a large part is made up of colorless words,
like the articles, prepositions, conjunctions, etc.; and
often the words which really give quality and tone to a
passage in writing, or a phrase in speech, are just these
occasional and somewhat exceptional words of foreign
origin.
By far the greater part of the borrowed element in
English is derived from Latin and Greek, either directly
' or through the medium of a French form. Some idea of
the extent of this classical element in English can be
formed from the fact that we have in English in com-
mon use, not counting the few occasional technical and
scientific terms, words derived from about 450 Latin root-
forms. Each of these root-forms is represented in Eng-
lish by a varying number of differentiated words. Thus
the Latin root ped-, meaning " foot," appears at least in
twelve common English words derived from it : biped,
expedite, impede, pawn (a figure in the game of chess),
peon, pedal, pedestrian, pedicel, pedigree, pediment,
pioneer, quadruped.1 Other roots are represented by
even more words in English. The root due-, for
example, as in Latin ducere, " to lead," appears in
1 For the etymology of all these words, consult the dictionary.
ENGLISH WORDS 269
27 words in English; fac-, as in Latin facere, "to do,"
appears in 39 words ; and pon-t as in ponere, " to place,"
appears in 36 words.
The number of English words derived from Greek
roots is not so numerous as those derived from Latin,
the total number of root-forms used with any frequency
falling below a hundred. An example of a Greek root
that has been abundantly productive in English is the
root contained in the words Xoyo?, " a saying," and Xeyetz/,
"to speak," which appears in all the following words:
analogy, apolog (or apologue), apology, catalog (or cata-
logue), decalog (or decalogue), dialect, dialog (or dialogue),
eclectic, eclog (or eclogue), epilog (or epilogue), eulogy,
lexicon, logarithm, logic, monolog or {monologue), prolog
(or prologue), syllogism, and in all words in -logy, as astrol-
ogy, biology, neurology, etc.
26. Purity of Vocabulary. The question of purity
of vocabulary is one of constant recurrence. According
to the usual understanding of the term, that vocabulary
is said to be " pure " which is made up altogether, or
almost exclusively, from words of a single native stock.
We have seen that the vocabulary of the Old English
period, as compared with that of the Modern English
period, is relatively very "pure." For altho Old
English borrowed a few words from Latin in order to
name objects which were brought to England by the
Roman missionaries, in general the language was sparing
in its use of new words, preferring, when necessary, to
adapt an old word to a new meaning rather than borrow
a new word outright. Later, however, first through the
Scandinavian conquest, then through the French influ-
ence, then the Renascence, and finally the modern inter-
270 MODERN ENGLISH
est in science, learning, and commerce, English has
borrowed a vast number of words. From a " pure," a
unilingual tongue, it has come to be a polyglot language,
one made up of elements from a variety of languages.
Now it happens that this polyglot character of Modern
English carries with it, to some minds, the connotation
of "impurity." If a language made up of entirely native
elements is "pure," they argue, then one made up of
divers elements is " impure," and, to that extent, less
admirable than the other. This feeling for the purity of
the language is partly based upon patriotic sentiment, a
reverence for the native idiom as such, a feeling perhaps
praiseworthy in itself, but not one which alone should be
allowed to determine all questions of vocabulary. Of
infinitely more importance than patriotic sentiment is
the matter of the effectiveness of the language in use.
It is from this point of view that we shall consider briefly
the question of purity.
The defense usually made for the pure, or Saxon, vo-
cabulary has been best presented by Herbert Spencer,
in his essay entitled The Philosophy of Style. Spencer
argues for the u greater forcibleness of Saxon English, or
rather non-Latin English " ; and the reasons why he re-
gards the Saxon, or native, vocabulary as more forcible
than the foreign, are, first, early association, " the child's
vocabulary being almost wholly Saxon " ; and, second,
the brevity of Saxon words as compared with words of
foreign origin. Spencer further adds that we should
endeavor to use concrete and specific words, which are
usually of native origin, rather than abstract and gen-
eral words, which are usually of foreign origin. Thus, he
says, we should avoid such sentences as the following:
ENGLISH WORDS 271
" In proportion as the manners, customs, and amusements
of a nation are cruel and barbarous, the regulations of
their penal code will be severe." Instead of this we
should write : " In proportion as men delight in battles,
bull-fights, and combats of gladiators, will they punish
by hanging, burning, and the rack."
With these two sentences we may compare a sample
of Spencer's own style, taken from the body of this same
essay, the foreign words being italicized : " As we do not
think in generals but in particulars — as, whenever any
class of things is referred to, we represent it to ourselves
by calling to mind individual members of it ; it follows
that when an abstract word is used, the hearer has to
choose from his stock of images, one or more, by which he
may figure to himself the genus mentioned"
Mr. Spencer's own style is in large measure the
answer to his criticism. In the above passage of 66
words, there are 13 words of Latin origin, a proportion
of 19§ per cent, which is the proportion of foreign words
in the writings of Dr. Johnson. Moreover, the sentence
quoted is an admirable illustration of general, or abstract,
statement ; it does not follow Mr. Spencer's own rule of
always speaking in concrete terms — as indeed it should
not, since the purpose of the sentence is to make a gen-
eralized statement, and not to give a group of concrete
instances. Again, the words are not such as one usually
finds in the vocabulary of children, nor are they remark-
able for their brevity. One word, genus, is distinctly a
learned word. Yet, in spite of the fact that the sentence,
which is fairly representative of Mr. Spencer's style,
breaks all the rules which he himself gives for a good
style, it is nevertheless a good sentence. It has those
272 MODERN ENGLISH
qualities of clearness, definiteness, and simplicity which
are general characteristics of Mr. Spencer's writings, even
when he writes on difficult and subtle matters of philoso-
phy. It serves its purpose well, and if so, can anything
more be asked of it? In short, the question of the
proper and effective use of words is not dependent upon
their length or their origin and history, but upon their
immediate, contemporary value ; and their value is always
determined by the purpose which the person speaking or
writing has in mind. Sometimes it is effective to use
short words — if one wishes to produce the effect which
short words produce. But long words also have their
place, and the poetry of Milton shows that they can be
used to good effect. All that we can say, therefore, as
to the choice of words, is that we should use the words
which fit the thought, whether they are Saxon or Latin.
A Saxon word, because it is a Saxon word, has no
special claims or special powers, nor, on the other hand,
has a Latin word. A word is justified, or is not justified,
by its effectiveness in expressing the thought or feeling
of the person who uses it, and any considerations beyond
this are vain theorizings.
There is one group of words of partial foreign origin
that is often regarded with special disfavor by those who
are governed by theories of the purity of language.
This is the class of words known as hybrids. These
are compound words, the elements of which are taken
from two different languages, one element from Greek,
Latin, or French, and the other from English. A num-
ber of such compounds are in common use in English,
so common in fact that no one in natural speech is
ever conscious that they are hybrids. Thus the word
ENGLISH WORDS 273
because is made up of the English preposition be- and
the Latin (through the French) causa ; around is com-
pounded of English a- and French round ; plentiful, of
French plenti- and English -ful ; outcry •, of English out
and French cry ; and so with a great many words. In
general these hybrids have become so much a part of the
language that it never occurs to any one to question
them because of the manner of their formation. The
hybrids which are picked out to bear the burden of the
disapproval of the purists seem indeed to be rather
arbitrarily chosen. Thus it is assumed that the Latin
suffix -al should be united only to words of obviously
Latin origin, as in regal from Latin regalia ; legal from
legalis; communal from communally etc. One word
which violates this rule, and which the purist therefore
brands as incorrect, is the adjective racial, compounded
of race and -al.1 That there is anything wrong or
blameworthy, however, in combining -al with a root not
obviously Latin, is disproved by such words as tidal,
from English tide and -al ; postal, from French post and
-al, etc., which have been taken into accepted and general
good use. If racial has not been taken into good use,
there is no reason, so far as its compositional elements
are concerned, why it should not be. Likewise the
suffix -ist, which is ultimately of Greek origin, would
be restricted by some theorists to composition only with
words of Greek origin, as chemist, atheist, monist, etc.
They would, therefore, disapprove of that free extension
1 The following is typical: "The word racial is an ugly word, the
strangeness of which is due to our instinctive feeling that the termination
•al has no business at the end of a word that is not obviously Latin."
The King's English, London, 1906, p. 22.
18
274 MODERN ENGLISH
of the use of -ist by which it is united to words of Latin,
English, or other origin, as, for example, words like
scientist, florist, druggist, dentist, tobacconist, contortionist,
publicist, folk-lorist, tourist, typist, elocutionist, base-ballist,
canoeist, etc. It is not contended that all these words
are in good, reputable use ; but some of them certainly
are, and the determination of the questions which are
and which are not, or which should be and which should
not be, has nothing to do with the elements of which
they are composed. In short, the true guide to the use
of hybrid compounds is to be found, not in the history
of their etymology, but in their actual value in general
use. If a hybrid compound expresses an idea ade-
quately, it is in itself as good a word as any which
is not a hybrid, since the so-called "pure" word can-
not do any more. It may be that certain of these
hybrids cited have not been accepted into good use,
among which we may perhaps include typist, canoeist,
educationalist, conversationalist, and others. But where
this is true, the reason is not to be found in the mere
fact of hybridity, since many hybrids have been accepted
into good use. The reasons are undoubtedly various,
dependent upon the separate history of each word ; but
what these reasons may be is a matter of little impor-
tance compared with the fact itself of the acceptance or
the non-acceptance of the respective words into normal,
unquestioned use. Such an acceptance is all the justi-
fication which a hybrid compound, or any other word
for that matter, needs to make it a reputable word;
and the acceptance or rejection of a word of whatever
kind is a matter almost altogether independent of its
etymology.
ENGLISH WORDS 275
27. Profit and Loss in Word-borrowing, The
question naturally arises, after a consideration of the ele-
ments of the English vocabulary, whether or not the
language has been altogether the gainer by word-bor-
rowing. That the introduction of foreign words has
been advantageous in many ways is of course unques-
tioned. The language has not become bankrupt as a
result of word-borrowing, as many of its Renascence
critics feared it would. New ideas have been ap-
propriated, new standards of thinking and conduct,
and, as the race has grown in cosmopolitan spirit,
its vocabulary has kept pace with it. Another gain
from word-borrowing is to be found in the variety of the
English vocabulary, especially its richness in synonyms.
These synonyms, or approximately synonymous words,
for language does not often preserve two words of
exactly the same value, enable the discriminating writer
to express extremely subtle shades of thought and
feeling. In illustration of such terms we may cite word-
pairs like the following : science, knowledge; informa-
tion, wisdom ; virtue, goodness ; malevolence, wickedness;
benevolence, goodwill ; regal or royal, kingly ; infant,
child or baby ; adults, elders, etc. Sometimes we have
four or five words with closely-related meanings, as still,
placid, quiet, calm, peaceful; or vast, great, large, big.
Yet each of these has its own special uses. A big man
is not the same as a great man.
Another advantage which the English vocabulary has
by reason of its large number of words of foreign origin,
especially of Latin origin, is that the language has at its
disposal two widely different styles of expression, two
planes of utterance, the one learned or elevated, th*
276 MODERN ENGLISH
other simple and popular. Perhaps this is not to be
regarded as an unmixed advantage. Perhaps it would
be better if the most learned and elevated ideas should
be all expressed in our simplest vocabulary. Certainly
it is true that the learned vocabulary of big words is a
dangerous instrument for the inexperienced writer to
work with, and of these dangers we shall have more to
say later. But properly managed, the learned and high-
sounding Latinized vocabulary serves a very useful pur-
pose. For one thing, it enables the writer to give
variety to the cadence of his phrasing. Long words
may vary and alternate with short ones, according as
the thought or mood of a passage changes. Certain
effects of dignity and stateliness can be attained in style
only by the judicious use of words which by their mere
bulk and volume of sound are stately and dignified, and
such words, it generally happens, are of Latin origin.
The language is like a great organ, and the various
classes of words are like its stops. The more stops, that
is, the greater the number of kinds of words, the more
varied and the richer are the effects which can be pro-
duced by the artist who is capable of playing upon the
language.
An author who was specially successful in his use
of the high-sounding word, of the rotund, oratorical
style, was Sir Thomas Browne. His writings have the
dignity and the stately eloquence that one associates
with the monumental classic style. In illustration, a
single sentence may be quoted from his Hydriotaphia, or
Urne-Buriall, the first edition of which appeared in
1658. He is discussing the comparative advantages of
burning and of burying as a means of disposing of the
ENGLISH WORDS 277
dead, and says : " Some being of the opinion of Thales,
that water was the original of all things, thought it most
equal to submit unto the principle of putrefaction, and
conclude in a moist relentment." An illustration of
somewhat unpleasant subject-matter was chosen to show
how the author's style rises superior to his subject. " To
submit unto the principle of putrefaction," and " to con-
clude in a moist relentment " almost reconcile one to the
thought of mortal decay. The expression, it must be
confessed, is somewhat remote from the fact, and one is
a little inclined to forget the matter of the sentence in
dwelling on the cadence of its phrasing. Indeed the
same question that troubled the minds of the conserva-
tive Renascence critics of English arises now in consid-
ering the style of Sir Thomas Browne and is continually
arising in the consideration of Modern English style.
English is always in danger of falling into a toploftical
manner of expression which soon degenerates into empty
mannerism. Perhaps it is not necessary to point out
the fascination which the " grand style " often has for the
unskilled writer. We may admire it in the pages of a
master of the method, like Sir Thomas Browne, without
setting it up as a general model of English style.
But the long words of the vocabulary lend themselves
to other effects than those which are dignified and
stately. By contrast with the simple vocabulary, the
long wbrd playfully used often has humorous value.
This sort of humor, polysyllabic humor as it may be
called, also has its dangers : it is an easy trick, and, like
most easy tricks, tends to be overworked. Always to
speak of one's house as " a domicile," or of a horse as
"an equine quadruped," is as cheap and tiresome a
278 MODERN ENGLISH
form of humor as constant punning. Sparingly used,
however, the polysyllable is not without a touch of
quaintness and charm. Charles Lamb is fond of this
humorous device, tho he also is occasionally guilty of
a too abundant use of it. As an instance of his more
successful manner, we may quote the following para-
graph from the opening of his essay on The Praise of
Chimney Sweeps : " I like to meet a sweep — understand
me — not a grown sweeper — old chimney-sweepers are
by no means attractive — but one of these tender novices,
blooming through their first nigritude, the maternal
washings not quite effaced from the cheek — such as
come forth with the dawn, or somewhat earlier, with
their little professional notes sounding like the peep-peep
of a young sparrow ; or liker to the matin lark should
I pronounce them, in their aerial ascents not seldom
anticipating the sunrise ? "
By restating the ideas of this sentence in short words
of native origin, one sees how much the flavor of it is
dependent on just the words which Lamb has chosen.
In a simple native vocabulary one would miss the oc-
casional playful contrast between the loftiness of the
diction and the lowliness of the subject, which lends it
its chief charm.
Another advantage which the language has in its learned
borrowed words consists in the fact that it can thus give
to scientific objects and ideas names which have not been
traditionally attached to other objects and ideas, and
which have not acquired through long use a group of
connotations and meanings which the scientific word
should not have. Thus, the word zoology r, a compound
word of Greek origin, according to the meaning of its
ENGLISH WORDS 279
elements might be translated literally as " life-lore," a
meaning which is decidedly too wide for zoology, that
science being concerned only with the forms of animal
life. So also " star-lore " as a name for astronomy is not
a good name, since it connotes a great many popular
notions and astrological superstitions that astronomy is
not concerned with. The word inoculate means a very
definite process of modern medicine. Etymologically it
comes from Latin w-, the preposition, compounded with
the noun oculm, " eye," also " bud of a plant." Its
original meaning in English was to graft by budding,
from which the meaning of imparting the germs of a
disease for the purpose of preventing the disease is a
metaphorical derivation. In Modern English, however,
inoculate is a word with a single, specific value, the best
kind of word that science could have. And so often it
would be extremely difficult to find simple native words
as names for scientific ideas that would not connote either
more or less than it was necessary to express.
Borrowed words, being without the connotations which
come of long and familiar use, can often be employed for
new ideas with less danger of prejudice or misunderstand-
ing than the native words of the vocabulary. Thus it is
an advantage to have the word "conductor" to name
the person in command of a train, the corresponding
English word "leader" not answering the purpose, and
" captain " being limited to the commander of a ship. So
also we may speak of a u regent " of a university, for
example, whereas the word " ruler " would imply a kind
of authority not intended. Manufacturers of commer-
cial products have seen the value of this use of foreign
words, and frequently avoid prejudice against their wares
280 MODERN ENGLISH
merely by giving strange names for familiar objects. Thus
the product known as " cottolene," a substitute for lard
made from the cotton seed, means simple "cotton oil."
Other examples taken from the names of food-stuffs are
cited above. Sometimes, however, the use of a big word
for a familiar idea or object is due merely to false modesty
or affectation, as when one speaks of a fee as an honora-
rium, or of wages as salary or emolument. Just when
wages reach the dignity of being properly called salary is
doubtless a matter of opinion ; but each word has its
proper place, and the fault of using either for the other is
equally great. It is hardly necessary to speak of a barber
as a " tonsorial artist." And all perhaps except the pro-
prietor will agree that the sign " Horse-shoeing Parlours,"
which for many years adorned the window of a New
York blacksmith's shop, is a little more elegant than the
occasion required.
On the other hand, it is certain that the large Latin
element in the English vocabulary is the source of some
danger and often of weakness in the use of the English
language. In the first place, there is the danger of losing
the sense of an intimate knowledge of the meaning of
words. Borrowed words often do not have the familiar
associations, the certainty of effect, and the precision
and exactness of meaning which native words are likely
to have.1 Often they seem not to be completely assimi-
1 English in this respect does not compare favorably with German.
" There is nothing which cannot be expressed in German by a native word,
homely, picturesque, appealing straight to the intelligence alike of learned
and unlearned. The phraseology of abstract thought is concrete here
[i. e., in German] ; it is also of native growth, not imported from Greek or
Latin. Instead of ' incarnation,' Germans speak of Fleischwerden or Ver-
fleischung. Instead of 'relation/ 'definition,' they use Verhttltniss,
Bestimmung; instead of ' concept/ Begriff. Some of their philosophical ex-
ENGLISH WORDS 281
lated, and are thus used with a looseness and vagueness
not characteristic of the native words. A familiar in-
stance is the word aggravate (from Latin ad and gravis),
which etymologically and in good literary use means
"to make worse," but which colloquially, and perhaps
carelessly, tends to be used, especially in the form ag-
gravating, in the vaguer and more general sense of
"annoy." Likewise, incisive is a word which should
have a clear and specific meaning, but which again is
often used in such general senses as " correct," " appro-
priate," " to the point." Other instances are predicament,
used as the equivalent of " plight " ; oblivious, strictly
" forgetful," used in the sense of " unobservant " or
" disregardful of," as in " oblivious of his presence,"
meaning " not having observed his presence " (Thomas
Nelson Page), or " oblivious to the cold wind " (Saturday
Evening Post). The word stupendous is often used as
though it meant simply " large " ; and unique, which
strictly should mean " single," "the only one of its
kind," frequently degenerates into vague meanings like
"strange," "excellent," or " ingenious," as in "quite a
unique collection of books " (Pall Mall Gazette) ; " the
church gave a unique entertainment last night.'*
The word balance becomes equivalent to " remainder " in
" After August you may expect cool weather for the
balance of the Summer." The general sense of " severe "
pressions, such, for instance, as Weltanschauung [literally world beholding,
i. e., philosophy of life], display an inimitable aptitude. Even the terms
of physical science are not remote from common life. Schwefelsaure ex-
plains itself more easily than Acidus Sulphuricus [i. e., sulphuric acid]."
Symonds, Essays, Speculative and Suggestive, 'V ol. I, p. 313. For further
discussion of the same point, see Educational Review. March, 1907, pp.
231-233.
282 MODERN ENGLISH
is often given to the word exemplary, as in " Their pun-
ishment was swift and exemplary " ; in careful use, how-
ever, the word means 4' exemplifying," " furnishing an
example." So also the word condign, which should mean
u deserved," " merited," is often used in vague senses of
" heavy," " severe," as in " They visited him with condign
punishment." An educated person, one of the editors of a
large city newspaper, once remarked to the author that he
was " impervious to riding backwards in trains," meaning
that he was not unpleasantly affected by it. The poster
of a land-improvement company advertised the " sale of
well-situated and eligible properties." The use of primi-
tive in the sense merely of " early," and of universal in
the sense of " common " or " widespread," is often found
even in somewhat scholarly writing. More popular is
the usage of the man who " wishes to relate a circum-
stance that occurred," meaning he wishes to tell some-
thing that happened. In his next sentence this man
would probably say that this "circumstance" was
" phenomenal," when he meant only that it was strange
or remarkable. The word temperate has practically
lost its proper meaning in the phrase "strictly tem-
perate," used of a person who is a total abstainer. Sev-
eral years ago the general post-office sent out a placard
for display in local post-offices, stating that registered
letters " require the name of the sender to be endorsed
on the face of the envelope."1 Literally, to endorse
a thing on its face is a contradiction in terms. The
word in the placard had weakened to the meaning merely
" to write " or " inscribe,"
There is, therefore, always this danger of using more
1 Tucker, Our Common Speech, p. 30.
ENGLISH WORDS 283
or less unfamiliar words in vague and indefinite senses
when they should have, and in the best use of the lan-
guage do have, definite and specific senses, the danger of
thinking and speaking in loose and general terms instead
of in the exactly fitting terms. Closely related to this is
an abuse of the language already mentioned which the -
young writer is likely to be guilty of, that is, the use of
words for themselves alone. There are so many " fine "
words, so many learned words, in the English vocabulary,
that one is sometimes in danger of becoming enamored
of words for their own sake, of using them because they
sound well, even tho they mean nothing, or are en-
tirely inappropriate to what one is speaking or writing
about. This use of big words is given in works on
composition the ironical name of " fine writing." Sty-
listically the use of " fine " words is bad English because
it takes words which have their right and appropriate
places and uses them where they do not belong. Such
methods are comparable to those of a painter who should
try to paint a pink flower by using his most brilliant
crimson color. He not only does not paint his pink
flower, but he has no color left when he wishes to pro-
duce his strongest effects. As has been stated, it is
usually the inexperienced writer who is liable to fall into
this error, the best corrective of which is to observe the
ineffectiveness of such English upon any reader whose
good opinion is worth having. To persist in the use of
"fine" words out of their proper places is to convict
one's self of insensibility to the effects produced by lan-
guage, and one who is always striving to be fine succeeds
only in being cheap, tawdry, and vulgar.
To know when not to use the big word in English is,
284 MODERN ENGLISH
therefore, one of the best safeguards a writer can have.
Indeed, it may be set down as a rule : Never use a long
word when a shorter one will do as well. The opposite
tendency, that is, to use as many and as long words as
you can, has been well described by the novelist Barrie
in his satire on what he calls " newspaper English." A
candidate is supposed to be up for an examination in
journalism, and one of the questions asked is, how to
translate the following sentence into " newspaper Eng-
lish " : " The house was soon on fire ; much sympathy is
expressed with the sufferers." The answer to the ques-
tion is this : " In a moment the edifice was enveloped in
shooting tongues of flame : the appalling catastrophe has
plunged the whole street into the gloom of night."1
Lowell, in the Introduction to the Second Series of
Biglow Papers has a similar set of phrases, one being
of the old style and the other of the new style of news-
paper-writing. Thus the old style phrase, "A great
crowd came to see," becomes in the new style, "A vast
concourse was assembled to witness." "Man fell" is
translated in the new style into "Individual was pre-
cipitated"; and "Sent for the doctor" becomes "Called
into requisition the services of the family physician."
For the purposes of satire, Barrie and Lowell have of
course given somewhat exaggerated, tho none the less
instructive, examples of "fine writing." But "newspa-
per English " is merely our modern cant term for a tend-
ency of English style that has been present ever since
the days of Caxton. The English of newspapers is not
always bad. Indeed, a fair case may be made for the
opinion that it is more generally good than bad. The
l J. M. Barrie, When a Man 's Single.
ENGLISH WORDS 285
English of a reputable city paper is usually direct,
straightforward, standing in close relation to the fact
which it narrates. Through the inexperience of edi-
tors and reporters the writing of the newspapers may
often be bombastic and otherwise inadequate; but these
faults are of course not greater than that of the second-
rate author whose style is " literary " at the expense of
directness and sincerity. That the problem of style in
English with respect to the Latinized vocabulary is es-
sentially the same, whether we look at it from the point
of view of " newspaper English," of literary style, or of
conversation, is indicated by the well-known anecdote of
Dr. Johnson, recorded by Boswell. The little story
shows clearly the vicious tendency of mind which every
English writer has to struggle against. Dr. Johnson,
according to Boswell, was speaking of Buckingham's
satirical play, The Rehearsal, and said, " It has not wit
enough to keep it sweet," adding after a moment's re-
flection, " It has not vitality enough to preserve it from
putrefaction."
VII
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
1. Modern English Grammar. The word gram-
mar, as it is understood by the scientific student of
language, is a term of wide inclusion. The grammar
of a language, in the broadest sense, includes a discus-
sion of all the facts of the language, — sounds, inflections,
syntax, excepting only vocabulary. Indeed, many sci-
entific grammars never get beyond the consideration of
sounds and inflections. There is, however, a less general
and more popular sense of the word grammar, which is
the meaning intended in its use in the present chapter.
This is a use of the word which makes it practically
equivalent in meaning to correct syntax. We say a
person speaks grammatically when he uses such syntax
as is accepted as standard use, and he speaks ungram-
matically when he does violence to standard custom.
In modern times the tendency of grammar in this
sense has been towards an 'increasing rigidity in the
grammatical system. This applies both to written and
to spoken English. In both, the limits of permissible
variation in usage are narrower to-day than they ever
have been before. The custom of the language has
tended to establish one " standard " or " correct " form
for each grammatical category, and then to adhere to
this form. The difference between present and earlier
usage can be seen by comparing Modern English with
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 287
the English of Shakspere. In Modern English we have,
for example, only one form for the third plural present
of verbs. Shakspere, however, tho he generally used
what we now regard as the standard form, could also form
plurals in -«, as in Tempest, V, i, 16 : " His tears runs
down his beard." He also formed third plurals in -en,
as in Midsummer-Night's Dream, II, i, 56 :
And then the whole quire hold their hips and laugh,
And waxen in their mirth.
And occasionally we find third plurals in -th. Shak-
apere thus had four ways of forming his third plurals,
and these various forms he was at liberty to choose
from apparently much as the need of the moment im-
pelled him. A similar freedom exists with respect to
many other grammatical categories. These various
forms are generally historical, but where later English
has chosen one of a number of historical forms to the
exclusion of the rest, earlier English frequently em-
ploys several different forms side by side.1 Sometimes
the discarded earlier form of expression persists in
Modern English, but is regarded as characteristic of
the popular or vulgar speech. Thus the double com-
parative is now frequently heard in the speech of the
uneducated and of children; in Shakspere, as in Mer-
chant of Venice, IV, i, 251, " How much more elder
art thou than thy looks," it was a construction in as
good standing as our so-called "correct" single com-
parative. In vulgar English we also have the verb
learn used transitively. In Elizabethan English learn
1 Attention has been called above (see pp. 89 ff.) to the earlier use of
the two forms of the pronoun thou and you, Modern English having limited
itself, to its own disadvantage, almost entirely to the second form.
288 MODERN ENGLISH
could be either intransitive or transitive, an illustration
of the latter use being found in the King James transla-
tion of the Bible, Psalm cxix, 66 : " O learn me true
understanding and knowledge."
It is interesting, also, to compare the standards of
spoken English of earlier periods with that of Modern
English. For this purpose the comedies of the seven-
teenth and early eighteenth centuries offer abundant
material. The dialog in these comedies is very real-
istic, coming as near to being an actual transcript of
the speech and manners of its times as English litera-
ture has ever done. Perhaps, also, no later period of
English literature has equaled this dialog in its vi-
vacity, its ease, and its truthfulness. Yet the characters,
even when we use for illustration only such as represent
educated and cultivated persons, are very free indeed in
their treatment of the King's English. In the works of
Sir George Etherege occur such constructions as the
following: 'Tis them ; It must be them ; It may be him ;
let you and I, and let thee and I; all you 'II ha' me, for
" all you will have me." * In Farquhar's Beaux Strate-
gem, Act II, we have the following : Then I, Sir, tips
me the Verger with half a crown. Frequently the same
author uses abbreviations like a'n't we, or a'n't I, for
the full forms are not we and am not L The full form
for / have not is contracted into / han't. A few further
illustrations may be cited from the comedies of Van-
brugh. In a passage of serious prose, one of his pref-
aces,2 we find forms like the following: they'll, I'm,
* The Works of Sir George Etherege, ed. A. Wilson Verity, London,
1888.
* Vanbrugh, ed. W. C. Wood, Vol. I, pp. 7-9.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 289
9t was, find 'em. These, of course, are common enough
in Modern English colloquial speech, but are now prac-
tically never. used in written style. In the dialog of
the comedies themselves the following may be noted:
' Tis well, admit 'em ; a purpose, for " on purpose " ; on 't,
for " on it " ; These shoes an't ugly, but they don't jit
me ; I han't, for " I have n't " ; don't as third singular
present, frequently ; 'twixt you and I; in these kind of
matters ; ben't, for " be not " ; by who, for " by whom " ;
sha't, for " shalt " ; blow'd, for the preterite of the verb ;
with my Lord Rake and 1 ; but was ye never in love,
sir? nor is it me he exposes. Many of these usages are
such as exist to-day in the popular speech. They are
not cited here as indicating a low general tone of cul-
ture in the comedies from which they are taken. On
the contrary, conversation was never more brisk and
effective than it is in these comedies; wit and satire
have never been expressed more certainly than here.
The examples have been cited merely to show the
change which has come over English speech. Conver-
sation now tends to be more precise and formal. Mere
correctness or regularity counts with many people for
more than it formerly did. That there has been, how-
ever, a corresponding gain in vivacity, lightness, and
spontaneity, one would hesitate to say.
2. Inflectional Change. With the setting up of a
hard and fast rigid system of grammar, naturally the
tendencies towards inflectional change, which are so
characteristic of earlier periods of English, have been
almost completely checked. The most important con-
temporary change is that which is affecting the sub-
junctive mood. Practically, the only construction in
19
290 MODERN ENGLISH
Modern English in which the subjunctive is in living,
natural use, is in the condition contrary to fact, " If I
were you, I shouldn't do it." Elsewhere, altho it
may still be emplo}^ed with some subtle distinctions of
thought, there is always a trace of consciousness in its
use; it has more or less literary or archaic or affected
flavor. It seems likely, therefore, with the continuance
of the present tendencies, that the subjunctive as a dis-
tinctive inflectional form will disappear, except, perhaps,
in the one construction noted. Even here, however, the
indicative form is used in a surprisingly large number of
instances in good modern authors. A few examples may
be cited : If I was Cadogan, I would have a peerage for
this day's work (Thackeray) ; It poured all night, as if
the sky was coming down (Matthew Arnold) ; I think
if I was beginning again, I should begin with a serious
study of Paracelsus (Life and Letters of Dean Church) ;
I should feel more sympathy with Germany if it was
only a question of its being welded together (ibid.).1
Such usages, which seem indeed perfectly natural, may
make one doubt whether the subjunctive will be able to
maintain itself even in this last stronghold of the condi-
tion contrary to fact. The feeling for the natural use of
the subjunctive being thus largely obscured or lost, one
finds it occasionally where it is appropriate by no test
either of past or present use, as in the following : " Her-
rick, devout worshipper of his pagan saint though he
were, has left hardly a phrase which is not sweet with
his own dainty country melody" (B. Wendell, The
Temper of the Seventeenth Century, p. 149). The writer
1 See Smith, " The Indicative in an Unreal Condition," Modern Philol
ogy, V, 361-364 (January, 1908), for these and numerous other examples.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 291
of this sentence did not mean to say that Herrick was
not a worshiper of his pagan saint ; apparently he uses
the subjunctive here as result of that confusion of mind
which often arises from a vague consciousness of some-
thing to be desired or avoided, and which often as not
leads one to choose the tiling to be avoided.
Occasional variation in the principal parts of verbs is
also to be observed. The principal parts of get are get,
got, got, or gotten. Neither got nor gotten is historically
the correct form for the past participle, which should be
geten. But the vowels of the past participle and of the
past tense, as frequently happened, have been leveled
under one form ; and in the case of got as past participle,
the leveling has been extended to the - en ending. The
form gotten is often criticised as an Americanism, and
it is undoubtedly a more general American use than Brit-
ish. The authentic story is told of an American who
sent a telegram to a friend saying that he had gotten
tickets for the theater that night, which the British
operator transmitted " Have got ten tickets for the
theater to-night," to the confusion of the ten when they
came to occupy two seats. But it has already been
pointed out that the -en ending is historically correct.
It is supported, moreover, by the forms forgotten, be-
gotten, ill-gotten, etc. Unless one arbitrarily elevates
one section of English usage to the position of standard,
there seems to be no reason why the form gotten should
not be allowed to exist. It is as natural in that word as
are such past participles as driven, ridden, written, etc.
There are some constructions, however, in which the
form got is the only one in customary use. We say " I Ve
got to go," never " I Ve gotten to go," as the British
292 MODERN ENGLISH
critic sometimes asserts. There is of course no reason
why got should not be used as the past participle of the
verb when the natural custom of the language calls for
it — and the same may be said of gotten.
The past participle of the verb drink is variously given
as drank and drunk. Historically drunk is the better
form, following the class of begin, began, begun; sing,
sang, sung; run, ran, run, and other verbs. The form
drunk, however, seems to be objected to because it sug-
gests the adjective use of the word. In spite of this, the
weight of usage still favors the form drunk as past parti-
ciple. Altho there is considerable uncertainty in the
popular speech with respect to the forms of a number
of past tenses, the past of blow being often made blowed,
of begin being made begun, of catch being made catched,
etc., such forms are now considered as gross errors in
the standard or correct speech. Where formerly there
was liberty of choice, as, for example, began or begun,
for the past tense of begin, the custom of standard
Modern English has recognized only one correct form.
Attention may be called, however, to the fact that the
strict rule of the grammarians is not always followed in
practice by good speakers and writers. The past tense
of the verb lie is conventionally lay ; but the form laid
is also in very general use, especially among persons not
held in restraint by academic traditions. An illustration
may be cited : " Apparently the bear laid in wait beside
the game trails, along which the deer wandered'*
(Roosevelt, Hunting the Grisly, p. 60). The same di-
versity of use exists with respect to the past tense of
dive as dived or dove. The former is the conventionally
"correct" form, but the latter, following the analogy of
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 298
drive, drove, ride, rode, etc., is a natural formation and, in
spoken use at least, is perhaps more frequently heard
than the former. An example may be cited from the
source just quoted : " The little animal . . . struck out
at him like an angry cat, dove into the bushes, and was
seen no more " (Roosevelt, Hunting the Grisly, p. 111).
Modern grammar has attempted to regulate according
to a strict system the use of shall and will in future and
other verb-phrases, but not with complete success. It is
not the present writer's intention to elaborate a detailed
statement of the rules for the so-called u correct" use of
these words. Many such have been given, all very com-
plicated, all more or less different, and all colored by the
theories of the grammarian or rhetorician from whom
they have proceeded. Beyond the simple rule that shall
is used, according to the theory of formal grammar, in
the first person, present tense, singular and plural, for
the expression of simple futurity, and will in the second
and third persons, present tense, singular and plural, for
the same purpose, and that should and would are respec-
tively used in the past tense, where shall and will are used
in the present, it is not necessary to go. The other uses,
for example will in the first person and shall in the
second and third, are generally unmistakably deter-
mined by what the speaker wishes to express ; they are,
moreover, so much colored by the mood of the moment,
the distinctions of meaning are often so subtle, that it is
hardly possible to reduce these to a practical systematic
statement, even if it were desirable. If grammar were,
as it is indeed sometimes assumed to be, a strictly logical
system which could be worked out in the quiet of the
study, and then imposed upon the speakers of the
294 MODERN ENGLISH
language, the elaboration of a complicated set of rules
for the use of shall and will might be worth while. But
if grammar is, as we assume it to be, the statement of
the usage of the people who employ the language in the
practical and effective communication of thought, any
theoretical dogmatizings as to the way in which the
words shall and mil, or any others, ought to be used,
will be worse than useless. If we observe the facts of the
actual usage of shall and will in speech we shall find the
greatest diversity. We shall find that there is a body of
careful speakers who, either through persistent instruc-
tion in formal grammar or through tradition derived from
such instruction, tend to use these words consistently in
their conventionally recognized standard forms. In cer-
tain restricted communities the standard usage has thus
become to a considerable extent the natural popular
custom. With the great majority of speakers, however,
with those who must be counted as the average, intelli-
gent population of the country, the greatest freedom
prevails. Indeed one may say that where a strong aca-
demic standardizing influence has not been brought to
bear, I will is as generally used for the future as I shall.
In the face of these facts it will obviously not do simply
to dismiss I will as " vulgar " and " incorrect." It is in-
correct only according to the system of theoretical, not
of practical, grammar, and the notion of its incorrectness
is the comparatively recent outgrowth of the modern
grammarian's striving after a rigid regulation of the
forms of speech. The simple fact seems to be that this is
one of the instances in which the conventional grammar,
Laving raised a special and not universal usage to the
position of standard, has not yet succeeded in imposing
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 295
its rules upon the speech even of those who in general
follow the rules of conventional or standard grammar.
Whether in the end it will succeed in doing so, it is not
easy to foresee. At present it seems just as likely that
conventional grammar will change its rules, as that the
great body of those who now use the " incorrect " forms
will change their practice. It is especially difficult in
this instance to impose the standard forms on colloquial
speech, because through the habit of contraction the feel-
ing for all distinction between the forms is largely ob-
scured. Thus 1 7Z, you 7Z, he 'II may as well stand for 1
will, etc., as for / shall, etc. The safest guide, therefore, in
the use of shall and will is, as ever, the guide of practical
use. In practical use it will be observed that in formal,
or literary, or careful English, a somewhat definite
a cult " has grown up with respect to the use of these
words which is often made, by the followers of it, the
test of education, even of refinement. The practical ad-
vantage of knowing the rules of this cult, even tho
they are to a high degree artificial, is obvious. On the
other hand, the observation of the widespread popular
usage should prevent one from dogmatizing too posi-
tively on the matter of correctness, should even en-
courage one to a disagreement with the strict law of
the formal or literary usage.1
1 The usual statement of the grammarians is that Scotch, Irish, and
Americans have great difficulty in acquiring the " faultless " use of shall
and will. This means, of course, that Scotch, Irish, and Americans are in-
correct in their use of shall and will only because they are measured by a
British standard. By that standard there are innumerable ways in which
American usage would be incorrect. Any one interested in the intricacies
of the shall-and-^ ill puzzle may consult the work of Dr. Gerald Molloy,
The Irish Difficulty: Shall and Will, London, 1897, in which the author
has taken two hundred pages in the attempt to lay bare its subtleties.
296 MODERN ENGLISH
In the noun the only inflectional changes of impor-
tance are those affecting plurals of foreign origin. Here
there is more or less tendency to give the foreign plurals
the form of English words, with the regular -8, -es end-
ing of plurals. Thus the plurals of index, appendix, focus,
criterion, may be either the foreign forms indices, appen-
dices, foci, criteria, or better, the English forms indexes,
appendixes, focuses, criterions. In some words, like gym-
nasium, bandit, cherub, the English plurals gymnasiums,
bandits, and cherubs, instead of gymnasia, banditti, and
cherubim (used only with reference to the Biblical cheru-
bim), are the only ones generally used. In general the
tendency to substitute English for foreign plurals is one
that should be encouraged.
In the instance of the word data, a Latin plural from
a little used singular datum, the strong popular tend-
ency is to take the word as a singular. This tendency
is helped by the fact that the word has no corresponding
singular in general use. It is consequently understood
as a singular, equivalent in meaning to " information,"
as in the sentence, " This data has been furnished on
the understanding that it will not be published." Al-
tho historically inexact, the meaning has become so
general among those who employ the word in colloquial
speech that it must be regarded as an established usage.
There is a similar tendency to use the plural phenomena
as a singular, upon which a new plural, phenomenas, is
then formed. This tendency is held well in check, how-
ever, by the learned character of the word phenomenon ;
as it becomes more popular, an increasing use of phenom-
ena as a singular may be expected.1
l For examples of phenomena as a singular and phenomenas as plural, see
the New English Dictionary under phenomenon. On the general topic, see
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 297
3. Word Order. To take the place of the older
method of binding the parts of the sentence together by
means of concord in inflectional endings, Modern Eng-
lish, having lost almost all its inflectional endings, has
been compelled to substitute instead the order of the
words in the sentence. The principles determining the
word-order of Modern English are two, first, that ideas
shall be expressed in the order of their logical succes-
sion ; and second, that related ideas shall stand in close
proximity to each other. By the first principle English
has settled upon an almost invariable succession of the
main parts in the structure of the sentence. The main
scheme of subject + verb + object is but little obscured
by the insertion of modifying parts and is not departed
from except in occasional interrogative and exclamatory
sentences. In colloquial speech, where the sentences
are naturally shorter and simpler than in the more con-
scious literary style, the simple subject + verb + object
structure is almost the only one employed. It is, in
fact, the only one that can be employed; for even in
sentences in which the forms of the words indicate their
cases, for example, I saw him and Him saw J, that rigid
feeling for one set form which is generally characteristic
of Modern English permits only the first, or natural,
order of words.
Professor Matthews' essay, " The Naturalization of Foreign Words," iu
Parts of Speech, pp. 165-183. In the case of the word opera, which is ety-
mologically the plural of the Latin neuter noun opus, both the popular and
the standard speech accept the plural form as singular, forming a new
plural operas after the common analogy of English words. Other in-
stances of a similar nature are the word differentia, by etymology a Latin
singular noun of the first declension, but often used as a plural in Eng-
lish ; insignia, by etymology a Latin plural but used in English indiffer-
ently as singular or plural ; and memoranda, by etymology a plural, but
often used as a singular.
298 MODERN ENGLISH
The second principle requiring that related ideas shall
be expressed in close proximity to each other is a neces-
sary result of the importance of word-order and of the
leading part which logic of situation plays in Modern
English. If the interrelations of words in a group are
to be determined by the logic of the ideas which they
express, naturally those ideas which are closely related
must be brought close to each other in expression, since
the logical connection would otherwise be obscured by
the introduction of extraneous ideas. We thus demand
that adjectives stand near their nouns, usually immedi-
ately before them ; that pronouns stand near their ante-
cedents ; that adverbs stand close to their modified
words ; and that verbs stand as near as possible to the
subjects which determine their number and person. In
the ordering of phrases and clauses also, the parts must
be arranged in the order of their logical sequence.
Humorous illustrations (for example, " Piano to rent by
a lady with solid mahogany legs ") of the result of not
heeding this rule abound in the grammars and rhetorics.
But the fact that we find such departures from a fixed
word-order ludicrous, even when the logic of the situa-
tion makes the meaning perfectly clear, as in the above
example, shows what a strong hold mere proximity and
order of words have acquired in Modern English speech.
This feeling for order of words in some instances
comes into conflict with certain traditional grammatical
rules. A stock illustration of this is the " split infini-
tive." It is one of the conservative traditional rules of
Modern English grammar that nothing shall stand be-
tween the infinitive and its sign to. But it is difficult
to see the logical justification for this rule. By origin
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 299
the sign to is a preposition, and the infinitive which fol-
lows it is by origin a verbal noun, which, in the inflec-
tional stage of the language, was inflected, like any other
noun, for the dative case after its preposition. More-
over, in the similar construction of the infinitive in -ing
after a preposition, no question is ever raised. If one
may say " His plan for heavily taxing the people did not
meet with approval," why may not one as well say " It
is difficult to quickly convert these securities into cash " ?
Parallel to the construction of the split infinitive is a
sentence like the following, in which the adverb now is
made part of the prepositional phrase : " Such a periodi-
cal is what I have been seeking diligently for now many
years. " Indeed the principle of Modern English gram-
mar that a modifying word shall stand as near to the
modified word as possible often favors the insertion of
an adverb between the infinitive and its sign. Examples
of " split infinitive " can of course be found in the writ-
ing of good authors. The best writers have always
availed themselves of the privilege of placing an adverb
before the infinitive when the effective exposition of
their thought required it. In contemporary speech the
" split infinitive " is most frequently heard in the usage
of those speakers who give much attention to the pre-
cise definition and expression of their thought, especially
lawyers, but who are not too much restrained by the
injunctions of the academic grammarian. It is this lat-
ter who is mainly responsible for the rigid prohibition
against the use of the u split infinitive." Like the rule
for the use of shall and will, this is another of those
traditional and theoretical laws which has acquired re-
spect and authority merely because it has been so often
300 MODERN ENGLISH
dogmatically stated. By the test of actual use and by
the test of the feeling for the Modern English idiom,
the " split infinitive " is not only a natural, but often an
admirable, form of expression.1
Word-order sometimes determines case contrary to the
usual rules of grammar. Thus from early times the
nominative form of the interrogative pronoun, instead
of the grammatical objective, has been used in sentences
like " Who do you mean ? " Shakspere, in Coriolanus,
II, i, 8, writes : Who does the wolf love ? where the con-
text shows that Who is to be taken as the object of love.
Examples are frequent in colloquial English of all later
periods. According to the rules of conventional gram-
mar, they are of course simply " incorrect." They vio-
late the rigid rule that the object of a verb must be in the
objective case, and the objective case of who is whom. But
is nothing to be said for " Who do you mean ? " The jus-
tification of the construction, so far as it goes, is to be
found in the explanation of its origin. The type-form of
the English sentence, as has been stated, follows the
scheme of subject -f verb -f object. The general feeling
thus comes to be that the word which precedes the verb
is the subject word, or at least the subject form, and
that which follows, the object ; and it is an instinctive
tendency to make all sentences adapt themselves to this
typical structure. Naturally enough, therefore, who,
when it comes first in interrogative sentences, is given
the subject form, not only in those many sentences in
which it is the grammatical subject, as in " Who called
1 For a full discussion, with numerous examples, of the split infinitive,
see Lounsbury, The Standard of Usage in English, pp. 240-268 ; Hall,
American Journal of Philology III, No. 9, 1882; Borst, Enylische Studien,
XXXVII, 386-393."
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 301
yesterday ? " but also in sentences in which it is the
grammatical object, as in " Who did you call ? " Since
this latter construction follows the logical tendency of
modern grammar, by that test it is correct ; and since,
moreover, it is in wide colloquial use, it can be con-
demned in practice only by the believer in the rigid
theoretical system of grammar.
Another instance in which order of words has been
influential in determining the form of a case is the con-
struction " It is me." This usage may be said to have
fairly won its way, at least into good colloquial speech.
Other similar forms, like " It is her, him, them," have
perhaps not been quite so successful, altho they fol-
low the same tendency. In these sentences the type-
form, subject + verb + object, has caused even the word
after the copulative verb to assume the objective form.
So strong is this feeling for the objective as the case
of all words after the verb that the traditionally correct
" It is I " has come to be regarded as too correct, that
is, as somewhat pedantic and affected.
An interesting conflict of tendencies arises in such
sentences as " I had no expectation of him doing that,"
or "I had no expectation of his doing that." Both
usages are widely current in colloquial speech, altho the
rigid grammarian strives to make the forms with the
possessive, that is, " of his doing that," the only correct
form. This is especially true when the -ing word is pre-
ceded by a pronoun. Otherwise, even in good literary
style, one finds the non-possessive form frequently used,
as in the following examples : " This impossibility of
one man producing work in exactly the same manner as
another makes all deliberate attempts at imitation as-
302 MODERN ENGLISH
sume the form of parody or caricature" (Symonds,
Essays Speculative and Suggestive, II, 7) ; "I can only
suggest a reason for the effect being so much greater in
my own case " (Hudson, Idle Days in Patagonia, p.
226) ; " he points out the necessity of style being fash-
ioned to the matter " (G. Gregory Smith, Elizabethan
Critical Essays, p. xlii) ; " the fact is that, strictly
speaking, there is no such thing as a language becoming
corrupt" (Lounsbury, The Standard of Usage, p. 57);
" the negro in New England very likely comes of a free
father and grandfather, and the fact of a negro being free
a generation or two back was pretty sure sign of his be-
longing to the more energetic class of his fellows " (Free-
man, Some Impressions, p. 148); " there had been a scene
between his father and himself, which ended in his father
disinheriting him " (New York Times) ; " there is some-
thing droll in the notion of a Tax Commissioner being
not too politely bowed out of office " (ibid.) ; " the
shortness of his left leg prevented him running " (ibid.) ;
" occasioned by the latter using an old school-fellow's
privilege " (Jespersen, Growth and Structure, p. 237) ;
" the Wagnerites who used to prate about Italian opera
being dead" (Netv York Evening Posf).
The logical origin of the two forms of expression, the
one with the possessive, the other with the non-posses-
sive form of noun or pronoun, is not difficult to see. In
a sentence like " I was used to him being so excited,"
the instinctive feeling is that the preposition to should
be followed by an objective case, "him," especially so
since the word which follows " him " is not a simple
noun, but that peculiar kind of noun which we call a
verbal, a noun that possesses as much the value of verb
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 303
as of noun. The sentence is thus adapted to the form
of the parallel sentence, " It was usual for him to be so
excited," in which both " him " and " to be " are the
independent objects of the preposition. On the other
hand, when the possessive form is used, " I was used to
his being so excited," the verbal value of " being " is in
the background, and as its noun value is emphasized, it
must logically become the sole object of the preposition
and be preceded by a modifying adjective pronoun. On
logical grounds, therefore, both constructions are " cor-
rect " ; but the choice of the construction which one
prefers to use depends, of course, not so much upon
logic as upon the conventionalized custom of the lan-
guage. As has been stated, there is a strong academic
tendency to regard the form of construction with the
objective as popular English, and to elevate the con-
struction with the possessive as the sole standard or cor-
rect form of the construction. The examples given
above, however, are sufficient to indicate that a hard and
fast rule requiring the possessive before the infinitive in
-ing is not a description of the real facts. There are
indeed some instances in which the possessive is never
found, some even where it would be impossible idiom.
Thus when the noun before the verbal is a plural with
the usual s- ending, the possessive relation is never in-
dicated by an apostrophe, a fact which shows that there
is really no feeling for the possessive relation present in
the construction. One could not write Protestants' in
the following : " This has arisen in good measure from
Protestants not knowing the force of theological terms "
(Newman, Apologia, p. 352); or authorities9 in "She
laughed at the idea of the. authorities holding her " (New
304 MODERN ENGLISH
York Times) ; or feats in "I have known of these feats
being performed several times" (Roosevelt, Hunting
the Grisly, p. 121). In a sentence like " We had not
thought of that being his real occupation," a possessive
form that '« is out of the question ; the pronoun must be
in the common or non-possessive form. It seems then
that only when the verbal is preceded by a personal pro-
noun or the name of a person is there any strong feeling
that the possessive form is necessary. The hostility
towards a sentence like the following, " History has no
record of a city existing under such circumstances," is
decidedly less than it is towards a sentence like, "No
one ever heard of Lincoln making such a speech." But
sentences like this second are common enough even in
good writers, and the dogmatic rule of the grammarian,
here as ever, must be taken with liberal allowance.
4. Concord. The triumph of the logic of meaning
over the strict rules of formal grammar is frequently illus-
trated by the concord of verb and subject in Modern Eng-
lish. A sentence, for example, like " The whole car were
laughing," is good English, altho it contains a singu-
lar subject and a plural verb. By " car," however, one
of course means " all the people in the car," and this
idea has more value in determining the number of the
verb than the singular form of the mere word. Likewise
we may have two related ideas, connected by the coor-
dinating and, which stand as the subject of a singular
verb because they are thought of as practically one idea.
An illustration is Kipling's line, " The shouting and the
tumult dies." According to strict grammar, we should
of course have " die " ; but again the logic of ideas rises
superior to the rules of formal grammar. The same
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 305
principle applies to the varying treatment of collective
nouns. We may say " The jury were of one mind," in
which the component parts of the jury is the thought
uppermost in the mind ; or we may say " The jury was
selected without difficulty," where the jury is thought of
as a whole. A plural verb is often used in constructions
in which we have a singular subject to which is united a
prepositional phrase which has all the value of a cotfrdi-
nate subject. Thus the following sentence is part of the
inscription on a tablet recently erected in memory of the
novelist Blackmore : This tablet with the window above are
a tribute of admiration, etc. This construction is very
old, being found abundantly as far back as Old English.
Again it is the logic of the situation which determines the
concord, " This tablet with the window " being logically,
tho not grammatically, equivalent to " This tablet and
the window."
In a similar way a plural demonstrative adjective is
often used before the singular noun, in constructions like
" These kind of apples are hard to get," or " Those sort
of people are not often met with." This is very general
colloquial usage, and sufficient examples may be cited
from good authors to show that it is* not impossible
literary usage. Again it is the general logic of the
situation which determines the plural forms these, those.
The words kind and sort are themselves collective nouns
and imply the idea of plurality. They are, moreover,
usually followed in this idiom by the plural of the whole
of which the word kind or sort is a part, as in the above
examples, of apples and of people. The predominant
thought of the whole group of words is consequently a
plural idea, and the demonstrative naturally takes the
20
306 MODERN ENGLISH
plural form. The grammar of such constructions is
determined by the logic of general situation, not by the
laws of formal concord.
Another familiar illustration of the importance of
general situation as compared with grammatical concord
is to be found in the construction known as " dangling"
or " unrelated participle." The strict rule of the gram-
mars and rhetorics is that the participle must not be used
without definite and expressed indication of the word
which it modifies. With unskilled writers this is a safe
and necessary rule, since often ridiculous blunders are
made by neglect to follow it. The loose construction is
often used also when the writer has not taken the trouble
to think out clearly what he has to say. A sentence like
" Standing on the hilltop the valley stretched away for
miles " is bad English, not merely because the participle
"standing" has no word to modify, but because the
general situation is not adequately expressed. At the
same time it must be acknowledged that as a rigid rule
admitting no exceptions, the prohibition against the
dangling participle is also a dogma of the theoretical
grammarian which is contrary to actual practice. Sen-
tences like the* following from Carlyle, " Speaking in
quite unofficial language, what is the net purpose and
upshot of war ? " can be readily paralleled, not only in
colloquial speech, but also in the more correct literary
style. The following is from Robert Louis Stevenson,
whom one can hardly regard as a careless writer : "Thence,
looking up and however far, each fir stands separate
against the sky no bigger than an eyelash, and all together
lend a fringed aspect to the hills " (Silverado Squatters).
Such sentences are indeed quite in harmony with the
^*1ET$^7>£«y
j*"r* r *** i**'**3 ¥•/ Tfe
i^^rtP'-' ^fc^J
H*y0*+k ikt^fetrC +»yt*-*Llw*
+•!*+& *&*rerr*1i* <»** M+r^
-,-^ s-^Zffi^ffc/****
*»Ai/c •Uv«i^% «*»^ *™ PT*f* f**i!L '
, ^*^&p«*%^tth'***
uW+TH+tKt *»»4&>****** ++tv*U *•*<*
f M/ <%t*4~k£io~> ~<€>
AUTOGRAPH OF MILTON'S "LYCIDAS," U. 165-193.
(For description, see Appendix.)
308 MODERN ENGLISH
general tendency of English towards contracted and
elliptical forms of expression. So long as the meaning
is fully conveyed, we do not usually trouble ourselves
much about questions of grammatical completeness. It
is only when the meaning is obscure, or when some un-
suitable grouping of ideas is brought about by the failure
to follow the rules of grammar, that we have recourse to
the formal rule of grammar to correct the evil. In other
words, grammatical correctness is in many instances in
Modern English not a positive, not even a necessary,
virtue, but merely a safeguard to prevent misleading or
inadequate forms of statement.
5. Meaning and Function. Attention has already
been called to the ease and frequency with which words
of one part of speech pass over into another. This again
is partly due to the importance of meaning as distin-
guished from form in Modern English. Since words in
Modern English usually stand for ideas, without formal
restrictions as to the way these ideas shall be expressed,
they easily lend themselves to a great variety of uses.
The function, or part of speech, of a word can thus be de-
termined in Modern English only by the logic of its use.
The words out, m, then are usually adverbs, but in phrases
like " the out voyage," " the in voyage," " In the then con-
dition of my mind " (Dickens), they are plainly adjec-
tives. Similarly the word so, in the sentence, " He was
poor but honestly so," can hardly be disposed of as an ad-
verb. Its function rather is similar to that of the pronoun,
altho the word which it here stands in place of is the adjec-
tive "poor," an equivalent form of the sentence being
" He was poor but honestly poor." In some instances
the loss of older inflectional forms has resulted in a feel-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
ing of some uncertainty on the part of the formal gram-
marians with respect to the functional uses of words.
Thus the old dative adverb formed by the addition of
the inflectional -e to the adjective, by the loss of final -e
has become exactly like the adjective in form (see above,
p. 72). Some grammarians are therefore inclined to re-
gard such constructions as " go slow," as in " The need of
going slow in astronomical science we have urged many
times on its practitioners " (New York Times), or " I can't
walk fast," etc., as incorrect, substituting what they re-
gard as the correct adverbial forms, " go slowly," or " I
can't walk rapidly." They thus strive to establish a
rigid and unequivocal form for adjective and adverb.
This, as we have endeavored to point out, is contrary to
the spirit of Modern English grammar, which makes
logical meaning rather than form the test of value of a
word, and if slow and fast are used as adverbs, they a^e
adverbs and nothing else. By this rule the word " even-
ings," in the sentence " The library will close evening
at eight o'clock," is a pure adverb, equivalent in meaning
to the adverbial prepositional phrase " in the evening."
In origin it is derived from an older adverbial genitive
in -es (a construction which still exists in Modern
German), with which in later times was confused the idea
of the plural. But logically, and therefore grammatically,
its function is adverbial in Modern English whether it is
regarded as a singular or a plural, and the construction
is to be accepted as a natural idiom of Uie language.
Such adverbial ideas as extent of time and space are also
expressed without inflection for adverbial form. Thus
"hours" in "I walked two hours," and "miles" in "I
walked two miles " are both adverbs. They are some-
310 MODERN ENGLISH
times called " adverbial objectives/' because this ad-
verbial function was expressed in the Old English period
by inflection for the accusative case; but in Modern
English there is no thought of case connected with the
words, and their function is determinable merely by their
logical meaning. In one instance, in the construction
" I am going home," we have the word " home " pre-
served in what was originally a locative case of a noun ;
but here also the feeling for case has disappeared, and the
word is to be regarded simply as an adverb.
Another adverb which in origin is derived from an
inflectional form, but which has become even more
obscured than those cited, is the adverb the in such
expressions as " The more the merrier" ; " The sooner you
do this, the better it will be for you." The word the in
the inflectional Old English period of the language was,
in this construction, an instrumental case of the demon-
strative pronoun, its form being J>y ; in meaning it was
equivalent to a prepositional phrase " by this," or "by
that." Our Modern English " The more, the merrier "
might be paraphrased, therefore, as "more by this,
merrier by that," in which of course " by this " and " by
that" are adverbial phrases modifying the adjectives
"more " and " merrier." From this analysis it will be
seen that the word the in such constructions as the more,
etc., since it has the function of an adverb, is to be treated
as such, even tho in form it seems very remote from
everything that we connect with the idea of adverb. It
is not possible to dismiss the construction, as is often
done, merely as an " idiom," incapable of analysis. It is
an easy but unjustifiable way of evading grammatical
difficulties to group them together as idioms, undeiv
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 311
standing by that term peculiar, illogical, and inexplicable
constructions which have found their way into the
language in some mysterious manner beyond the power
of man to discover. Idioms of this sort are not found
in the English language. There are many constructions
which it is difficult to account for on the basis of the
traditional, theoretical systems of grammar, but there
are no constructions which cannot be accounted for on
the grounds of logical development. The term " idiom "
is needed for better uses than to serve as a designation
for something which does not exist. It is needed to
designate those methods of expression which are peculiar
to one language as distinguished from another. Thus
it is proper to speak of an English, a German, or a
French idiom. To write or to speak English idiomati-
cally means to write or speak it with due understand-
ing of and regard for those specific forms of expression
by virtue of which English is English as distinguished
from all other languages.
An interesting development of Modern English gram-
mar is the extension of the class of copulative verbs. A
copulative verb may be defined as a verb of weakened
predication or assertion. It serves as a colorless link-
word rather than to make a positive declaration. Its
commonest, and apparently oldest form, is the verb " to
be," which in its most positive significance expresses
merely the negative act of existence. Closely related to
"to be" are such words as "to become," "to appear,"
"to seem," etc. Syntactically these copulative verbs
have to be put into a class apart from the transitive
verbs, because when they are followed by a substantive
word, noun or pronoun, this word is in the nominative,
312 MODERN ENGLISH
OT predicate nominative, case, and also because, unlike
the transitive verbs, they may be followed by adjectives,
known as predicate adjectives, as in " I am glad," or " He
seems happy." It is in this second construction, in
cases in which the copulative verb is followed by the
predicate adjective, that the extension of its use has
occurred. The forms of the verb " to be " have remained
the only ones which may be followed by a nominative
case of the pronoun. But the number of verbs which
may be followed by predicate adjectives has been largely
increased. Examples are turn, as in " The milk turned
sour " ; look, as in " he looks sad " ; feel, as in " I feel
sick " ; smelly as in " it smells sweet " ; sound, as in " the
horns sound loud " ; flush, as in " he flushed red " ; and
a great many others. Instances occur abundantly in
literary English. Jeffries (The Open Air) has the follow-
jig : " There was a coat of fallen needles under the firs
an inch thick, and beneath it the dry earth touched
warm." With the novelist Meredith it has developed
almost into a mannerism of style. Almost every page
will furnish illustrations, of which one or two from the
early pages of his Vittoria may be cited : " Luigi's blood
shot purple " ; "In his sight she looked a dark Madonna,
with the sun shining bright gold through the edges of the
summer hat." Many of these verbs have quite as much
asserting value as most intransitive verbs, and if it were
not for the predicative adjectives which accompany them,
we might classify them simply as intransitive verbs.
That these words which stand after the verbs are true
adjectives and not adverbs is determined by our feeling
for the logic of the statements. Sentences like " The
flower smells sweet" or " The earth touched warm " do
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 313
not describe the manner of action of the verb. They are
rather equivalent to the paraphrases, "The flower is
sweet to the smell," and " The earth was warm to the
touch." They combine, therefore, the function of the
copulative and the intransitive verb, and are charac-
teristic of Modern English in their vigorous compression
of statement. The same feeling for compact, strong ex-
pression which leads to the direct formation of verbs from
nouns, as, for example, " to bell a cat," instead of the
weaker " to put a bell on a cat," or " to house the poor/'
instead of " to provide houses for the poor," will help io
explain also such elliptical and strongly expressive uses
of the verb as " The earth touched warm," instead of
" The earth was warm to the touch."
6. Function-Groups. One result of the loss of i/i
flections in English and the consequent tendency of the
words of the language to assume generalized forms, each
word becoming a completely independent word-unit, has
been the formation of what may be called function-
groups. In a completely inflectional language, such
things as function-groups would not exist ; for the lan-
guage would have for every grammatical function which
it wished to express an appropriate inflectional form.
In English, however, many of the grammatical functions
can be expressed only by means of groups of words.
Thus English has no true inflectional passive voice, and
has not had any since the earliest recorded periods of its
existence. The passive voice has to be expressed by a
group of words, consisting of a form of the verb " to be "
united to the past participle. Likewise most of the
tenses in Modern English, e. g., I have gone, I had gone,
I shall go, etc., have to be expressed by function-groups,
314 MODERN ENGLISH
not by inflections. If we were strictly logical, we should
write the parts of a function-group together as one
word, since it has but a single value ; or at least we
should connect them by hyphens, I had-gone, I shall-go,
etc. As a matter of fact we do this in some instances,
but in others we do not. We write " window-sill ,"
" typewriter," " office-boy," etc., with or without hy-
phens, but exactly similar groups are not united at all,
as, for example, " a bank president," " the city editor,"
"a carpet factory," etc. The usage of the printed and
written language in this respect is altogether inconsist-
ent. Certain compound prepositions, like into, beside,
etc., are written together as one word, but others are not
only not written together, but may not be written to-
gether, such as out of, on to, alongside of, because of, by
reason of the artifical distinction established by conven-
tional usage. This diversity of printed and written
forms is, however, purely accidental and external. The
function of out of and into are identical in the sentence,
"He fell out of the boat into the water," even tho
they do differ in form. A few further illustrations may
be cited. The words head on, in " The ships struck head
on" is an adverbial function-group modifying struck.
In the sentence, " The shores were steep to all around "
(Conrad, Nostromo, Chapter I) steep to is a predicate
adjective. The verb in the sentence, " It is all over with
me " is the function-group is over, which is modified by
the adverb all. The value of burst open as a function-
group is clearly brought out in the following sentence,
where the words are once used as a verb and then as an
adjective : " The cottonfields themselves when the bolls
burst open, seem almost as if whitened by snow, and the
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 315
red and white flowers, interspersed among the burst-open
pods, make the whole field beautiful" (Roosevelt, " In
the Louisiana Canebrakes," Scrilner's Magazine, January
1908). The words thirty odd, in " I found thirty odd
volumes on the shelves," are an adjective modifying
volumes, exactly equivalent in value to thirty-three, or
thirty-five, etc. In the sentence " I will look into it,"
the verb is the group will look into ; in " The ball went
flying through the air," the verb is the group went flying ;
in " He ran up a bill," the verb is ran up. Many other
illustrations might be cited, but those given are sufficient
to show that not every separate word by itself has gram-
matical function in Modern English grammar, but that
words must often be taken together as constituting
function-groups. In such cases it is contrary to the
idiom of the language to try to analyze the groups into
their constituent parts so as to give every word, standing
alone, a clearly defined structural value.
So far has this feeling for the function-group devel-
oped that often we have a kind of group inflection.
Thus in a phrase like "The governor of California's
policy," the possessive inflection should strictly go with
governor ; the whole phrase, however, the governor of
California, is felt to belong together and to serve as a
possessive modifier of policy, and the inflection is conse-
quently attached to the group as a whole. This use is
capable of almost indefinite extension. In groups of
two or more words in names or titles, as, for example,
Beaumont and Fletcher's Works, the Chicago and Alton's
rolling stock, etc., the possessive inflection ends the group.
In two appositive nouns the possessive inflection is added
pnly to the second, as in " We stopped at Mr, Barton,
316 MODERN ENGLISH
the clergyman's house, for a drink of water." In popu-
lar speech a sentence like " That 's the man we saw yes-
terday's hat " is not only quite intelligible but is felt to
be quite idiomatic. It is equivalent to " That is the hat
of the man whom we saw yesterday." This, however, is
very formal English, the phrase " the hat of the man "
being unusual spoken idiom ; one would more naturally
say " That is the man's hat whom," etc. In the sentence
as first given the main structural part of the sentence is
simply " That is the hat " ; the rest of the sentence is
felt to be merely a possessive modifier of hat, and the
mark of the possessive relation is consequently added
to the last word of the group preceding the modified
word.
An instance of artificial logic applied to a related
construction is to be found in the affected use of the
phrase somebody or anybody else's. The normal idiom
in the use of this phrase gives it the form cited. It is a
function-group with the value of an indefinite pronoun,
and the possessive inflection is naturally appended to the
last element in the group. With certain theoretical
and conscious speakers and grammarians, however, the
phrase is given the form anybody's else. This is neither
general custom nor is it good logic. To say His opinion
is as good as anybody' 's else, or to speak of anybody's else
policy would be as unidiomatic as to say the governor's
policy of California. The use of the form anybody's else
is a good illustration of the danger of placing the
authority of individual and theoretical logic above the
authority of general custom in language.
7. Mixed Syntax. Occasional questions of gram-
mar arise in which the source of the difficulty lies in the
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 317
mixing of two forms of construction. A familiar illus-
tration is the prohibited " and which" and " and whom "
construction. According to the strict rule, which and
whom should be connected with a preceding clause by
the coordinating conjunction and only when a real coor-
dination is intended, that is, when two relative clauses
of the same syntax are to be coordinately united.
Colloquially, however, and to a considerable extent in
literary style as well, the coordinating and is used to
connect a single relative clause with its main clause.
The following sentence from a newspaper report of a
recent speech of the King of Portugal will serve as
illustration: "I thank your Majesty for the cordial
reception you have given us, and which we appre-
ciate." Another illustration may be cited from Bor-
row (Bible in Spain, II, 336), in whose writings the
construction abounds: "The principal personage, and
to whom all the rest paid much deference, was a tall
nan of about forty." Such constructions are really a
confusion of two different forms of expression. From
the two forms, "I thank your Majesty for the cordial
reception you have given us, which we appreciate,"
add " I thank your Majesty for the cordial reception
you have given us, and we appreciate it," is fashioned
a contamination of both, " I thank your Majesty for the
cordial reception you have given us, and which we ap-
preciate." The sentence from Borrow is made up of
the two forms, " The principal personage, to whom all
the rest," etc., and " The principal personage and the
one to whom," etc., or " The principal personage and to
him," etc. From the point of view of clear definition
of thought, there is consequently good ground for
318 MODERN ENGLISH
objecting to the lax use of the and which, and whom
construction.
Another illustration of mixed syntax is to be found in
the customary use of the preposition to, into after a verb
of rest, as " Have you ever been to Chicago ? " The
usual preposition after forms of the verb to be is a£,
after verbs of motion, to, into. In sentences like the one
cited, however, the verb to be is not the mere verb of
rest, but has almost acquired the value of a verb of
motion. In other instances the construction does not
seem quite so natural. The following from a recent
magazine article : " By one o'clock I was back to Mr.
Rogers' office," would be more customarily expressed
" By one o'clock I was back at Mr. Rogers' office," or
" By one o'clock I came back to Mr. Rogers' office."
The phrase " have never been into it," occurs in
the following sentence (Henry James, Transatlantic
Sketches, p. 237) : " The church is lighted only by a
few glimmering tapers, and as I have never been into it
but at this hour, I know nothing of its interior aspect."
We might naturally say " I have never been in it," or
"I have never gone into it," but "I have never been
into it" seems to be an unidiomatic blending of both
forms of expression.
An old rule of the formal grammars and rhetorics
which is now happily passing out of existence ran to
the effect that sentences must not end with prepositions.
The rule was made in face of the fact that in actual
speech and in writing sentences do end with preposi-
tions, and historically, from the Old English period
down, always have ended with prepositions in certain
constructions. The shifting of the preposition to the
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 319
end of the sentence merely has the effect of emphasizing
its adverbial value. In sentences containing a relative
clause with the relative pronoun omitted, the sentence
cannot end otherwise than with a preposition, as in
" Where is the man you are to play with ? " or " This is
the house I was born in." But the old rule is perhaps
too far gone to require more than a passing notice. A
rule of similar origin, which is also less frequently met
with now than formerly, relates to the pronoun to be
used in referring to the indefinite one. The old rule
ran to the effect that one must always be referred to by
itself or one of its forms. By rule the following sen-
tence would be very elegant English : " If one should
do that, one would soon find that one's reputation would
suffer." In natural usage, however, one may be and
is referred to by Ae, and, in the possessive, by his.
Another artificial rule more honored in the breach than
in the observance is that which requires the coordinate
particles so ... as when the sentence is negative,
but as ... as when the sentence is affirmative. Thus
we must say " He is as tall as I am," but " He is
not so tall as I am." No valid argument can be found
for this rule either in logic or in actual use, and it seems
to owe its existence merely to that passion for subtle
and dogmatically defined distinctions which generally
characterizes the theoretical grammarian. The prohibi-
tion against the use of like as conjunction has a little
more relation to actual fact. The word may be used as
verb, as in " I like tennis " ; or as a preposition, as in
" You look like your father " ; or as an adverb in some-
what archaic or popular speech, as in " You are not like
to find him here." But in such a sentence as "Ha
320 MODERN ENGLISH
looks like I did at his age," the usage is " now generally
condemned as vulgar or slovenly." l The use of like as
conjunction arises from the ellipsis of a fuller form, like
as, as in the verse in the Psalms, " Like as a father
pitieth his children," etc. In the simplification of this
double conjunction, it happens that the second half is
the one which has most generally persisted and the one
which the formal grammarian would raise to the position
of standard. But the ellipsis of as, leaving like for the
simplified conjunction, is just as natural and just as
reasonable, and so we find it in use side by side with as.
"The use of like for as," says Professor Matthew?.2
" not uncommon in the Southern States [and Eastei n
and Western he might have added], has there always
been regarded as an indefensible colloquialism; but ;n
England it is heard in the conversation of literary men
of high standing, and now and again it even gets itse If
into print in books of good repute." A colloquialis1 n
like as conjunction may be, but indefensible it certainly
is not. It is first of all a widespread custom of the
speech, it has arisen naturally and in the same way that
as has, and unless one starts from the a priori position
that there is only one legitimate form of expression for
every idea in speech, it makes as strong a bid for favor
as the conjunction as.
8. Book Grammar. The study of systematic, or
technical, or formal grammar, as it is variously called,
has grown tremendously in modern times. It is made a
part of every elementary and high school course of in-
1 New English Dictionary, s. v. like. The dictionary adds, however,
that "examples may be found in many recent writers of standing."
* Americanisms and Briticisms, p. 16.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 321
si ruction, and is even sometimes carried over into the col-
lege. Where in earlier periods the development of the
feeling for the customary forms of expression was left
almost entirely to natural habit, as developed in the
home and in general social intercourse, in modern times,
partly through the elevation of a more rigid standard of
uniformity in usage, but mainly through the wide ex-
tension of popular education, the tendency is to make
grammar as conscious and systematic a study as history
or mathematics. This tendency began only in the mid-
dle and latter part of the eighteenth century. One of
the earliest grammars of the modern type was that of
Bishop Lowth, published in London in 1767. In the
preface to this volume, the author declares that " the
principal design of a Grammar of any language is to
tuach us to express ourselves with propriety in that lan-
guage, and to enable us to judge of every phrase and
form of construction, whether it be right or not. The
p(ain way of doing this is to lay down rules, and to
illustrate them by examples. But, besides showing
what is right, the matter may be further explained
by pointing out what is wrong." And so the greater
part of Lowth's grammar is taken up with pointing
out what he thinks to be right and what he thinks to
be wrong in the writings of Pope, Dryden, Prior, and
other authors of his period whom we now regard as
classic. Grammars were also written, about this time,
for the instruction of "young Gentlemen," and espe-
cially for the use of " the fair Sex," whose defective
education in grammar, spelling, and composition is the
subject of frequent satirical comment in the writings
of the period. These grammars are significant of a
21
322 MODERN ENGLISH
change which was coming over English education at
that time. Formerly it had been regarded as sufficient
school-master education for a gentleman if he was able
to sign his name to a document, and many a lady
famous in English history could not boast even of this
accomplishment. Now, however, a new test of educa-
tion or cultivation began to assume prominence, the
test of ability to express one's self in the conventional
or standardized forms of expression, both in speech and
in writing. The tendency towards a fixed spelling and
a fixed grammar went hand in hand, and so far has this
tendency advanced that to-day deviations from the es-
tablished and conventional orthography and grammar
are the most convenient and the most frequently ap-
plied rough tests, if not of culture, at least of education
and social position.
The importance which modern education has assigned
to conventional grammar has naturally resulted in the
development of what we have called " book grammar."
Correct grammar having been made one of the essentials
of correct conduct it was necessary to have books giving
the rules of correct grammar. To supply this need those
speakers of the language who were convinced that they
knew what the correct grammar of the language was
have provided such books with amazing abundance.
These books are, of course, nothing more than the record
of the customary use of the language as observed by the
authors of them, for the grammarian has no more power
of legislating in the rules of grammar than the scientist
has in the physical laws of nature. Both simply record
the results of their observation. The hold, however,
which the records, of the professed grammarian have ac-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR 323
quired over the average user of the language is peculiar.
The grammarian merely records the social habits or cus-
toms of the speech of his community, and yet many per-
sons who in other ways determine their social habits or
customs by their own observation, give to the grammar
the power of a final authority. The rules of personal
conduct, for example, behavior at table, or the forms of
politeness, are learned by the process of -social inter-
course ; no one of any social experience governs his con-
duct by, or defers to, the authority of the rules of any
book of good manners. For such he usually has the
greatest contempt, preferring to follow the guide of per-
sonal experience and observation. But the customs of
speech are also merely the regularized habits of the
speech of a community. Why, then, should not the
speaker depend as much upon the authority of his per-
sonal experience and observation here as in the other
social relations of life ? If the discussions of the preced-
ing pages have been followed, it will be evident that it
is the author's opinion that he should. Grammars are
sometimes helpful in enabling a speaker or writer to
broaden the field of his personal observation. But in
the end, unless he is willing to become merely a blind
follower of precept and authority, his own use must
rest upon personal observation and choice. Book gram-
mar is inadequate as a guide ; it is even at times false
and misleading. The best grammar ever written is only
a skeleton of the speech of some past period. To set
book grammar up as the test and the source of authority
in language inevitably leads to a stiff, artificial, and un-
expressive use of language. The real guide to good
grammar, to good English in all respects, is to be found
MODERN ENGLISH
in the living speech. And only he whose experience
and observation of the living speech are sufficiently
broad to enable him to employ it with perfect ease ard
confidence can be said to have realized the spirit, tli£
idiom of the language.
vm
CONCLUSION
In the discussions of the preceding pages a good deal
has been said here and there concerning good English
and bad English. It may be of advantage to gather
together, by way of conclusion, the various threads of
these discussions, and to endeavor to present some con-
nected answer to the ever-recurring question, What is
good English?
It is plain that the question of good English may arise
with reference to any of the different sides of language.
Thus the point to be determined may be one of sound,
or pronunciation ; of words, or vocabulary ; or one of
grammar in the narrower sense, the way in which the
sounds and words of the language are united for the
expression of thought. But the principles which govern
the answer to all questions of good English, whether of
pronunciation, or vocabulary, or grammar, are the same.
The feeling which underlies the distinctions of right and
wrong, of good and bad, is a general feeling for the lan-
guage as a whole, and the threefold division that has
been made is only of practical value as a convenient way
of ordering the various kinds of detail which come up
for discussion.
In the first place, there should be a clear understand-
ing of the difference between " good English " and " con-
ventional " or " standard English." Standard English
326 MODERN ENGLISH
is likely to be good English, but all good English is not
necessarily standard English. What, then, is good Eng.
lish? The purpose of language being the satisfactory
communication of thought and feeling, that is good
English which performs this function satisfactorily.
Such a definition of good English, it will be observed,
is purely utilitarian and practical. It defines good Eng-
lish only in the terms of its activity, without reference
to any theoretical and abstract conceptions of its value
or significance. Whenever two minds come into satis-
factory contact with each other, through the medium of
language, we have then, so far as each instance taken by
itself is concerned, a good use of language. The rustic
with his dialect, and in his own homogeneous dialect
community, realizes as much the purpose of language as
the most polished speaker in the " best society " of the
city. Each expresses himself satisfactorily and is under-
stood satisfactorily, and more than this language at its
best cannot do. Our definition of good English is, there-
fore, very simple ; any English that " hits the mark " is
good English. To hit the mark in the center, it must
express exactly what the speaker or writer wishes to
express, in such linguistic terms as will convey to the
hearer or reader exactly those impressions which it is
intended that, he shall receive.
When we come to analyze the situation a little more
closely, however, we find that there are various kinds of
good English, that the question of " bad English " usu-
ally arises when one kind of English is used in circum-
stances which require a different kind, when one has
tried to hit the mark with the wrong arrow. Thus there
is that form of English which is known as " popular
CONCLUSION 327
English." This is the speech of those who, usually
through limited experience and education, are unac-
quainted with the usage which the community in general
regards as the better social custom. Sometimes, as in
the poetry of Burns, it is made the vehicle for literary
expression. Usually, however, it is a purely colloquial
speech. Naturally, the limits of popular English are
not absolutely defined, but are largely a matter of opin-
ion. The term usually carries with it some unfavorable
connotations. Popukr English is the "vulgar" English
of the lower classes of society. But just who these
lower classes are, just the dividing line between the
upper and the lower, these are matters hard to deter-
mine. A positive test of culture, outside the dogmatic
opinion of individuals, has never yet been discovered.
Certainly it can hardly be said that the person who has
received the conventional education is, by and for that
reason solely, a more highly cultivated person than one
who has not.
A second kind of English is called " colloquial Eng-
lish." This is the speech of the commonplace concerns
cf daily life and of less serious conversation, a speech
freer aiii less conscious than formal speech, but not
carrying with it the suggestion of illiteracy which char-
acterizes popular speech. The degree of colloquialism
which one permits, in one's self or in others, depends on
the subject of conversation, on the intimacy of the ac-
quaintanceship of the persons speaking, and in general
on all the attendant circumstances.
A third kind of English is " formal or literary English."
This is the English of public speaking, of more formal
conversation, and of printed and written literature. It
328 MODERN ENGLISH
varies widely in the degree of its formality, the style of
a philosophic treatise being appropriately more formal
than that of a light essay. There is also one manner of
speaking for the pulpit and another for the lecture-plat-
form, one manner for the judge in court and another for
the stump orator. The line of demarcation between for-
mal and colloquial English is not sharp, just as it is not
between colloquial and popular English. The style of
some authors or public speakers, for example, is de-
cidedly more colloquial, more familiar, than that of
others. With all, however, whatever the degree of for-
mality, the dependence of the literary speech upon the
colloquial speech of natural intercourse is necessary. It
is from the colloquial speech that the literary speech has
its vitality. If left to itself, its tendency would be to
develop into a highly specialized and artificial form of
expression — a special high-caste language for literature
that would grow less and less real and expressive as it
detached itself more and more from the colloquial speech
in which the common human concerns of life and death
find their most intimate expression. It is perhaps
better, therefore, to speak of these three kinds of speech,
popular, colloquial, and literary, not as three distinct and
separate species, but rather as three tendencies of devel-
opment of what is at bottom one speech, and that a
popular speech in the sense that it comes directly from
the experiences of men and women, in the immediate
affairs of life. Language, as Walt Whitman says, " is
something arising out of the work, needs, ties, joys, affec-
tions, tastes, of long generations of humanity, and has
its bases broad and low, close to the ground. Its final
decisions are made by the masses, people nearest the
CONCLUSION 329
concrete, having most to do with actual land and
sea."
Each of these three tendencies of English speech has
its appropriate uses. They are three kinds of arrows
with which different speakers at different moments
strive to hit the mark of good English. To hit the mark
of the serious literary style, one does not use the arrow
of the obviously colloquial speech, and still less of
popular speech. To hit the mark in colloquial conver-
sation, one does not use the arrow of the formal speech,
nor, among cultivated persons, of the popular speech,
unless indeed one is ignorant of the fact that the usages
are regarded as popular by the person whom one is
addressing. The popular speech naturally does not
often come into conflict with the colloquial speech of
polite conversation, or with the formal speech, since the
characteristic of the popular speaker is his ignorance of
the other forms of speech. For the same reason the
speech of polite conversation does not, and need not,
adapt itself to the popular speech when speakers of the
two kinds come into contact with each other. Other-
wise it is assumed "that a man of taste and ability will
modify his use of language to meet the special require-
ments of the task proposed. He will have learned by
study to distinguish between different tones and values
in the instrument of speech, and will have acquired by
exercise the power of touching that mighty organ of ex-
pression to various issues." l
It thus appears, if the above statements are true, that
language which may be adequately expressive, and
therefore good, under one set of circumstances, under a
* Symonds, Essays, Speculative and Suggestive, Vol. I, p. 267.
330 MODERN ENGLISH
different set of circumstances becomes inadequately ex-
pressive, because it says more or less than the speaker
intended, and so becomes bad English. One learns thus
the lesson of the complete relativity of the value of lan-
guage, that there is no such thing as an absolute English,
but that language is valuable only as it effects the pur-
pose one wishes to attain, that what is good at one time
may be bad at another, and what is bad at one time may
be good at another.
But something further must be said about that tend-
ency of English which results in what is known as the
conventional, or standard, English. It is not necessary
to discuss here why mankind strives to formulate cus-
toms and habits into a fixed system. The fact itself is
obvious. Through this natural instinct, as we may call
it, in all our social customs, of daily manners, of dress,
of morals, of speech, more or less regularized systems of
conduct grow up. In language, each community,
whether it is large or small, has a general understanding
that this or that pronunciation, or, this or that rule of
grammar, is the accepted standard, or conventional, one.
This general understanding is arrived at in a purely vol-
untary, and often at first unconscious, way. Nobody
imposes, nobody has the power to impose, any rules of
standard speech on a community. As we have before
pointed out, a rule is merely the statement of the general
custom of a community. We might, consequently,
speak of the standard popular, the standard colloquial,
and the standard literary speech of this or that geo-
graphical community. Usually, however, the term is
understood in a somewhat more limited sense. It is
used to signify not merely the customary use of a com-
CONCLUSION 331
munity, but especially that use when it is recognized and
acknowledged as the good use of that community. Any
usage which is thus given its patent of respectability is
regarded as standard use. It is customary use raised to
the position of conscious legalized use. Of course the
question of standard does not arise until there is some
conflict of standards. As in the case of civil law, no
customary practice is legalized, or standardized, until
doubts are raised with respect to it, until some one
attempts to depart from the customary practice. Then
it is necessary to come to some agreement as to what
shall be recognized as the accepted practice. In the
case of civil law this is done either through the passing
of a formal law by some legislative body, or through the
decisions handed down by judges in passing upon dis-
puted cases of customary and accepted practice in the
dealings of men with each other. In matters of language
the legal or standard practice cannot be so easily deter-
mined. Owing to the fact that there is no legislative
body in language, no specified court of appeal, there is
occasionally lack of agreement as to what shall and what
shall not be recognized as the accepted use of the
language. The government of the language is not as
fully and as definitely organized as is the government of
the business and other overt acts of men. In many
instances, or rather in most instances, there is unanimity
of opinion, and then we have an unquestioned and
general standard use. The great body of English usage
is thus made up of forms of language with respect to
which there is practically no difference of opinion.
Sometimes, however, due to various causes, such as the
souring together of two speakers from two different geo-
332 MODERN ENGLISH
graphical or social speech communities, instances occur
in which there arises difference of opinion. In one com-
munity or one group, he dorit, or these kind of people, or
/ will, for the future, will be accepted as the conven-
tional, standard speech of the community. When they
are used in this community or this group, they express
their thought completely, and carry with them no con-
notation to the discredit of the speaker. In another
geographical community, or by certain speakers within
a community, these usages will be condemned as not
Standard, therefore as not satisfactorily expressive, and
consequently as " wrong" or "incorrect." Who shall
decide ? Nothing can decide but the observation of cus-
tom. What is defended as customary use by a commu-
nity, or even by a single speaker, to carry the matter to
its final analysis, is standard, or conventional, or " right,"
or "correct," in that community or for that speaker.
The question of correctness and incorrectness, that is, of
standard, can only arise when a conflict of opinion arises,
and this conflict can only be decided by such an exten-
sion of the field of observation of customary use, on the
particular question, as will determine finally what the
true custom is. That this is often a difficult matter is
not to be denied ; it is, however, only one of the many
ways in which man is driven to an observation of his sur-
roundings and to a continual adaption of his conduct to
these surroundings. The importance of standard speech
for the welfare of the community should also be recog-
nized. It is only by the acceptance of general custom
that speech can be made effective at all, and it is every
speaker's duty to follow the best custom of the speech
as he views it. Not idiosyncrasy, not singularity, should
CONCLUSION 333
be the ideal in speech, but a wise adjustment to and har-
mony with the general custom of the speech.
Standard, and in that sense conventional and " cor-
rect," English is consequently not altogether the same
thing as good English. We have said that standard
English is the customary use of a community when it is
recognized and accepted as the customary use of the
community. Beyond this, however, is the larger field
of good English, any English that justifies itself by ac-
complishing its end, by hitting the mark. It is plain
that standard English must continually refresh itself by
accepting the creations of good English. It has always
been so in the past, and so it is in the present. If the
standardizing tendency were carried to its fullest extent,
it would result in a complete fixity of language. If by
following standard use one should have to follow custo-
mary use, it is plain that there could be no place in the
standard speech for innovation — all would be summed
up in the simple formula, Follow custom. Language
would thus soon cease to be positively expressive; it
would soon come to have no more personal value than
an algebraic formula. But fortunately the standardizing
tendency can never be carried out to its completest de-
velopment, and opposed to it, or at least complementing
it, will always be the ideal of good English in the
broadest sense of the words. All that the standardizing
tendency can do is to fix a vague and general outline of
the language. This indeed is necessary and valuable
to prevent a complete chaos of pronunciation, of vocabu-
lary, and of grammar. But within these vague limits
there is broad freedom. Poets and prose writers, lively
imaginations of all kinds, in speech as in literature, are
334 MODERN ENGLISH
continually widening the bounds of the conventional and
standard language by adding to it something that was
not there before. They must do so if speech is ever to
rise above the dead level of the commonplace. " Justice
of perception consists in knowing how and when and
where to deviate from the beaten track." But deviation
there must be, and the persons who attain an individual
style in the use of language are those who seize their op-
portunities as they present themselves. To them the
prime and necessary virtue in language is expressive-
ness, and, as complementing this, there should corre-
spond on the part of the hearer or reader the willingness
to receive the expression as fully as it was intended.
Again, however, we insist on the continual application
of the test of good English — it must be satisfactorily
expressive. If it does not justify itself by accomplish-
ing its purpose, if it shocks the prejudices, or the tradi-
tions, of the person to whom it is directed, or if it be
unintelligible, if in any way it fails to secure a satis-
factory and unhindered transmission of the thought,
then to the extent of this failure it is bad English. And
it is bad not because it has failed to satisfy any con-
dition of theoretical, ideal excellence, any notions of
standard, but because in the actual practice of the art of
language it has failed to produce the result for which
that art exists.
APPENDIX
The Old English Chronicle, Laud, 636.
The manuscript of which the opening page is repro-
duced above was written in the early part of the twelfth
century. This is of course relatively late in the Old Eng-
lish period. Owing, however, to the literary conserva-
tism of the writers and compilers of the Chronicle, the
English which we have here differs little in style of
handwriting and in the forms of language from the
English of the two centuries preceding. The trans-
cription of this passage, with interlinear translation, is
as follows:
Of Britain the island is eight hundred of miles long
1 Brittene igland is ehta hund mila lang
two hundred broad here are this
2 and1 twa hund brad. And her sind on pis
island five languages English British
3 iglande fif gepeode, englisc and brittisc
Welsh Scotch Pictish
4 and wilsc and scyttisc and pyhtisc and
Latin First were inhabitants of this land
5 bocleden.2 Erest weron bugend pises landes
the British These came from Armorica settled
6 brittes. pa coman of armenia8 and gesaetan
southward Britain first. Then befell it that the
7 suttewearde bryttene serost. pa gelamp hit paet* pyh-
Picts came from the south from Scithia (?) with long ships
8 tas coman supan of Scithian mid languor* scipum
not many they came first to north Hibernia
9 na manegum. And pa coman aerost on norp ybernian
there asked the Irish they there might dwell But
10 up, and pser baedon* scottas7 paet hi Ser moston wunian. ac
they would not them permit for they said the Irish
11 hi noldan heom lyfan, forftan hi cwaedon, pa scotfca*
886 MODERN ENGLISH
you may tho counsel teach know
12 we eow magon peah hwaSere8 raed gelaeron. We witan
another island here to the east ye may dwell if
13 oper egland her be easton. per ge magon eardian, gif
will any one you opposes assist
14 ge willaS. And gif hwa eow wiftstent, we eow fultumiaft
may conquer. Then fared
15 J>aet ge hit magon gegangan. Da ferdon pa pihtas and ge-
acquired northwards southwards it had
16 ferdon pis land norpanweard, and supanweard hit hef-
the British as before said for themselves
17 don brittas, swa we aer cwedon. And pa pyhtas heom
obtained wives of the Irish the condition would choose their
18 abaedon wif aet scottum on pa gerad paet hi gecuron heora
royal-kin ever woman side they held so long
19 kyne cinn aa on pa wif healfa. paet hi heoldon swa lange
afterwards then befell it after of years the course
20 sySSan. And pa gelamp hit imbe geara rina, paet
of the Irish some deal went from Hibernia to Britain there
21 scotta sum dael gewat of ybernian on brittene and per Ian-
land some deal conquered was their leader Reoda call-
22 des sum dael geeodon. And wes heora heratoga reoda ge-
ed this one they are named Daelreodi Six-
23 haten. From pam heo sind genemnode daelreodi. Six-
ty winters ere that Christ was born Gaius Julius
24 tigum wintrum aer pam pe criste were acenned, gaius iulius
of the Romans caesar with eighty ships sought (i.e., visited)
25 romana kasere mid hund ehtatigum scipum gesohte
Britain was first afflicted with grim
26 brytene. per he wes aerost geswenced mid grimmum
battle much of his army he led astray then
27 gefeohte and micelne his heres forlaedde. And pa he
1 and. The manuscript has here, as frequently, an abbreviation for
the conjunction. 2 bocleden. Literally "book-Latin," meaning the
Latin of the learned classes. 8 armenia. The manuscript reading must
be a mistake for Armorica, on the Continent. * potf. Here again, as
frequently, the conjunction ])cet is abbreviated by giving only the first let-
ter. 6 langum. The manuscript writes langu, but the stroke over the
M indicates an abbreviation. 6 bcedon. The manuscript has bcedo, the
n being omitted by mistake. 7 scottas. The Scotch in the early periods
of English history were the inhabitants of Ireland or Hibernia.
8 Ipeah hwaftere. Equivalent to "however/' altho literally the words
are " tho whether."
APPENDIX 337
In order to indicate the relatively fixed or " classic "
character of the language of the Old English period, it
may be interesting to point out the forms of this text as
they would have been given two hundred years before
the time at which the text was written. It will be ob-
served that the changes are comparatively few in num-
ber and in themselves not very striking. In line 1, ehta
would probably have been written eahta ; in 1. 5, erest
and weron would have been cerest and wceron; in 1. 6,
Brittes would have been Brittas, as it is in 1. 1 7 ; in the
same line, coman and gescetan would have been comon and
gesceton. By the time of this text, however, there was
already entering some feeling of uncertainty with respect
to the vowels of unstressed syllables. In 1. 11,/orSaw in
earlier Old English would have been forftam ; in 1. 16,
he/don would have been hcefdon; in 1. 17, cwedon would
have been cwcedon; in 1. 18, gecuron, an indicative form,
would have been gecuren, an optative or subjunctive
form; in 1. 21, ]>er would have been ]>cer; in 1. 22, wes
would have been wees, and heratoga would have been here-
toga, etc. These changes are very rarely of sufficient im-
portance to obscure the grammatical relationships of the
words. In popular speech doubtless the changes were
much more extensive. The language of the Chronicle is
conservative, literary Old English, such as was preserved
in the seclusion of the monasteries and libraries of Eng-
land. When this conservative literary culture was des-
troyed by the Norman Conquest and its consequences, the
only English which was left was of course the popular, un-
literary English, in which changes had taken place at a much
more rapid rate. It is from this popular English that the
language of the Middle English period is largely derived.
B38 MODERN ENGLISH
Chaucer's Pardoner's Tale.
( From Cambridge Univ. MS. G. G. 4. 27, fol. 306.)
This manuscript was written in the early part of the fif-
teenth century, probably within thirty or forty years after
Chaucer's death. It was written by a professional copy-
ist and is illustrated by means of a number of drawings
representing the characters of The Canterbury Tales.
The following is a transcription of all except the last
four lines of the passage contained in our reproduction :
Here begynnyth the Pardonner his tale.
In flanderys whilhom dwellede a cumpaynye
Of yonge folk that hauntedyn folye,
As ryot, hasard, stewys, and tavernys,
Where as with harpys, lutys and geternys,
They daiwce and pleye at deis bothe day and nyght,
And ete and drynke also ovyr here mygt,
Thowe whiche they don the deuyl sacryfise
With inne that deuyls temple in cursede wyse,
By superfluyte abominable.
Here othis been so greete and so dampnable
That it is gresely for to here hem swere.
Oure blyssede lordis body they to tere ;
Hem thougte that Jewis rente hym not ynough,
And eche of hem at otherys synwe lough.
Letters which in the MS. are indicated by an abbrevia-
tion, usually a stroke above or below the place in which
the letters belong, are printed here in italics. The capi-
tal I of the first word is part of the decoration. The
following is a literal translation of this passage :
In Flanders whilom dwelt a company
Of young folk who practiced (haunted) folly,
APPENDIX 339
As riot, hasard (gambling), brothels and taverns,
Where with harps, lutes and guitars,
They dance and play at dice both day and night,
And eat and drink, also, over their might,
Through which they do the devil sacrifice
Within the devils temple, in cursed wise,
By abominable superfluity.
Their oaths are so great and damnable
That it is grisly to hear them swear.
Our blessed Lord's body they dismember ( to tere ) ;
It seemed to them (Hem thougte) the Jews rent him not
enough,
And each of them at the others sin laughed.
A. phonetic transcription of the passage is as follows :
In flanderz hwilom dweled a kumpenia
Of yurja folk Sat hdntedin folia,
Az riot, hazard, stSwas and tavernas,
hwer az wip harpas, lutas and geternas,
Se dens and pie at des bop d§ and niht,
and et and drink als' 6vir hera mint
pur hwi£ Se don Sa devil sakrifiza
wip in Sat devils tempi' in kursed wiza,
bi superfluity abominable.
hSr 6Sas ben so gret and so dampnabla,
Sat it is gr§sli for to he"r hem swera.
ur blised Lerdis bodi Se totera ;
hem puht Sat j§wis rent him net inuh,
and §£ of hem at 6Serz sina luh.
The First Folio of Suakspere.
( Merchant of Venice, IV, i, 119-152.)
The First Folio of Shakspere was printed in the year
1623. The text of the Merchant of Venice in the First
840 MODERN ENGLISH
Folio, which was the first collected edition of Shak-
spere's plays and which was made up mainly from earlier
editions of the separate plays, was taken from a quarto
edition published in the year 1600. Our passage repre-
sents, consequently, the form which printed literature
took in the first quarter of the seventeenth century.
Some of the spellings are noteworthy. In 1. 122, bank-
rout represents the older spelling of the word, following
French banqueroute, from which it was borrowed ; our
modern spelling bankrupt was due to the desire to indi-
cate the ultimate etymology of the second element, from
Latin ruptus, "broken." Shakspere probably pronounced
no p in the word. In 1. 123, soale and soule are spelt dif-
ferently because there was a slight difference in pronuncia-
tion, great enough to justify the differing othography but
not too great to make the pun seem forced. In Modern
English sole and soul are not distinguishable in sound,
altho the spelling still indicates that they are of differ-
ent etymological origin. Note the cumbersome spelling,
such as keene, mettall, axe, beare, dogge, etc. The spell-
ing dog, beside Shakspere's dogge, offers an argument for
the modern spelling eg instead of egg. Other words of
this group have undergone the change, earlier begg, legg
or begge, legge, etc., simplifying to beg, leg, etc. Instead
of inexecrable, 1. 128, many editors read inexorable. Note
the inconsistent use of capital letters in the passage.
Autograph of Milton's Lycidas, 11.165-193.
This passage from Milton's Lycidas is reproduced from
a facsimile of the manuscript of Milton's minor poems
preserved in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge.
APPENDIX 341
A literal transcription of the passage is as follows, words
crossed out by Milton being printed in italics :
LYCIDAS.
1 Weepe no more wofull shepherds weepe no mor«
2 for Lycidas yor sorrow is not dead
3 sunck though he be beneath the watrie floare
4 so sinks the day starre in the Ocean bed
5 & yet anon repairs his drooping head.
6 and tricks his beams & wth newspangled ore
7 flams in the forhead of ye morning skie
8 so Lycidas sunk low but mounted high high
9 through the deare might of him that walkt ye
waves :
10 where other groves and other streams along
11 w*11 nectar pure pure his oozie locks he laves
12 SibesxeB listening the unexpressive nuptiall song
13 in the blest kingdoms meek of joy & love
14 there entertaine him all the Ste above
15 in sollemne troops, and sweet societies
16 that sing, & singing in thire glorie move
17 and wipe the teares for ever fro his eyes
18 now Lycidas the shepherds weepe no more
19 henceforth thou art the Genius of ye shoare
20 in thy large recompence, & shalt be good
21 to all that wander in that perilous flood
22 Thus sung the uncouth swaine to th' oakes & rills
23 while ye still morne went out wth sandals gray
24 he toucht the tender stops of various quills
25 wtb eager thought warbling his Dorick lay
26 and now the Sun had stretcht out all the hills
27 and now was dropt into westren the wester'n bay
28 at last he rose and twitcht his mantle blew
29 To morrow to fresh woods and pasturs new
342 MODERN ENGLISH
Note the persistence of numerous awkward and un-
economical spellings in Milton's usage, e. g., 1. 1, weepe,
wofull ; 1. 3, sunck, watrie, floare ; 1. 4, starr ; 1. 10, deare ;
1. 12, heares, nuptiall ; 1. 15, sollemne ; 1. 23, oakes, etc.
On the other hand, note how Milton, with his free atti-
tude towards spelling, spells phonetically when he is so
inclined, e. g., 1. 10, walkt ; 1. 25, toucht ; 1. 27, stretcht ;
1. 28, blew, to rime with new.
In line 2, yor is an abbreviation for your, as in line 6,
w01 for with) in line 14, Sts for Saints, and line 17, fro
for from. In line 7 ye is for the, the symbol y being
used instead of the older thorn, J>, the Old English repre-
sentative of th. Of course Milton always pronounced
this word as the not as ye, as is sometimes done by those
who are not aware of the fact that the y is merely an
orthographic substitution for the older p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
This Bibliography gives the titles of only one or two
representative works under each head. The books named
are such as will be found most useful to the student
whose special interests are in English.
1. General Treatises on Language :
Strong, Logemann and Wheeler, History of Language,
New York, 1891. This work is an adaptation and
translation of Paul's Principien der Sprachgeschichte.
Sweet, Henry, The History of Language, The Macmil-
lan Co. , London, 1900. One of the Temple Primers ;
a brief but authoritative review of the subject.
2. English Origins and Institutions :
Chadwick, H. Munro, The Origin of the English Nation,
Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1907.
Dale, E. , National Life and Character in the Mirror of
Early English Literature, Cambridge, Cambridge
University Press, 1907.
Gummere, F. B., Germanic Origins, New York, 1892.
3. General Histories of the English Language :
Lounsbury, T. K., History of the English Language, Re-
vised Edition, New York, 1901.
Emerson, O. F., The History of the English Language,
New York, 1897. In briefer form also as A Brief
History, etc., 1900.
Toller, T. N., Outlines of the History of the English
Language, New York, 1900.
Bradley, Henry, The Making of English^ New York,
1904.
344 MODERN ENGLISH
Jespersen, Otto, Growth and Structure, of the English
Language, Leipzig, B. G. Teubner, 1905.
Wyld, H. C., The Historical Study of the Mother Tongue,
New York, 1906. This book devotes most of its space
to phonetics and to the changes in the spoken form
of the language.
Greenough and Kittredge, Words and their Ways in
English Speech, New York, 1901. This book treats
mostly of words, but it illustrates in its discussions
many of the general principles of growth in language.
4, English Grammars :
Sweet, Henry, A New English Grammar, two parts,
Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1892, 1898.
Matzner, Eduard, Englische Grammatik, two volumes,
3d ed., 1880-1885. Translated into English from
an earlier edition by C. J. Grece, London, 1874.
Kaluza, Max, Historische Grammatik der Englischen
Sprache, two parts, Berlin, Emil Felber, 1906-1907.
Horn, W., Historische neu-englische Grammatik, Strass-
burg, 1908.
Poutsma, H., A Grammar of Late Modern English, for
the use of Continental, especially Dutch, Students, two
parts, Groningen, P. Noordhoff, 1904-1905. This
grammar is written in English, and is valuable to
English readers for its large number of illustrations
from contemporary English.
Among the numerous shorter treatises the following
may be noted : Morris, Historical Outlines of Eng-
lish Accidence ( 1896 ) ; Whitney, Essentials of Eng-
lish Grammar; Abbott, A Shakespearian Grammar;
Kellner, Historical Outlines of English Syntax; and
for a general discussion of the methods and aims in the
teaching of grammar, see Carpenter, Baker and Scott,
The Teaching of English, New York, Longmans,
Green and Co., 1903.
BIBLIOGRAPHY 845
5. English Dictionaries, in the order of their completeness and
reliability as works of scholarly reference :
New English Dictionary, also called The Oxford Dic-
tionary, and sometimes from the name of its general
editor, Murray's Dictionary. This work, which is now
nearing completion, is written on historical principles
and in the light of the best scholarship of modern
times. It is a work of reference for the scholar, not
the general public. It is published at the Clarendon
Press, Oxford ; the first volume appeared in 1888,
and it is now (1908) in the letter R and in its eighth
volume.
The Century Dictionary, and Encyclopedic Lexicon of
the English Language, The Century Company, New
York (copyright, 1889), in six volumes.
The Standard Dictionary, Funk and Wagnalls, New
York, two volumes.
Webster's International Dictionary of the English Lan-
guage, Springfield, Mass., G. and C. Merriam Com-
pany, 1904, one vol.
Skeat, W. W., A Concise Etymological Dictionary of
the English Language, Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1901.
This is the best of the various forms of Professor
Skeat's Dictionary and is a convenient and inexpen-
sive work of reference.
6. English Sounds :
Sweet, H., History of English Sounds, Oxford, 1888.
This is the most elaborate study of English sounds
that has so far appeared. More elementary and deal-
ing more with present English are the following two
works, also by Mr. Sweet.
, The Sounds of English, Oxford, 1908.
, A Primer of Spoken English, Oxford, 1900.
Victor, Elements of Phonetics, English, French^ and
German, translated and adapted by Walter Bipp-
346 MODERN ENGLISH
mann, London, J. M. Dent & Co., 1899. This is an
adaptation of the work of Professor Victor entitled
Kleine Phonetik, Leipzig, 2d ed., 1901.
Skeat, W. W., A Primer of Classical and English
Philology, Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1905. This
book treats of English sounds from the point of -view
of the relationship of English to other languages and
from the point of view of English etymology. The
various general histories and grammars of the Eng-
lish language all treat of English sounds more or
less fully. Attention may be called especially to
H. C. Wyld's Historical Study of the Mother Tongue,
mentioned above.
INDEXES
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
[The numbers refer to pages ]
a, different pronunciations of, 118-119,
131-134
Absolute possessives, 87-88
Accent, 50, 142-150, 199
Adjective, twofold declension of, 49-50
Adveibs, various forms of, 71-72,
309-311
^Ethelred, 28
^Ethelstan, 28
Alcuin, 215
Aldhelm, 215
Alfred, 23, 27, 215
Alphabet, relation to sounds, 113-115 ,
phonetic alphabet, 115-122; reform
of, 174-176
Angles, 20-21
Anglo-Saxons, their conquest of Bri
tain, 19-22; Arthur's battles against,
20; civilization of, 23-27; jewelry
and embroidery made by, 27
Apostrophe, origin of, 86-87
Arthur, 20
Artificial language, 40-48
Ascham, Roger, 245
Augumenting the English vocabulary,
theory of, 235-248
Augustine, 23
Barrie, J. M., 284
Bede, 215, 251
Beowulf, 24
Berners, translation of Froissart, 252
Blickling Homilies, 251
Britain, origin of name, 15-16
Browne, Sir Thomas, 276-277
Brut, 226
Caedmon, 24
Carlyle, his etymologies, 262 and note
Caxton, William, 236-241, 252
Celtic words in English, 212-214
Celts, 15-16; in Gaul, 18
Chaucer, 13, 35, 80, 81, 140, 152, 153,
193, 195, 200, 225, 230, 232, 241, 251,
338-339
Cheke, Sir John, 245
China, use of English in, 38
Chinese, words borrowed from, 258
Chronicle, Old English, 26, 335-337
Cicero, 234, 251
Classification of languages, 44-48
Cnut, 28
Coleridge, 196
Colloquial English, 149-154, 327
Composition, 56-59, 187-193
Concord, value of in modern English,
304-308
Consonants, classification of, 109-110
Conventional English, 325-326
Copulative verbs, 311-313
Counter words as slang, 202-205
Cursor Mundi, 224
Custom in speech, 6-7, 124-125, 154-
166, 325-334
Cynewulf, 24
Dangling participles, 309
Danish invasions, 27-28
Davies, Sir John, 194
Defoe, 195
Democracy, speech of, 7-8
Dialect, 139-141
Dictionaries, their authority, 162-167,
173-174
Differentiation in meanings of words,
186-211
Dutch, words borrowed from, 258
Early South English Legendary, 38
Echoic words, 185
350
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Edward, son of Alfred, 28
Edward the Confessor, 28, 220-221
Egbert, 22
Elyot, Sir Thomas, 241-242, 252
English, compared with German, 53-
54; as a "grammarless tongue,"
59-62; in Middle English period,
74-75; as bilingual language, 220
Erasmus, 236
Esperanto, 40
Etherege, Sir George, 90, 288
Etymology, 260-267
Exeter Book, 26
Fine writing, 283-285
Foreign plurals, 296
Formal grammar, 320-324
Fox, George, 92
Freeman, E. H., 36, note, 222, note
French words in English, 219-233;
late borrowings, 253-255
Function, how determined in modern
English, 308-313
Functional change, differentiation of
vocabulary by means of, 197-199
Function groups, 313-316
Gallomania, 31
Gascoigne, George, 246-247
Gender, 64 and note
German, English borrowings from,
255-257
Glanik, 40
Goethe, 249
Good English, 75-77, 325-334
Gradation, 186-187
Grammar, denned, 286; conservative
tendency in, 287-289; logic in, 304-
308; book grammar, 320-324
" Grand style," 276-278
Greek. 13-14, 46, 236
Grimm, Jacob, 50
Grimm's Law, 50-53, 99
Grocyn, William, 236
Hardacnut, 28
Harvey, Gabriel, 87, note, 242
Hengest, 20
Higden, Ralph, 224
Holmes, O. W., 100
Horsa, 20
Howell, 194
Hunt, Leigh, 132
Hybrids, 272-274
Hyphenation, 189
Idiom, 310-311
Imitation, 124-139
Indian, American, words borrowed
from, 258
Indian, East, words borrowed from,
258
Indo-European family of languages,
44-47
Inflection, nature of, 56-59; in Old
English period, 62-74; in Middle
English period, 74-83 ; in the Mod-
ern English period, 83-98, 289-296 ;
substitution in, 80-94; profit and
loss in inflectional development, 94-
98 ; synthesis and analysis, 94-96 ;
changes in modern period, 289-297.
Inkhorn terms, 242-248
Italian, words borrowed from, 257-21$
Japan, use of English in, 38
Johnson, Dr., 172, 268, 271, 285
Junian manuscript, 26
Jutes, 20-21
Kipling, R., 192
Lamb, Charles, 278
Language, history of, 3 ; function of,
4 ; as social custom, 5-7 ; of a dem-
ocracy, 7-8 ; degeneration and
progress in, 6-7 ; language and
education, 8-9 ; literary and spoken
language, 10-14, 149-154, 327-323;
universal and artificial, 37-43 ; clas-
sification of, 44-48; synthetic and
analytic, 94-96 ; laws of, 123-125
Larynx, 102-104
Latimer, William, 236
Latin, words borrowed from, 212, 21 4-
217
Latinists, 244
Law in language, 50-51, 123-125, 151-
152, 330-334
Layamon, 226
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
351
Liaison, 148-149
Lily, William, 236
Linacre, Thomas, 236
Literary English, 327-328
Lowell, J. R., 139, 199, 284
Mala}*, words from, 258
Metaphor, differentiation of meaning
by, 193-197
Milton, J43, 165, 340-342
Mixed syntax, 316-320
Moliere, 14
More, Sir Thomas, 236
Mutation plurals, 66-67
Nasal twang, 106
Nashe, Thomas, 242
Newspaper English, 284
Norman Conquest, 28-35 ; origin of
Normans, 29 ; loss of Normandy,
30 ; influence of Conquest, 34-35 ;
effect upon vocabulary, 221-222
o, different pronunciations of, 134
Obscure compounds, 142-148, 189-191
Old English, use of the term, 22
Organic sound changes, 141-154
Ormulum, 226
Parliament, first opened with English
speech, 33
Paris, university of, 31
Pathetic fallacy, 196
Pennsylvania German, 140
Periods of English, 35, 54-55
Pettie, G., 248 and note
Philippines, English in, 38 and note;
words borrowed from, 258
Phonetics, defined, 101; phonetic al-
phabet and transcription, 115-122,
174--176; phonetic laws, 123-124
Pidgin English, 38
Polysyllabic humor, 277-278
Popular English, 76, 150-154, 327
Prayer Book, 250
Printing, influence of on spelling, 172
Pronunciation, standard of, 154-166
Proportional elements of the English
vocabulary, 267-269
Provincialism in speech, 141
Purity in vocabulary, 34, 269-274
Puttenham, 247
Quakers, use of thee, 92-93
Renascence, 233-238
Resonance chamber, 104-105
Riley, J. W., 139
Robert of Gloucester, 224
Romans, in Britain, 16-18; Roman
walls, 17 ; departure of, 18-19
Ruskin, John, 196, 262-263
Russian, words from, 258
Saxonists, 244
Saxons, 20-21
Saxon shore, 19
Scandinavian words in English, 817-
219
Scientific vocabulary, 259-260, 278-
279
Scott, Sir Walter, 228-229
Second shifting of consonants, 54
Shall and will, 293-295
Shakspere, 13, 90, 140, 161, 194, 800,
244, 249, 287, 339-340
Sidney, Sir Philip, 244
Slang", 199-211
Social custom, speech as, 6-7, 124-125,
154-166, 325-332
Sounds, the study of, 99-100; pro-
duction of, 101-106; voiced and
voiceless, 106-107; vowel and con«
sonant, 107-109; alphabet and
sounds, 113-115; changes of, 122-
139
Spanish, words from, 258
Speech and race, 15
Spelling reform, 167-182
Spencer, Herbert, 270
Split infinitive, 298-300
Standard English, 154-166, 325-332
Subjunctive, use of, 290
Substitution, 80-94
Suffixes, development of meaning in,
192-193
Swinburne, couplets in his prose, 252
Talking through the nose, 106
Tennyson, Alfred, 164
352
INDEX OF SUBJECTS
Teutonic languages, 48-50
Tilly, William, 236
Trevisa, John, 224-225
u, different pronunciations of, 136-137
[Jrquhart, Sir Thomas, 40
anbrugh, 90
Yercelli Book, 26
Vergil, 234
Vocabulary, clement of English, 267-
268; purity of, 269-272
Voiced and voiceless sounds, 106-107
Volapuk, 40
Vortigern, 20
Vowels, classification of, 111-112
" Weak e," 120
White, R. G., 132
William the Conqueror, 26, 28-29',
221-222
Wilson, Thomas, 243
Word-accent, 50, 199
Word-pairs in English, 250-253
Words, study of, 183-184; creation
of, 184-186; meanings of, 186-211;
borrowing of, 211-260; profit and
loss in borrowing, 275-283; order
of, 297-301
World English, 36-40
INDEX OF WORDS
able, 229
fattfe, 232
candle, 215
adventure, 233
battle-door, 92, note
canoeist, 274
aeronaut, 255
6ear, 208
cap, 232
aerostat, 255
beauty, 233
caprice, 254
age, 229
foe/, 228
captain, 232
aggravating, 281
fo/tec/k, 255
cara/e, 254
agreeable, 233
WsAqp, 215
card, 229
air, 229
bismuth, 255
carew, 254
£ la carte, 254
blackbouler, 255
carouse, 255
a/ms, 215
Wende, 255
cart, 219
ambuscade, 258
6o$rAei, 255
cartra, 18
amiable, 233
6o#ws, 209
cat, 54
amucfc, 258
forif , 229
causeway, 190
animal, 264
bombast, 257
cedar, 216
anft'c, 199
6<mws, 264
cAatr, 229
antique, 199
6oom, 185, 258
cAa7e, 255
anybody else's, 316
ftoo«, 232
ctarity, 228
a/?eo:, 264
ftooze, 208
cAarm, 233
apostle, 215
boule-dogue, 255
cAarfem, 267
appendix, 296
boulingrin, 255
chastity, 233
armor, 232
60*, 194, 216
chauffeur, 265
arm*, 232
6reat&, 32
cAeese, 216
as, 320
breeches, 66
cAe/, 254
asparagus, 190
brigg, 257
chemist, 273
asphalt, 190
brimstone, 190
cAe^-ui, 296
a^AetX 273
JrocJfc, 213
cAesi, 194
aim*, 232
brogue, 214
Cfterfer, 18
automobile, 260
irofl, 231
cW«a, 197
awful, 202
brother, 232
chivalry, 230
6w«, 208
chump, 209
balance, 281
6um, 238
city, 228
ia/Jas*, 257
5w/?er, 257
clan, 214
bamboozle, 209
fcw«er, 216
c/er^y, 232
bandanna, 258
J^faw, 198, 218
cierfc, 165-166, 232
iandif, 296
cfoafe, 232
banner, 232
eade^, 254
cloister, 232
ftanfam, 197
cahoots, 209
c/owfi, 257
&ar», 190
caisson, 255
cZ«6, 255
baron, 232
calends, 216
coat, 232
barrens, 197
ca?/, 228
co6a/«, 255
iasfc, 249
calico, 197
cocfejparrtfi*. ^
base-balhst, 274
caZZ, 219
coiffur*, 254
354
INDEX OF WORDS
cold, 54
desperado, 258
female, 58
collis, 52
dessert, 254
festoon, 254
colonel, 232
didoes, 209
fiancee, 227, 254
compound, 199
die, 219
/erce, 202
condign, 282
dine, 231
fifoclock, 255
construct, 240, note
dinner, 231
finger, 32
contortionist, 274
dipsey, 190
finish, 257
contract, 19
do, 54
/ord, 258
onversationalist, 274
docA;, 258
/re, 200
coquet, 254
do*/, 32, 134-135
/*, 211, note
coracle, 214
dog-cart, 255
/zz, 185
twmw, 51
dogma, 264
fiannel, 214
cottolene, 260
Doncaster, 18
/foe, 258
courage, 233, 254
douof, 229
fiorist, 274
course, 229
dot*™, 213
fiower, 229
cowrf, 232
driften, 257
/u6, 209
courtesy, 230
droof, 208
/unAr, 208
courtliness, 231
drown, 219
/ocus, 296
cousm, 232
druggist, 274
folklorist, 274
coward, 233
drwd, 213
/oof, 51
cowry, 257
dry, 213
football, 255
crave, 218
dschungel, 257
four-in-hand, 25T
crayfish, 191
duchess, 232
/oyer, 227
creed, 215
du/fee, 232
/re*co, 258
cn'cfcef, 255
durna, 258
/ro, 219
criterion, 296
fruit, 229
cromlech, 214
ear, 195
fungus, 264
croojfc, 208
ease, 229
croquet, 257
educationalist, 274
galore, 214
crown, 232
either, neither, 138
gantlet, 258
cry, 229
elegant, 203
#aoJ, 179
culinary, 163
eligible, 282
#ape, 219
cup, 216
elocutionist, 274
garage, 255
cupboard, 190
endorse, 282
^rar a««, 256
engine, 229
gazette, 254
dance, 232
England, 21, 22, note
genius, 264
date, 296
English, 22, note
genre, 227
datto, 258
enfre'e, 254
gentleman, 257
<lead, 54
eway, 257
geyser, 258
Jen/, 54, 137-138
excursus, 264
gingerly, 261
dea/, 54
exemplary, 282
gingham, 258
der^A, 32
Exeter, 18
ginseng, 258
deo*, 178, 229
earif, 264
#/en, 214
deoul, 254
earfra, 264
Gloucester, 18
debutante, 227
glucose, 260
decem, 51
/ace, 229
#oa/, 257
demt iasse, 254
/air, 203-204
#o(/; 257
denouement, 227
/afAer, 51, 232
#o«£, 258
den*, dentis, 51
feast, 231
^ood-oy, 143-144
den&rf, 274
/e//, 51
gossip, 190
INDEX OF WORDS
355
grace, 231
graft, 206
grandee, 258
grave, 54
grimace, 254
groom, 257
grotesque, 254
grunsel, 143
ywess, 33
#«t7d, 33
£«ift, 33
guitar, 254
guttapercha, 258
gymnasium, 296
>i<, 254
hackneyed, 191
Anton, 54
handicap, 257
Aoppy, 219
AarA oacA, 266
Aasty, 229
Aauen, 219
Aear*A, 165-166
heimweh, 256
Ae/p, 54
hensparrow, 58
hiccough, 190
hiylif, 255
A«7/, 52
hinterland, 256
Aft, 219
Aooo, 208
hocus pocus, 209
Ao/d, 54
Aome, 255
Aonor, 230
Aom, 52
Aor<e, 194
Arwr, 229
Aw/fc, 229
hull, 258
human, 199
humane, 199
humbug, 257
Atwoand, 219
/, 190
/, 69, note
•Aon, 258
lord, 144
i//, 219
tory, 258
imperator, 50
/owe, 54
incisive, 281
low, 219
index, 264, 296
/wny, 33
indigo, 258
industry, 242
machete, 259
inoculate, 279
mackintosh, 257
inquiry, 166
madam, 232
Magdalen, 145
/ac&t, 257
magnanimity, 242
jockey, 255
maidservant, 58
;o%, 229
majestats-beleidigung, 256
/ottrt, 232
mandarin, 258
judge, 232
mangelwurzel, 255
justice, 232
manila, 258
manje7'vanf, 58
*a»7, 214
manteau, 254
AaAe, 257
marquis, 232
Aa/<, 54
master, 232
Aafc, 54
matador, 258
ketchup, 258
matron, 164
Aett/e, 216
mattock, 213
keycold, 188
maturity, 242
AicA, 206
menu, 254
kin&rgarten, 256
mercy, 228
Ain#, 32
meter, 216
AftcAen, 216
mi/e, 216
Anave, 54
mi//, 216
knockabout, 257
mischief, 265
knout, 258
mistress, 232
kommodore, 257
moccasin, 258
Ao^'e, 259
mollycoddle, 206
monger, 212
laager, 259
monw«, 273
Ja&or, 228
morgue, 32
langue, 32
mosey, 209
(er) Jau6en, 54
mother, 232
/awn, 153
more, 229
town tennis, 255
muckraker, 206
Jeawe, 54
musicale, 254
fe^end, 164
mwtfon, 228
^e mageste, 256
fetod, 265
na/rfria, 231
/teoe, 54
nation, 232*
/(/I, 257
ne'e, 254
KAe, 320
niece, 232
fon^r, 208
nephew, 232
fooM, 219
nice, 202
/oof, 258
non compos mentis, 209
356
INDEX OF WORDS
noon, 218
plank, 209
sad, 195
Norman, 29
pogrom, 258
sa.oa, 258
nostril, 190
ponche, 255
sandwich, 255
nurse, 257
poodle, 255
sap, 54
^qp, 185
sauerkraut, 255
oasis, 164
j?or&, 228
savior, 232
oblivious, 281
porter, 257
scanJ, 219
octopus, 163
portray, 232
scare, 219
odd, 219
potato, 258
sc/m/, 54
odium, 264
pound, 212
scfcecfc, 257
oleomargarine, 260
jwwer, 228, 232
schedule, 163
omen, 264
prayer, 232
schieben, 54
onus, 264
preach, 232
scAtJ, 54
onyc, 264
predicament, 281
schlafen, 54
opera, 258
premium, 264
scrips, 257
opium, 264
present, 199
schmack, 257
orangoutang, 258
preteeZ, 255
scientist, 274
orchard, 190
pries*, 215
scrape, 219
organ, 215
prince, 232
seemly, 219
ows£, 229
progress, 164
sei^re, 232
over, 54
pronunciamento, 259
sergeant, 232
ox, 228
publicist, 274
series, 264
/my, 197
service, 232
pwwcA, 257
sAa/e, 255
palace, 254
sAa« and will, 293-295
pannequet, 225
shamrock, 214
paresis, 166
ywarte, 255
sAeep, 54, 228
/>ass, 229
shillelagh, 214
pastor, 264
racial, 273
sAtp, 54
pastry, 231
radium, 259
sAor*, 208
pater, 51
raglan, 257
sAove, 54
./wrtA, 131-134
ra/a&, 258
silvertip, 188
patron, 164
ransack, 219
simmer, 185
pauper, 264
rea/ra, 232
sir, 232
^eace, 228, 232
reconcentrado, 259
sister, 232
peach, 205
recondite, 166
«Y, 54
^pecfc, 229
redingote, 255, 257
situate, 240, note.
pellis, 51
regal, 273
sm/e, 185
pemmican, 258
record, 257
skedaddle, 209
peremptory, 163
re/tc, 232
sH, 258
perfect, 177
rhum, 255
syh'aoo, 209
perfume, 199
rind, 153
«JKK, 219
phenomena, 296
riteen, 54
«iin, 219
piano, 258
river, 229
skipper, 258
pibroch, 214 '
roasf, 231
«*«//, 219
piquenique, 255
roooer, 257
«%, 219
plaid, 214
rosot/, 255
sZan^, 257
j^ate, 231
rotten, 219
s/eep, 54
.pfca, 232
roya/, 232
slogan, 214
/>&««*, 232
ruppee, 258
stoop, 275
INDEX OF WORDS
367
slough, 213
technique, 227
tt^r/y, 219
smoking, 257
telegram, 260
ttfoter, 257
snicker, 185
telegraph, 260
uncte, 232
snide, 209
telharmonic, 260
unique, 281
sobriety, 242
temperance, 242
universal, 282
soil, 229
temperate, 282
use, 229
soiree, 254
ten, il
usquebaugh, 214
soldier, 228
tenaVr, 257
sowwd, 152-153
tentm, 51
vaterland, 256
sozodont, 260
terminus, 264
t>eaJ, 228
spalpeen, 214
*Ae«, 54
vers(, 258
species, 264
«Ain, 51
viewpoint, 188
spectrum, 264
tAow, 51, 89-93
tn'fe'n^r, 258
spenzer, 257
*AraW, 182
villain, 261
spondulix, 208
tAree, 51
villainy, 233
squalor, 163
thrive, 219
vt'rtoe, 233
square, 258
tig on, 51
vizor, 163
starboard, 190
tf/e, 216
vodka, 258
*fate, 232
<»•«, 219
stet'n, 255
tin, 54
wade, 265
tteppe, 258
to, 54
waK, 212
steward, 257
toart, 255
wa/t«, 255
stirrup, 144, 190
tobacco, 258
wampum, 258
stodbs, 257
tobacconist, 274
weltschmerz, 256
*tooJ, 220
toboggan, 258
wAir, 185
atore, 257
toilette, 254
whiskey, 214
s/rata tn'a, 17, 212
tomato, 138
toAte, 185
street, 17, 212
tongue, 32, 54
wielen, 212, note
strtik, 257
tonne au, 255
wi/e, 262-263
strenge, 22, note.
toofA, 51, 54
«n/man, 58, 144
string, 22, note.
top, 257
wigwam, 258
rfwdio, 258
Tory, 214
TFtncAe*ter, 18
stupendous, 281
tottrut, 274
window, 144, 189
«M»«, 232
town, 228
wine, 212
sw'te, 254
trainer, 257
woman, 58, 144, 19C
«*Men, 195
tramway, 255
Worcester, 18
supper, 231
transit, 264
wor/fe, 228
sweater, 257
treJfc, 259
write, 54
swnne, 228
tre«, 51
wron^, 219
trimmen, 257
«aWe, 229
tro«, 258
zaAn, 54
tatte d' Wte, 254
trowpe, 179
Zeitgeist, 256
taooo, 258
t«, 51
zinc, 255
to&e, 219
t«6e, 136-137
zt'nn, 54
toitoo, 258
ttinye, 32
zoology, 278-279
ta«6, 54
twr/, 257
*w, 54
tea, 258
<ypt«t, 274
a«nye, 54
9 L ft
JAN 1 0 1990
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY